Fundamentals of Library of Congress Classification

Editors:
Lori Robare, University of Oregon
Steven Arakawa, Yale University
Paul Frank, Library of Congress
Bruce Trumble, Harvard University

Developed by the
ALCTS/CCS-PCC Task Force on
Library of Congress Classification Training
Lori Robare, University of Oregon, Chair
Steven Arakawa, Yale University
Lois Mai Chan, University of Kentucky
Paul Frank, Library of Congress
Mark McKnight, University of North Texas
Caroline Miller, University of California, Los Angeles
Scott Opasik, Indiana University
Mary Kay Pietris, Library of Congress
Bruce Trumble, Harvard University
Rebecca Uhl, Arizona State University
ALCTS and the Program for Cooperative Cataloging (PCC) developed this
course jointly to provide additional training opportunities for the larger
library community, including both PCC and non-PCC participants. The
workshop focuses on the application of Library of Congress Classification
numbers to bibliographic records. It is useful for general audiences and for
member institutions of the PCC BIBCO and SACO Programs. Institutions
interested in contributing new or changed numbers to the Library of
Congress Classification system are invited to read about PCC SACO
membership on the web page: http://www.loc.gov/catdir/pcc/saco/saco.html

(1) Instructor Manual – (2) Trainee Manual

ISBN (Instructor Manual) 0-8444-1186-8
ISBN (Trainee Manual) 0-8444-1191-4
Instructor Manual

Table of Contents

Foreword
Introduction for Instructors

Session 1 Overview of Classification

Session 2 Brief History of the Library of Congress Classification
Session 3 Outline of LC Classification
Exercises
Session 4 Tools for LC Classification
Session 5 Elements of LC Call Numbers
Exercises
Session 6 Principles of LC Classification and Assigning Numbers
Exercises
Session 7 Tables
Exercises
Session 8 Schedule P: Language and Literature
Exercises
Session 9 Special Types of Material
Exercises
Session 10 Schedule H: Social Sciences
Exercises
Session 11 Schedule N: Fine Arts
Exercises
Session 12 Local Policy Decisions
Session 13 SACO: Subject Authority Cooperative Program
Exercise

Appendices:
A: Excerpt from QH540 Ecology
B: Shelflisting Tables
B.1 Cutter Table (G 63)
B.2 Dates Table (G 140)
B.3 Translation Table (G 150)
B.4 Biography Table (G 320, F 275)
C: Tables from Schedules
C.1: P-PZ40
C.2: N6 and N7
D: Additional Exercises
E: Additional Resources
E.1 Bibliography
E.2 Other Classification Schemes
E.3 Historical Data
F: Answers to Exercises
G: Workshop Evaluation Form

Fundamentals of LC Classification 1
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
FOR DOUBLE SIDED COPY
Instructor Manual

Foreword

The Association for Library Collections and Technical Services (ALCTS) and the
Program for Cooperative Cataloging (PCC) have joined forces to develop a program
designed to teach skills in using Library of Congress Classification. This joint initiative
is a logical outgrowth of the missions of both organizations. As reflected in their
respective strategic plans, each has a strong commitment to training and continuing
education.

The partnership to create training programs in basic cataloging skills began with a
workshop on subject cataloging using Library of Congress Subject Headings. This was
followed by a workshop on name and title authority work. In 2004, a task force was
appointed to develop a new workshop on Library of Congress Classification. The task
force was charged with: identifying the potential audience for the material; evaluating
existing materials; determining the comprehensiveness of course materials; developing an
outline of topics to be covered in the course; and writing and editing the training
materials. The task force was also assigned to present one session of the training
materials at the Annual Conference of the American Library Association in June 2006
and to present the entire suite of materials at an ALCTS preconference at the 2007 ALA
Annual Conference in Washington, D.C.

The task force has used as its models the course Basic Subject Cataloging Using LCSH
and the courses of the Serials Cataloging Cooperative Training Program (SCCTP), both
of which provide standardized training materials and skilled professionals to deliver
training to catalogers in the field. This model relies on library associations, networks,
and institutions to sponsor the workshops and use the materials developed.

The content developed for Fundamentals of Library of Congress Classification is jointly

owned by ALCTS and the PCC, and will be maintained by a joint task group. The
Library of Congress’ Cataloger's Learning Workshop is the publisher and distributor of
the workshop materials.

Lori Robare
Chair, ALCTS/CCS-PCC Task Force on Library of Congress Classification Training

Fundamentals of LC Classification 2
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
FOR DOUBLE SIDED COPY
Instructor Manual

Introduction for Instructors

Fundamentals of Library of Congress Classification has been designed for an optimum

class size of under 30. The full workshop requires two days and is best presented with a
team of two trainers. It is possible to shorten the workshop slightly by omitting some of
the later sessions, but it would be difficult to cover the most important concepts in
working with LCC and allow sufficient time for exercises and discussion with less than a
very full day and a half.

This workshop is based upon the SCCTP model, yet there are some differences from
SCCTP courses. This workshop is less modular and does not lend itself to rearrangement
of sessions as easily. Sessions build upon concepts introduced in earlier sessions.
Instructors are free to do some tailoring of the workshop for specific audiences but in
order to avoid gaps, instructors should use caution in rearranging or omitting material.

Sessions 3, 5-11, and 13 include exercises. Time is allotted in the schedule for
completion and discussion of exercises, but instructors may wish to vary the approach
depending upon the audience and time constraints. Participants may do the exercises
individually or in small groups and come together to review results with the instructor, or
the entire group may work through and discuss the exercises together. Two
supplementary exercises for session 8 (Schedule P: Language and Literature) are
provided in the Appendix, to give attendees more practice working with literary author
tables. It is unlikely that there will be sufficient time to complete these within the time
constraints of a two-day workshop, but attendees can complete them on their own.

Audience for this workshop:

The workshop is designed to cover basic skills: to give attendees a solid foundation in the
principles and practices of the Library of Congress Classification, an introduction to the
most important tools, and practice in working with tables and creating complete call
numbers. Many topics were deliberately left out of the curriculum in order to cover the
basics without overwhelming attendees and to allow time for active participation through
exercises. Examples and exercises have been chosen to emphasize routine practices, not
exceptions or especially complex issues.

Advertising for the workshop should make clear to potential attendees that this is a basic
course. (Of course, it is often the case that experienced catalogers attend “basic”
workshops in order to fill in gaps in their understanding.)

Explanation of the components of the workshop:

Instructors have each PowerPoint slide, along with the notes, printed one slide per page.
Attendees have the slides only, printed two slides per page.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 3
Instructor Manual

• Session 1, Overview of Classification: An introduction to classification in

general, including introduction of terminology, brief overview of selected
classification systems, and discussion of the value of classification.
• Session 2, Brief History of the Library of Congress Classification: Describes
the origin and development of LCC.
• Session 3, Outline of LC Classification: Explains the outline and important
features of the schedules, including the general pattern of subarrangement within
classes.
o Exercises: Two exercises in interpreting the class schedules. The first
emphasizes form subdivisions and the second focuses on geographic
divisions.
• Session 4, Tools for LC Classification: Describes the versions of the LC
Classification schedules available (print and electronic) and auxiliary tools that
are used with LCC. This session concludes with a brief overview of features in
Classification Web.
• Session 5, Elements of LC Call Numbers: Explains the elements that make up a
call number and how they are determined. Introduces basic shelflisting practice,
additions to call numbers, and MARC coding of call numbers.
o Exercises: The first exercise gives attendees practice formulating Cutter
numbers using the LC Cutter table (this one is done mid-way through the
session). The second asks attendees to identify MARC coding errors in
call numbers.
• Session 6, Principles of LC Classification and Assigning Numbers: Outlines
the general principles to apply when classifying works according to LCC and
strategies for finding a class number, including a brief description of some search
options in Classification Web.
o Exercise: Gives attendees practice identifying the most specific number
for a topic.
• Session 7, Tables: An overview of tables of general application, including
geographic tables based on Cutter numbers, the translation table, and the
biography table.
o Exercise: Applying the biography table.
• Session 8, Schedule P: Focus on the language and literature schedules and tables.
o Exercises: The first exercise focuses on the language tables; the second on
the P-PZ40 table. Excerpts from tables are provided and attendees are
asked to supply or complete call numbers for several titles. It is important
to walk attendees through the process for each exercise, ideally by
working on the first title as a group, because it may not be immediately
clear how the different excerpts from tables relate to each other.
Additional exercises (and answers) are provided in Appendix D for more
practice with literary author tables.
• Session 9, Special Types of Material: An overview of classification and
shelflisting practices for special types of material including editions, serials,
congresses, and works entered under corporate body.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 4
Instructor Manual

o Exercises: Three exercises, one done mid-way through the session and
two at the end. The first focuses on editions; the second two on
congresses and serials.
• Sessions 10-11, Schedules H and N: Each of these sessions focuses on a
particular schedule and provides guidance in classifying and working with tables.
o Exercises: Excerpts from tables are provided and attendees are asked to
supply or complete call numbers for various titles using the tables. It is
important to walk attendees through the process for each exercise, ideally
by working on the first title as a group, because it may not be immediately
clear how the different excerpts from tables relate to each other.
• Session 12, Local Policy Decisions: Discussion of local options related to choice
of classification number (alternative numbers, classify or not) and shelflisting
decisions (work marks, additions to call numbers). This session can be used to
engage attendees in discussion about their own practices if desired.
• Session 13, SACO: Subject Authority Cooperative Program: Introduction to
the process of proposing a new class number through SACO. Describes both
paper and electronic means of submitting proposals, but focuses on using the
online proposal system through Classification Web.
o Exercise: Attendees walk through the process of creating a classification
number proposal using the electronic submission method.
• Answer slides: Answer slides for all sessions are provided in a single file rather
than integrated into each session. Many of the exercises are done at the mid-point
of a session, and this method of providing answer slides allows the slide
numbering for instructors and trainees to remain in synch. Plan ahead for opening
the Answer slides file and switching to it at appropriate points using <Alt-Tab>.
The answer slides with notes are printed in the instructor’s manual following
Session 13. Answer slides are reproduced two per page (without notes) in
Appendix F.

Appendices:
• Appendix A: Excerpt from QH540 Ecology
• Appendix B: Shelflisting Tables (Cutter Table, Dates Table, Translation Table,
Biography Table, Regions and Countries Table)
• Appendix C: Tables from Schedules (P-PZ40, N6, N7)
• Appendix D: Additional Exercises (including P-PZ tables used and answers)
• Appendix E: Bibliography; Other Classification Schemes; Historical Data
• Appendix F: Answers to Exercises
• Appendix G: Workshop Evaluation Form

Suggested Workshop Schedule:

Day One:

8:30-8:55 Overview of Classification

8:55-9:15 Brief History of the Library of Congress Classification
9:15-10:15 Outline

Fundamentals of LC Classification 5
Instructor Manual

10:15-10:30 Break
10:30-11:00 Tools for LC Classification
11:00-12:00 Elements of LC Call Numbers
12:00-1:15 Lunch
1:15-2:45 Principles of LC Classification and Assigning Numbers
2:45-3:00 Break
3:00-3:30 Tables
3:30-5:00 Schedule P

Day Two:

8:30-10:15 Special Types of Material

10:15-10:30 Break
10:30-12:00 Schedule H
12:00-1:15 Lunch
1:15-3:00 Schedule N
3:00-3:15 Break
3:15-4:00 Local Policy Decisions
4:00-4:45 Introduction to SACO
4:45-5:00 Wrap-up; Questions and Discussion

Tips for preparing to teach the workshop:

• Study the Instructor Manual very carefully, practice with the slides, and work
through the exercises ahead of time.
• Decide which tools you want to have available during the workshop and plan
ahead for how you will refer to them. It is helpful, but not essential, to have
access to the SCM: Classification and SCM: Shelflisting. If you use an electronic
version (such as Cataloger’s Desktop), practice making the transition from
PowerPoint and back again.
• If you wish to make any modifications to slides, exercises, examples, etc., do so
before the workshop. Be aware that the trainees’ manuals will not reflect your
changes.
• Plan ahead for how you will handle exercises, discussions, warm-ups, etc. Plan
ahead for directing attendees to materials in the Appendices at appropriate points.
• Consider using a flip chart for recording participants’ suggestions or illustrating
concepts.
• Be aware of the full course outline. Some topics are mentioned briefly in earlier
sessions but covered in depth in later sessions; attendees may raise questions that
will be covered in materials in a later session. Be prepared to defer questions
rather than getting sidetracked; this gives attendees the benefit of structured
explanation of the topic and keeps the workshop on track.
• Think about the approach you will take to handle unexpected questions, off-topic
discussions, topics too advanced for this audience, and to generally keeping the
workshop on schedule.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 6
Instructor Manual Introduction

Fundamentals of Library of
Congress Classification

[NOTE: Goals for the workshop are listed on the next slide]

Suggested activities for getting started:

•Introduce instructors
•Ask each participant to identify him/herself, his/her institution and position,
and also, if they wish, say a little about their background
•Go over with participants the course outline and the contents of their manual.
Point out the position of the exercises at the end of relevant sessions, the
appendices, etc.
•Discuss the planned timing for the two days, for breaks, lunch, etc.
•Mention details such as location of restrooms if not yet covered (often the
workshop sponsor will take care of this).

Fundamentals of LC Classification 0-1

Instructor Manual Introduction

Goals of the workshop

„ Provide attendees with an understanding of
the principles and practices of Library of
Congress Classification
„ Teach general skills in classification and
shelflisting
„ Provide guidance in the use of classification
tools
„ Give attendees practice creating complete LC
call numbers

Welcome to Fundamentals of Library of Congress Classification!

The goals of this two-day workshop are: [text from slide]

[NOTE: Instructors may wish to note that the course is designed to cover basic
skills. Experienced catalogers will find much that is familiar to them already.
In order to focus on basic skills in areas most often used by generalists, some
topics were deliberately left out of the curriculum; for example, the workshop
does not cover classification of law, music, or cartographic materials.]

Fundamentals of LC Classification 0-2

Instructor Manual Session 1
Overview of Classification

Overview of Classification

Session 1

Fundamentals of LC Classification 1-1

Instructor Manual Session 1
Overview of Classification

This session covers:

„ What is classification?
„ Basic classification terminology
„ Selected classification systems
„ Choosing a classification system
„ Is classification necessary?

Fundamentals of LC Classification 1-2

Instructor Manual Session 1
Overview of Classification

“Classification is everywhere. We classify birds

and animals, languages and ethnic groups,
stars, volcanoes, minerals and clouds, wine
and blood, and colours and roses…
“It is natural to the human mind to classify, and
essential if we want to make sense of the
world, which is full of unique creatures and
objects.”
from Essential Classification, by Vanda
Broughton

Fundamentals of LC Classification 1-3

Instructor Manual Session 1
Overview of Classification

What is classification?
„ Classification in general
„ The placing of subjects into categories
„ Provides a system for organizing,
categorizing knowledge
„ Roots of current classification systems go
back to Aristotle’s classical theory of
categories

Aristotle: things are placed into the same category based on what they have in
common – category is like an abstract container with things either inside or
outside the container.

[NOTE: Arlene Taylor’s The Organization of Information has an excellent

discussion of classification theory and overview of classification schemes.]

Fundamentals of LC Classification 1-4

Instructor Manual Session 1
Overview of Classification

Classification of books
If you were organizing a collection of books,
how might you arrange them?
„ Author’s last name
„ Title
„ Subject “Public orderings”
„ Size
„ Color
„ Hardback vs. paperback
„ Publisher
7

Many people organize their personal libraries – some approaches listed here.

Henry Petroski’s The book on the bookshelf includes an appendix called

“Order, Order” in which he lists different approaches to arrangement of
personal libraries. Those listed here he calls “public orderings” because the
principle behind a grouping would be more or less evident to someone looking
at the shelves.
ANIMATION: click to bring in text box

Fundamentals of LC Classification 1-5

Instructor Manual Session 1
Overview of Classification

Classification of books (2)

„ Read and unread books
„ Order of acquisition “Private orderings”
„ Provenance
„ Sentimental value

„ According to a classification system

such as LCC or DDC
8

ANIMATION: click to bring in text box

The top four approaches here are “private orderings” – the arrangement would
be very difficult for anyone but the owner of the library to discern. Petroski
lists more in his book, such as arrangement by ISBN, by price, and by opening
sentence.

Ask attendees if they have additional personal organization schemes?

Fundamentals of LC Classification 1-6

Instructor Manual Session 1
Overview of Classification

Classification in libraries
„ Use of a systematic scheme for the
arrangement of books and other materials
„ Purpose:
„ Bring related items together in a useful sequence
from the general to the specific
„ Provide a shelving location that patrons use to
locate materials
„ Enable patrons to browse collections on a topic,
either in person or online

In American libraries, classification has been used primarily as a shelving

device, but it has great potential as an information retrieval tool as well.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 1-7

Instructor Manual Session 1
Overview of Classification

One result of classification in libraries:

Books with call number labels on shelves

Call number labels on books are what many people think of when thinking of
classification – we’ll talk more about all of the elements that go into the call
number in a later session.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 1-8

Instructor Manual Session 1
Overview of Classification

Early library classification

systems
„ Various types of arrangement: by broad
subject, author, title,order of acquisition, size
„ Often used “fixed location” – book assigned a
spot on a particular shelf
„ Starting in 16th century, librarians devised
many classification schemes
„ Jefferson’s system (based on Francis Bacon’s
outline of knowledge) most well known
„ None really caught on till end of 19th century
11

[NOTE: for more information on early systems of organizing information and

shelving books see (respectively) Arlene Taylor’s The Organization of
Information and Henry Petrowski’s The Book on the Bookshelf, both listed in
the bibliography.]

Factors affecting the adoption of classification schemes:

In the 19th century, libraries were becoming more numerous and library
collections were growing.
Before the end of the 19th century, it was more common for libraries to have
closed stacks (patrons are not allowed to browse the shelves, but have books
retrieved for them). Around the end of the 19th century, libraries increasingly
moved toward open stacks, where patrons are able to go to the stacks
themselves to browse and select materials. Arranging the books by subject
made it easier for patrons to use the library.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 1-9

Instructor Manual Session 1
Overview of Classification

Some early developers & systems

„ Francis Bacon
„ 1605, published his outline of knowledge
„ Jean Le Rond d’Alembert
„ 1751, published ideas on how Diderot’s
Encyclopédie might be arranged
„ Thomas Jefferson
„ System based on Bacon and d’Alembert
„ Melvil Dewey
„ Dewey Decimal Classification
„ Charles Ammi Cutter
„ Expansive Classification 12

Some of the early developers of classification schemes – names may be

familiar.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 1-10

Instructor Manual Session 1
Overview of Classification

Basic terminology
Classify:
To categorize, in order to arrange books on the
shelves according to subject, using a classification
system
Classification schedules:
The books (or files) that contain class numbers
Notation:
The system of symbols used to represent the classes
in a classification system
13

Fundamentals of LC Classification 1-11

Instructor Manual Session 1
Overview of Classification

General process for classification

„ Analyze the subject content of the work
„ Summarize the primary subject focus of the work as a whole
„ Possible next step: Formulate subject headings that express
what the work is about (not the focus of this workshop)
„ Go to the classification schedules and determine
where the item should be placed within that scheme
„ Assign the class number
„ As appropriate for the scheme, add additional
elements to the class number

14

1st bullet: we’re not covering the formulation of subject headings in this
workshop, and this is certainly not a necessary step in classification. In
practical terms, however, many catalogers follow this sequence of steps and
assign subject headings before classifying an item. Copy catalogers may often
work with copy that has subject headings but requires classification.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 1-12

Instructor Manual Session 1
Overview of Classification

Types of classification schemes

„ Hierarchical
„ Subjects are divided hierarchically, from general to specific
„ Enumerative
„ All aspects of a subject are explicitly provided for in the
schedules
„ Analytico-synthetic
„ Commonly occurring concepts (place, form, etc.) are listed
once and notation is used to build or synthesize numbers
„ Faceted
„ Does not assign fixed numbers to subjects, but combines
facets of a subject in a composite number

15

Now we’ll talk briefly about types of classification schemes and some of the most common
schemes in U.S. libraries.
[NOTE: this slide and the next are meant to raise awareness of other approaches to
classification. Depending on the audience, the instructor may wish to spend little (or no) time
on these concepts. Detail provided in the notes is primarily for the instructor’s benefit and not
necessarily intended to be covered in depth with the attendees.]
ANIMATION: click for each bullet
1st bullet: Most classification schemes are hierarchical, creating categories from general to
specific. [Colon Classification is an exception – mentioned later.]
2nd bullet: Enumerative classification systems (such as LCC) often include lengthy lists of
compound and complex subjects. Terms for aspects such as place, period, and form appear
repeatedly throughout the schedules.
3rd bullet: Dewey Decimal Classification is one example of an analytico-synthetic scheme.
4th bullet: Colon Classification is an example of a faceted scheme -- we’ll see an example of a
Colon Classification number in slide 23. Many people are hearing about faceted displays in
new interfaces to library catalogs – these typically make use of subject subdivisions to allow
users to narrow a search by form, geographic treatment, or chronological period. Faceted
classification is quite different.

[NOTE: a classification scheme can fit more than one of these types – for example, LCC is
hierarchical and very enumerative. DDC is hierarchical and enumerative (though much less
so than LCC) and has analytico-synthetic features.]
[NOTE: see Arlene Taylor’s The Organization of Information, p. 176-181, for an excellent
explanation of these concepts.]

Fundamentals of LC Classification 1-13

Instructor Manual Session 1
Overview of Classification

Selected classification schemes

„ Most common in U.S. libraries:
„ Dewey Decimal Classification (DDC)
„ Library of Congress Classification (LCC)
„ Superintendent of Documents (SuDocs)
„ National Library of Medicine (NLM)
„ More common outside U.S.:
„ Universal Decimal Classification (UDC)
„ Colon Classification (CC)
16

We’ll focus on LCC for the rest of the workshop, but first note that there are a
number of different classification schemes used in libraries.

There is more information on these classification schemes in your appendix.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 1-14

Instructor Manual Session 1
Overview of Classification

Brief look at DDC & LCC

City on the Seine: Paris in the time of Richelieu
and Louis XIV / Andrew Trout, 1996.

DC DDC 944.361033
729 T58c
.T76 LCC
1996

17

LCC and Dewey are the most commonly used schemes in U.S. libraries. Here
is an example of a call number for the same work in both Dewey and LCC.
(pronunciation tip: Richelieu Æ Ree shell you)

Why might a library choose one over the other? This is likely a decision that
was made long ago in your library, but it can be useful to know the general
features of each scheme in case you are asked this question by staff or patrons,
or in case your library considers using another classification for all or part of
its collection.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 1-15

Instructor Manual Session 1
Overview of Classification

Dewey Decimal Classification

(DDC)
„ Developed by Melvil Dewey in 1876
„ Widely used by public and school
libraries in the U.S.
„ Used in more than 135 countries
„ Translated into over 30 languages
„ DDC now owned by OCLC, available in
print and web editions
18

Currently in 22nd edition

One reason DDC has been widely adapted internationally is that it is a numeric
system (as opposed to alphanumeric)

Fundamentals of LC Classification 1-16

Instructor Manual Session 1
Overview of Classification

Library of Congress
Classification (LCC)
„ Designed to arrange LC’s collections
„ Widely used in academic libraries
„ Enumerative – more is spelled out in the
schedules
„ Larger – over 40 separate volumes
„ Economical notation (shorter numbers)

19

Just a few points about features of LCC in comparison to DDC – much more
later

Fundamentals of LC Classification 1-17

Instructor Manual Session 1
Overview of Classification

Considerations in choosing a
classification scheme
„ Focus of the collection to be classified
„ General or specialized?
„ Maintenance of the schedules
„ Revised to accommodate new subjects?
„ Do revisions require reclassification?
„ Cost
„ Availability of catalog copy using the scheme
„ Cost of the schedules, print and/or electronic
„ Personnel issues
„ Professional/paraprofessional staff, students,
volunteers? 20

Fundamentals of LC Classification 1-18

Instructor Manual Session 1
Overview of Classification

Advantages to using LCC vs.

DDC?
„ Widely available on catalog copy with
complete call number
„ Relatively unlimited expansion, not
requiring wholesale revision
„ Shorter numbers
„ Cooperative opportunity to introduce
new numbers
21

1st bullet: Dewey numbers on LC copy do not include pre-assigned book

number (trainers be aware that the concept of book numbers has not yet been
explained)

Fundamentals of LC Classification 1-19

Instructor Manual Session 1
Overview of Classification

Disadvantages of using LCC

vs. DDC?
„ Lack of consistency among schedules
„ Too large for an individual to fully master
„ No single index
„ Too complex for children’s collections
„ Based on literary warrant from LC’s
collections
„ Parts of its organization still reflect 19th/early
20th century worldview
22

3rd bullet: Although there is no single index, Classification Web serves as an

overall index

Fundamentals of LC Classification 1-20

Instructor Manual Session 1
Overview of Classification

Is classification necessary?
„ Importance of classified shelving for browsing
„ It can be difficult to determine which books are
most relevant solely from info in catalog records
„ Focused browsing within books organized by
subject enables in-depth research
„ Enables discovery by serendipity or recognition
„ Why classify:
„ Material in closed stacks?
„ Remote electronic resources?
„ “Call number = shelf location”
23

[Note: Thomas Mann has written extensively about the importance of

classified shelving for research and about the threat to classified shelving at
the Library of Congress. Some of his points are paraphrased here in the first
bullet & notes. Citations to his writings are in the bibliography.]
ANIMATION: click to bring in each bullet
1st bullet: Paraphrasing from Thomas Mann: Having books shelved by
subject, rather than by accession number, size, etc., gives researchers a major
advantage in gaining subject access to their contents. When you search the
library catalog, you are searching only brief records that cannot represent the
full content of the works. Focused examination of books in a particular
subject area -- the ability to see what is in chapters and indexes of books, to
examine illustrations and figures -- enables in-depth research. Browsing
classified stacks also enables scholars to simply recognize relevant texts whose
keywords they cannot specify in advance. Mann cites user studies indicating
that scholars throughout the country continue to regard browsing library book
collections arranged in subject classified order as essential to their research.
2nd bullet: Why bother to classify materials that are not available for physical
browsing and retrieval? Material in closed stacks could be given accession
numbers only; cost would be reduced for both classification and shifting of
shelves to accommodate new material. Many libraries decide not to classify
Internet resources and other electronic resources, based on the view that
patrons assume a call number is a shelf location only.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 1-21

Instructor Manual Session 1
Overview of Classification

Is classification necessary? (2)

„ Classification as collocation of all
resources
„ Allow for browsing of all materials in
collection, physical or intangible, on shelf
or not
„ Benefits for collection analysis
„ Browsing e-journal or database lists
„ Used by some Internet resource directories
as a means for organizing resources
24

Classification has many benefits as a collocation device – for bringing together

like material whether it is tangible or not. Within a library collection, browsing
by class number provides the user with a view of all resources on a specific
topic, whether physical or electronic, whether on the shelf or checked out.
Automated collection analysis programs make use of classification number
ranges.
Classification also has great potential as a means of organizing networked
resources. It can assist with browsing and with narrowing or broadening of
searches.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 1-22

Instructor Manual Session 1
Overview of Classification

North Carolina State University Libraries catalog

http://www.lib.ncsu.edu/catalog/

Here are a few examples of using LCC to facilitate discovery of resources in

an online environment.

New interfaces to OPAC displays have great potential to highlight the

usefulness of classification for information retrieval. This screen shot is from
the NCSU Libraries catalog; the interface was developed by Endeca. A
keyword search provides a breakdown of search results by call number range –
these are the main classes in LCC -- allowing the user to consider different
perspectives from different disciplines. This was a very simple search on the
term “global warming.”
There are results in all of the classes shown – the number of hits is shown for
each in parentheses. We see that Q – Science has the greatest number of hits
(277). At the top of the results list (ranked most relevant) are several books
and videos classed in QC981.8.G56.

But notice that there are many hits in other classes as well: H – Social
sciences, T – Technology, S – Agriculture. We’ll take a look at S Agriculture.
ANIMATION: click to bring in arrow to “S”

Fundamentals of LC Classification 1-23

Instructor Manual Session 1
Overview of Classification

Here we see a list of subclasses in S that have hits for the keywords “global
warming”, along with a list of scope terms for the subclass.
We also see a list of titles classed in S, ranked by relevance.

If we wanted to focus on a particular branch of Agriculture, such as forestry,

we could select the link for the subclass.
ANIMATION: click to bring in arrow

Fundamentals of LC Classification 1-24

Instructor Manual Session 1
Overview of Classification

Now we see hits related to global warming and forestry. Narrowing a broad
search in this way, by LCC classification, can help identify different aspects of
a topic and focus a search very effectively.

We could change the default sort (“sort by” box in top right corner) to a call
number sort, which would make it possible to further refine the search.

If we had taken a different path by beginning in another of the top level classes
(such as Q – Science or H – Social science) we would have seen a similar
breakdown by topics specific to that discipline.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 1-25

Instructor Manual Session 1
Overview of Classification

http://wncln.wncln.org/

The Western North Carolina Library Network has implemented a classified

catalog browse option in its Innovative Interfaces catalog.
“The LCC Browse allows a user to navigate through LCC outline screens all
the way through to the individual class number level, where s/he can click a
link to search the catalog by the individual class number, search by the
associated Library of Congress Subject Heading, retrieve records sorted by
most popular in the class, and see other subject headings associated with that
class number. Users can also search ranges of class numbers from the outline
screens.”

Fundamentals of LC Classification 1-26

Instructor Manual Session 1
Overview of Classification

Partial results, browsing H in WNCLN catalog

This is an example of a breakdown for HV in WNCLN’s catalog.

Selecting any of the links results in a list of titles classed in that range, ranked
by circulation.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 1-27

Instructor Manual Session 1
Overview of Classification

http://www.columbia.edu/cu/libraries/inside/projects/metadata/classify/

Columbia University Libraries makes use of LCC to assist with subject

browsing of e-journals, databases, and reference tools.
This web page describes the project. It uses LCC numbers in catalog records
to create a hierarchical interface for browsing. Class number ranges are
mapped to search terms. Those search terms display to the public in e-journal
lists and interface to databases (“Find databases”).

ANIMATION: click to bring in arrow

On the next slide, we’ll see an example which uses the LC range shown here to
show a list of e-journals on the topic.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 1-28

Instructor Manual Session 1
Overview of Classification

If you went to the library’s subject browse for e-journals and selected
“Ethnology” as your subject, you’d see a list of e-journals like this, retrieved
because the LC Classification numbers provided in catalog records fell within
the LC range GN 301.0000 – GN 674.9990 as shown on the previous screen.
In the LCC Outline, this is the range for Ethnology. Social and cultural
anthropology. In CUL’s system, this range has been mapped to the term
Ethnology (with the broader term Anthropology, then broader term Social
Sciences).

Fundamentals of LC Classification 1-29

Instructor Manual Session 1
Overview of Classification

Summary
„ Classification provides a system for
organizing and categorizing knowledge
„ A number of different systems can be used
for classification in libraries
„ Classification of information resources is
important:
„ As a shelving/location device
„ For collocation of resources
„ To facilitate discovery of resources, whether
physical or electronic
32

Fundamentals of LC Classification 1-30

Instructor Manual Session 2
Brief History of the
Library of Congress Classification (LCC)

Brief History of the Library of

Congress Classification (LCC)

Session 2

Fundamentals of LC Classification 2-1

Instructor Manual Session 2
Brief History of the
Library of Congress Classification (LCC)

This session covers:

„ Purpose
„ Brief history of the development of LCC
„ Publication history
„ LCC schedules today

„ Source: Lois Mai Chan, A Guide to the

Library of Congress Classification, 5th edition
(Englewood, CO: Libraries Unlimited, 1999)
2

Fundamentals of LC Classification 2-2

Instructor Manual Session 2
Brief History of the
Library of Congress Classification (LCC)

Purpose
„ Developed by the Library of Congress
for organizing its own collections
„ Adopted by other libraries, particularly
academic and research libraries
„ Initially a shelf-location device
„ A useful retrieval tool in online systems
„ Limited use as a tool for organizing web
resources
3

The Library of Congress Classification (LCC) is the system used by the Library of
Congress for organizing its own collections. First articulated more than one hundred
years ago, it has been updated continuously ever since.

Although it was designed to accommodate the Library's own extensive research

collections, many other large American academic and research libraries have adopted
the system for their own use; so have many general libraries. Many foreign libraries
use the system as well.

Although in American libraries classification has been used primarily as a shelving

and location device, offering limited subject access through shelf browsing in the
manual environment, it has been proven a useful retrieval tool also in online systems
that offer sophisticated browsing and searching functions (as we saw in the previous
session). And, to a limited extent, LCC is also being used as a tool for organizing
Web resources.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 2-3

Instructor Manual Session 2
Brief History of the
Library of Congress Classification (LCC)

Brief history
„ The Library of Congress established in 1800
when the American legislature was preparing to
move from Philadelphia to the new capital city of
Washington, D.C.
„ Section five of "An Act to Make Further Provision
for the Removal and Accommodation of the
Government of the United States," signed by
President John Adams on April 24, 1800,
provided a sum of $5,000 "for the purchase of
such books as may be necessary for the use of
Congress and the said city of Washington, and
for fitting up a suitable apartment for containing
them.“
(John Y. Cole, ed., The Library of Congress in Perspective: A Volume Based on
the Reports of the 1976 Librarian's Task Force and Advisory Groups, 1978)

ANIMATION: click to bring in each bullet

The Library of Congress was established in 1800 when the American legislature was
preparing to move from Philadelphia to the new capital city of Washington, D.C.
Before that time, members of the U.S. Congress used libraries in New York and
Philadelphia, namely, the New York Society Library and the Library Company of
Philadelphia.

In the legislation that authorized the move of the nation’s capital to Washington, DC,
signed by President John Adams on April 24, 1800, a sum of $5,000 was provided
"for the purchase of such books as may be necessary for the use of Congress and the
said city of Washington, and for fitting up a suitable apartment for containing
them."[1]

[1]John Y. Cole, ed., The Library of Congress in Perspective: A Volume Based on the
Reports of the 1976 Librarian's Task Force and Advisory Groups (New York: R.R.
Bowker, 1978), 5.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 2-4

Instructor Manual Session 2
Brief History of the
Library of Congress Classification (LCC)

Brief history (2)

„ Early on, books were grouped by size and, within
size groups, by accession number, as reflected in the
first (1802) and the second (1804) LC catalogs
„ The first recorded change in the arrangement of the
collection reflected in the Library's third catalog
(1808), showing added categories for special
bibliographic forms such as plans, state laws,
legislative and executive reports and papers, financial
reports, and gazettes.
(Leo E. LaMontagne, American Library Classification with Special
Reference to the Library of Congress (Hamden, CT: Shoe
String Press, 1961), 44-45)

Early on, books at LC were organized by size and, within each size group, by
accession number. The first catalog was issued by the Library in 1802, and the
second, which shows the same arrangement, in 1804.

The first recorded change in the arrangement of the collection appears in the Library's
third catalog, issued in 1808, which shows added categories for special bibliographic
forms such as legal documents and executive papers.[1]

[1]Leo E. LaMontagne, American Library Classification with Special Reference to the

Library of Congress (Hamden, CT: Shoe String Press, 1961), 44-45.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 2-5

Instructor Manual Session 2
Brief History of the
Library of Congress Classification (LCC)

Brief history (3)

„ Burning of the US Capitol and the
Library of Congress’s collection in 1814
by British soldiers
„ Purchase of Thomas Jefferson’s
personal library of 6,487 books,
classified by Jefferson’s own system
„ Library of Congress retaining
Jefferson’s classification system
6

On the night of August 24, 1814, during the War of 1812, British soldiers set fire to
the Capitol, and most of the Library of Congress’s collection was destroyed.

Some time after, Thomas Jefferson offered to sell Congress his personal library;
subsequently, in 1815, the Congress voted $23,950 to purchase Jefferson’s personal
library of 6,487 books. The books arrived already classified by Jefferson’s own
system.

The Library adopted this system and used it with some modifications until the end of
the nineteenth century.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 2-6

Instructor Manual Session 2
Brief History of the
Library of Congress Classification (LCC)

Brief history (4)

„ Expansion of the Library's collection
from seven thousand books to nearly
one million by 1890s
„ LC’s move to a new building in 1897
„ Contemplation of a new classification
scheme for the Library
„ Decision for its development in 1900
„ Provisional outline proposed in 1901
7

By the 1890s the Library's collection had grown from seven thousand books to nearly
one million, and it became obvious that the Jeffersonian system was no longer
adequate.

The move to the new library building in 1897 made this fact painfully apparent.

Contemplation of a new classification scheme for the Library began in the same year,
and the decision for its development was made in 1900. A provisional outline was
drawn up in 1901.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 2-7

Instructor Manual Session 2
Brief History of the
Library of Congress Classification (LCC)

Brief history (5)

„ James C. M. Hanson, Head of the Catalogue
Division, and Charles Martel, the newly
appointed Chief Classifier, responsible for
new classification scheme
„ Use of Cutter's Expansive Classification as a
guide for the order of classes in the broad
outline of the LC Classification
„ Considerable changes made in notation

James C. M. Hanson, Head of the Catalogue Division, and Charles Martel, the newly
appointed Chief Classifier, were responsible for developing the new scheme

Hanson and Martel concluded that the new classification should be based on Cutter's
Expansive Classification as a guide for the order of classes, but that considerable
changes in notation would be necessary.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 2-8

Instructor Manual Session 2
Brief History of the
Library of Congress Classification (LCC)

Hanson's first outline (1899)

A 1-200 Polygraphy; Encyclopedias; General Periodicals; Societies &c.
A 201-3000 Philosophy
A 3001-B9999 Religion; Theology; Church history
C 1-9999 Biography; and studies auxiliary to history
D 1-9999 General history; periods; and local (except America) with geography
E-F America; history and geography
G Geography; general; and allied studies (e.g. Anthropology and Ethnology)
H 1-2000 Political science
H 2001-9999 Law
I 1-8000 Sociology
I 8001-9999 Women; Societies, clubs etc.
J 1-2000 Sports; amusements
J 2001-9999 Music
K Fine arts
L-M Philology & Literature
N Science; Mathematics; Astronomy; Physics; Chemistry
O Natural history; general; Geology
P Zoology; Botany
Q Medicine
R Useful arts; Agriculture
S Manufactures
T Engineering
U Military, Naval science; light houses; life saving; fire extinction
V-Y Special collections
Z Bibliography (Book arts)

(LaMontagne, American Library Classification, 228-29)

This slide shows the first outline of LCC devised by Hanson in 1899.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 2-9

Instructor Manual Session 2
Brief History of the
Library of Congress Classification (LCC)

Current outline
A -- GENERAL WORKS
B -- PHILOSOPHY. PSYCHOLOGY. RELIGION
C -- AUXILIARY SCIENCES OF HISTORY
D -- HISTORY (GENERAL) AND HISTORY OF EUROPE
E -- HISTORY: AMERICA
F -- HISTORY: AMERICA
G -- GEOGRAPHY. ANTHROPOLOGY. RECREATION
H -- SOCIAL SCIENCES
J -- POLITICAL SCIENCE
K -- LAW
L -- EDUCATION
M -- MUSIC
N -- FINE ARTS
P -- LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE
Q -- SCIENCE
R -- MEDICINE
S -- AGRICULTURE
T -- TECHNOLOGY
U -- MILITARY SCIENCE
V -- NAVAL SCIENCE
Z -- BIBLIOGRAPHY. LIBRARY SCIENCE. INFORMATION
RESOURCES (GENERAL)

One difference between the two outlines is that the letters I, O, W, X, and Y are not
used as main class notation in the current version. I and O were not used perhaps
because these letters could be easily confused with the numerals 1 and 0. The letter
W, as well as subclass symbols QS-QZ, was permanently excluded from LCC for use
by the National Library of Medicine Classification. (In the NLM Classification, Class
W covers Medicine and Related Subjects, and Classes QS-QZ represent preclinical
sciences.)

Class X and Y are still vacant in LCC.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 2-10

Instructor Manual Session 2
Brief History of the
Library of Congress Classification (LCC)

Order of publication of LCC

schedules

1901 E-F History: America

(Western Hemisphere)
1902 Z Bibliography. Library science

„ Additional schedules were developed throughout

the twentieth century
„ Development of new schedules is ongoing

11

Although it often is assumed that the Library of Congress Classification schedules

were developed and published in a comprehensive and logical order, that actually is
not the case.

Class Z (Bibliography and Library Science) was chosen to be the first schedule to be
developed because it covered the bibliographical works necessary as the groundwork
for further classification development. The next schedules, E-F (American history and
geography), were developed because of their particular subject relevance. (E-F were
actually published first, in 1901, followed by Z in 1902.)

For more information on the order of publication of LCC schedules, as well as some
interesting historical background, refer attendees to Appendix E3.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 2-11

Instructor Manual Session 2
Brief History of the
Library of Congress Classification (LCC)

Brief history (6)

„ Each schedule contains an entire class, a
subclass, or a group of subclasses
„ Individual schedules of LCC developed and
maintained by subject experts
„ Conversion from print to electronic format
beginning in early 1990s
„ Conversion using the USMARC (now called
MARC 21) Classification Format

12

Each schedule of LCC contains an entire class, a subclass, or a group of subclasses

From the beginning, individual schedules of LCC have been developed and
maintained by subject experts. Such experts continue to be responsible, or consulted
about the need, for additions and changes. Unlike most other classification systems,
LCC was not the product of one mastermind. Indeed, it has been called “a
coordinated series of special classes.”

Currently, PCC libraries also contribute to the revision and updating of LCC
schedules.

Until the early 1990s, LCC schedules existed mainly as a print product. Maintenance
and revision remained basically manual tasks that proved to be extremely labor-
intensive and time-consuming. For several reasons, the conversion to electronic form
was an especially important development for LCC. That it greatly improves internal
operating efficiency goes without saying. For one, it enables much more efficient
production of the print schedules, which continue to be produced. More important, it
facilitates revision, not only of whole schedules but also of tables and indexes.

The USMARC (now called MARC 21) Classification Format was used in the
conversion.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 2-12

Instructor Manual Session 3
Outline of LC Classification

Outline of LC
Classification

Session 3

Fundamentals of LC Classification 3-1

Instructor Manual Session 3
Outline of LC Classification

This session covers:

„ Outline of classes and subclasses
„ Interpreting the classification schedules
„ Indention
„ Notes
„ Format of the schedules
„ General pattern of subarrangement
within classes
2

Fundamentals of LC Classification 3-2

Instructor Manual Session 3
Outline of LC Classification

General characteristics of schedules

„ Developed independently by different groups of
subject specialists
„ Enumerative -- aspects of a subject explicitly
provided by the schedules
„ Based on literary warrant
„ Unifying elements common to all schedules
„ Physical format (print schedules)
„ Internal arrangement of classes and subclasses
„ Notation
„ Auxiliary tables
„ General to specific, creating a hierarchical display
„ Levels of hierarchy are indicated by indention
3

ANIMATION: click for each bullet

“Developed independently” -- often called a “series of special classifications”;
each schedule stands on its own with differences peculiar to the discipline(s) it
represents. Despite the uniqueness of each schedule, they do have a number of
common, unifying characteristics.
“Enumerative” -- Only those classifications listed in the schedules, or
explicitly allowed by instructional notes (e.g., by topic, A-Z), are allowed -- if
it’s not in the schedule, or explicitly allowed by instructions, it can’t be used.
DDC, by contrast, allows classifiers to refine an enumerated subject by the
addition of standard subdivisions.
“Physical format” refers to the print version.
Levels of the hierarchy are indicated by indentions.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 3-3

Instructor Manual Session 3
Outline of LC Classification

Broad outline of LCC

I. General Works (A)
II. Humanistic Disciplines & Social Sciences
(B-P)
• Philosophy, Religion, History, Geography
Anthropology, Social Sciences, Music, Fine
Arts, Language & Literature
III. Natural Sciences & Technology (Q-V)
• Math, Physical & Biological Sciences,
Medicine, Agriculture, Technology, Military &
Naval Sciences
IV. Bibliography & Library Science (Z) 4

A look at LCC as a whole.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 3-4

Instructor Manual Session 3
Outline of LC Classification

Main classes (1)

„ Entire field of knowledge divided into
main classes
„ Roughly equal to academic disciplines
or areas of study
„ Denoted by single capital letters

The first level of LCC includes the 21 main classes.

Main classes are listed on the next slide.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 3-5

Instructor Manual Session 3
Outline of LC Classification

Main classes (2)

A General works M Music
B Philosophy, Psychology, N Fine Arts
Religion
P Language & Literature
C History - Auxiliary
Q Sciences
D History - Universal & Old
World R Medicine
E-F History of the Americas S Agriculture
G Geography T Technology
H Social Sciences U Military Science
J Political Science V Naval Science
K Law Z Bibliography & Library
L Education Science

To serve Congress with its need for an extensive collection in history and the
social sciences, these disciplines received multiple classes and subclasses (as
opposed to all the sciences in Q and technology in T, for example)
History -- C, D, E, F, G
Social Sciences -- H, J, K, L

Fundamentals of LC Classification 3-6

Instructor Manual Session 3
Outline of LC Classification

Subclasses (1)
„ Represent branches of the disciplines
„ Denoted by double or triple capital letters

S – Agriculture
SB – Plant culture
SD – Forestry
SF – Animal culture
SH – Aquaculture. Fisheries. Angling
SK – Hunting sports

Main classes are further divided into subclasses, which represent branches of
the disciplines

Most subclasses are denoted by double capital letter, as shown here for S
Agriculture.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 3-7

Instructor Manual Session 3
Outline of LC Classification

Subclasses (2)
„ Schedules D and K use triple letters
DAW – History of Central Europe
KBP – Islamic law
KFA – Law of U.S. States, Alabama to Arkansas
„ Schedules E and F use only single letters
E-F History: America
E – United States (General)
F – United States local history. Canada. Latin America

Class Z formerly used the single letter Z. Now we also have Subclass ZA,
Information Resources (General).

Fundamentals of LC Classification 3-8

Instructor Manual Session 3
Outline of LC Classification

Structure of LC Classification
„ Basic arrangement is by discipline
„ Various aspects of a subject are
generally not grouped together, but are
classed with the discipline
„ Agriculture:
„ technical aspects in S (Agriculture)
„ agricultural economics in HD (sub-class of
Economics)

Fundamentals of LC Classification 3-9

Instructor Manual Session 3
Outline of LC Classification

Structure of LC Classification (2)

„ Railroads:
„ Railroad engineering in TF (sub-class of
technology
„ Organization and management of railroads in HE
(transportation and communication, a sub-class of
economics)

„ Remember: LCC separates books on

the same subject by discipline
10

2nd bullet: LCC separates books on the same subject by discipline: for
example, books on the subject of global warming might be classed in QC if
treated from the scientific perspective (meteorology/climatology); in H if
treated from an economic perspective; in S if treated from an agricultural
perspective (effect on crops); in RA if treated from a medical perspective
(effect on health), etc.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 3-10

Instructor Manual Session 3
Outline of LC Classification

Within each subclass…

„ Subclasses further divided to specify
form, place, time & subtopics
„ Topical divisions often further
subdivided by subtopics
„ Denoted by integers 1-9999, some with
decimal extensions
„ Some subtopics may also be denoted
by a Cutter number (e.g., .M84)
11

Now let’s go back to the outline itself and discuss what happens in the
subclasses.

3rd bullet: There are many unused numbers and letters within the schedules to
allow for expansion of knowledge. This is a reflection of the “hospitality” of
the schedules.

4th bullet: We’ll explain Cutter numbers thoroughly in the Elements of LC

Call Numbers session – for now, here is an example of what they look like
(capital letter followed by numerals)

Fundamentals of LC Classification 3-11

Instructor Manual Session 3
Outline of LC Classification

Some subject divisions in

QH Biology (General)
„ QH359-425 Evolution
„ QH426-470 Genetics
„ QH471-489 Reproduction
„ QH501-531 Life
„ QH540-549.5 Ecology
„ QH573-671 Cytology
„ QH705-705.5 Economic biology

12

Within QH Biology, these ranges of numbers are for some of the major subject
divisions.
We’re going to look at the schedule using Ecology, QH540-549.5.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 3-12

Instructor Manual Session 3
Outline of LC Classification

QH Biology (General)
Ecology

Class here works on general ecology and general animal ecology. For
works on ecology of individual animals and groups of animals, see the
animal
For human ecology see GF1+
For ecology of a particular topographic area see QH101+
For plant ecology see QK900+
Cf. BL65.E36 Ecology and religion
Cf. HX550.E25 Communism and ecology
Cf. QH546 Ecological genetics
540 Periodicals, societies, congresses, serial publications
540.3 Collected works (nonserial)
540.4 Dictionaries and encyclopedias
540.5 Philosophy
540.6 Nomenclature, terminology, notation, abbreviations

540.7 Classification

[NOTE: Attendees have QH540+ in Appendix A. It would be useful to have

that out now. They also use it for an exercise at the end of this session.]
[NOTE: continues on the next slide with QH540.8-541.15.C44]

All schedules look very similar to this, although each have their own
peculiarities.

[NOTE: point out the key areas and elements in the display as you go
(subclass, notes, numbers, and captions) to be sure attendees are clear on
where everything is.]

The subtopic is ecology, followed by notes pertaining to the subtopic. We will

discuss the different types of notes and what they mean in the following slides.
The classification begins with “540 Periodicals ...”.
Notice the indention of the captions. All of these are all subordinate to
Ecology, and all are at the same level of hierarchy.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 3-13

Instructor Manual Session 3
Outline of LC Classification

QH Biology (General)
Ecology
History
540.8 General works
540.83.A-Z By region or country, A-Z
Biography see QH26+
541 General works, treatises, and textbooks
541.13 Popular works
541.14 Juvenile works
541.142 Handbooks, tables, formulas, etc.
541.145 Addresses, essays, lectures
541.15.A-Z Special aspects of the subject as a whole, A-Z:
541.15.A9 Autoradiographic techniques
541.15.B54 Biological assay
541.15.B56 Biological diversity
For local, see QH84.1+
For physiographic divisions see QH84.8+
Cf. QH75+ Biological diversity conservation
Cf. QH541.15.S64 Species diversity
Cf. QK46.5.D58 Plant diversity
541.15.B84 Buffer zones
541.15.C44 Chemical ecology

Here we see more levels in the hierarchical arrangement of topics.

Each additional indention indicates a further refinement of the topic directly
above. E.g., History is divided into the subtopics “General works” and “By
region or country, A-Z.”

Fundamentals of LC Classification 3-14

Instructor Manual Session 3
Outline of LC Classification

Interpreting the schedules

„ Meaning is contained in the captions,
not in the class numbers
„ Class numbers merely serve to order
the captions
„ Subordination of topics is shown
through indention of captions

15

Class numbers are used as a means to preserve the subarrangement of

disciplines throughout the various schedules. This subarrangement is
maintained by the assignment of a number or numbers to a caption, adding
decimal extensions when necessary.
For example: in Subclass QH Ecology, QH541 is the number assigned to the
caption General works, treatises, and textbooks. The next number used in
Subclass QH is QH541.13; the corresponding caption is Popular works.
Because of the decimal extension, it may appear that the number 541.13 is
subordinate to 541. But in LC Classification terms, that is not the case. If we
look at the caption for QH541.13, we see that it is aligned with the caption for
General works, treatises, and textbooks.
In fact, it is in the captions that we find meaning and hierarchy, not in the
numbers. The fact that QH541 General works, treatises, and textbooks and
QH541.13 Popular works are hierarchically at the same level is identified by
their alignment of their captions in the schedules, not by their corresponding
numbers.
Once the need is identified to indent a new caption under any topic, the
corresponding number for that caption will need to fit between the two
numbers on either side of it; the choice of number is not important, as long as
it files between the two. What is important is the position of the caption, with
its indention showing hierarchical relationships to the captions around it. So
always look at the captions in the LC schedules to identify arrangement, and
think of the numbers as a locator device.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 3-15

Instructor Manual Session 3
Outline of LC Classification

Interpreting the schedules (2)

„ Decimal numbers do not necessarily reflect
subtopics of the whole number
„ Decimal numbers do show that the class
number was not part of the original schedule
„ Parenthesized numbers are not to be used;
represent class numbers that were valid in
the past
„ Angle brackets around a number or span of
numbers indicate that LC provides this
number as an option but does not use it
16

3rd bullet: there were no parenthesized numbers in the excerpt of QH540 that
we just saw, but an example is coming up soon.

4th bullet: In most cases, an angle-bracketed number is accompanied by a see

reference directing the user to the actual number that the Library of Congress
uses or a note explaining Library of Congress practice.
[An example is <KE25-68> Law of Canada. Parliamentary publications;
there is a see reference to J102 (General legislative and executive papers.
Province of Canada) and J103 (General legislative and executive papers.
Dominion of Canada)]

Fundamentals of LC Classification 3-16

Instructor Manual Session 3
Outline of LC Classification

Notes used in schedules

„ Scope notes
„ Explain what the classification covers
„ Used when similar topics occur in
different areas
„ Designated by “Class here”
„ Explanatory “see” notes
„ Used when a topic logically belongs in
one division, but is covered elsewhere
„ Designated by “For”
17

“Prefer” notes were used in the past for explanatory “see” notes, but these
have been discontinued.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 3-17

Instructor Manual Session 3
Outline of LC Classification

QE GEOLOGY
Reptiles
861 General works, treatises, and textbooks
Dinosaurs
Class here works on dinosaurs in general
For works on specific orders of dinosaurs
see QE862.A-Z
861.2 Periodicals, societies, congresses
861.3 Dictionaries
861.35 Computer network resources
Including the Internet
861.4 General works
861.5 Juvenile works

ANIMATION: click to bring in each arrow

Illustrates:
•Scope note
•Explanatory “see” note

Full hierarchy is: Geology--Paleozoology--Chordata--Vertebrates--Reptiles

Fundamentals of LC Classification 3-18

Instructor Manual Session 3
Outline of LC Classification

Notes used in schedules (2)

„ “See” notes
„ Used to indicate topics relocated to other parts of

the schedule(s)
„ Former number removed or, often, parenthesized

QE GEOLOGY
Reptiles
862.A-Z Other systematic divisions, A-Z
862.C5 Chelonia. Testudinata
862.C7 Cotylosauria
862.C8 Crocodylia
(862.D4) Dicynodontia see QE862.T5

ANIMATION: click to bring in arrow

Fundamentals of LC Classification 3-19

Instructor Manual Session 3
Outline of LC Classification

Notes, cont.
„ “Including” notes
„ Provides examples of the topics covered by

a particular caption
„ Confer notes
„ Designated by the abbreviation “Cf.”

„ Indicates other aspects of the topic may be

found elsewhere in the schedule(s)

20

Fundamentals of LC Classification 3-20

Instructor Manual Session 3
Outline of LC Classification

QK BOTANY
83 Plant lore
Cf. GR780-790 Folklore
National plants. Official plants
Including state, provincial, etc. plants
84.8 General works
By region or country
85 United States
85.3.A-Z Other regions or countries, A-Z

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

97.5 Identification
For geographic treatment see QK108-474.5

ANIMATION: click to bring in each arrow

Illustrates:
•Confer
•Including
•Explanatory see (“For”) note

[NOTE: Some lines of the schedule omitted, indicated by “---------------”]

Fundamentals of LC Classification 3-21

Instructor Manual Session 3
Outline of LC Classification

Physical format
„ Each print schedule contains
„ Preface
„ Broad outline with subclasses
„ Detailed outline with 2 or 3 levels of
hierarchy
„ Schedule (the actual class numbers)
„ Tables
„ Index
22

These are the components of the print schedules.

The print schedules are a more effective tool for learning the classification
than the electronic version, Classification Web.
•The outline in each schedule gives a very useful overview of the organization
of topics in the schedule.
•It is easier to grasp the context of a topic within the classification by browsing
the print schedule (viewing two pages in each spread) and seeing the full
expansion of each topic.
•When tables are applied, it is important for catalogers to understand the use of
the table and how it affects the classification. In ClassWeb, it is possible to
have table calculations done automatically – very useful for the experienced
cataloger, but problematic for the beginner.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 3-22

Instructor Manual Session 3
Outline of LC Classification

Q Science Broad outline

Science (General) Q
Mathematics QA
Astronomy QB
Physics QC
Chemistry QD
Geology QE

23

Part of the outline for class Q.

The broad outline also serves as the table of contents in the print schedules.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 3-23

Instructor Manual Session 3
Outline of LC Classification

OUTLINE
Q1-390 Science (General)
Q1-295 General
Q300-390 Cybernetics
Q350-390 Information theory

QA1-939 Mathematics Detailed outline

QA1-43 General
QA47-59 Tables
QA71-90 Instruments and machines
QA75-76.95 Calculating machines
QA75.5-76.95 Electronic computers. Computer science
QA76.75-76.765 Computer software
QA101-(145) Elementary mathematics. Arithmetic
QA150-272.5 Algebra
QA273-280 Probabilities. Mathematical statistics
QA299.6-433 Analysis
QA440-699 Geometry. Trigonometry. Topology
QA801-939 Analytic mechanics

This is a segment of a detailed outline from the print schedules showing

several levels of the hierarchy, as indicated by the indentions.
Subclasses – Science (General), Mathematics
Broad subject divisions within the Mathematics subclass include:
•Instruments and machines (which has subtopic Calculating machines;
subtopic Electronic computers. Computer science)
•Elementary mathematics. Arithmetic
•Algebra
The “outline” in ClassWeb is much less detailed, as illustrated in the
next slide.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 3-24

Instructor Manual Session 3
Outline of LC Classification

Outline view in Classification Web (1st level)

This is a screen shot of Classification Web. We’ll explain more about

ClassWeb in the Tools session coming up next.
What you are looking at is a portion of the ClassWeb outline view of Class Q.
Although the initial display shows much less detail at this level than the
printed schedule, the ClassWeb outline view actually incorporates the detailed
outline and links to tables within the main classification, and is intended to be
expanded as needed.

[NOTE: mention that the letters following the captions [H R B L D S] are

features of ClassWeb that lead to additional information – more about them in
the Tools session. They do not appear in the print schedules.]
[NOTE: there are three browser options in ClassWeb: Standard, Enhanced,
and Hierarchy. The hierarchy browser provides this overview of the schedule
and displays more specific breakdowns of the schedule with each click on a
link.]

Fundamentals of LC Classification 3-25

Instructor Manual Session 3
Outline of LC Classification

Outline view in ClassWeb (2nd level): expansion of Mathematics

Expanding the Mathematics caption leads to a second level of the outline.

Each of the captions that is underlined and in blue text can be further expanded
by clicking (these each have ranges of numbers rather than a single number as
well).

Fundamentals of LC Classification 3-26

Instructor Manual Session 3
Outline of LC Classification

General arrangement within

subclasses and subject divisions
„ Form subdivisions
„ Periodicals, Societies, Congresses, Directories,
Collections, Dictionaries, etc.
„ Philosophy
„ History
„ Biography
„ General works
„ Study & teaching
„ Subtopics
27

Now we’ll discuss the general arrangement within each subclass and subject
division. This general pattern is also followed for some “special aspects of the
discipline as a whole” (e.g., Philosophy; example coming up in slide 31).
Form divisions generally precede all other divisions, but exceptions do occur.
Divisions usually appear in this order; “Congresses” may be included with
“Periodicals, societies, etc.” (so may some of the others).
Periodicals, societies, etc., may also each have their own number, sometimes
with further geographic or language subdivisions.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 3-27

Instructor Manual Session 3
Outline of LC Classification

Form subdivisions example 1

TC Hydraulic engineering
For municipal water supply see TD201-500.2
For hydraulic machinery see TJ840.A2-.A3
1 Periodicals, societies, etc.
5 Congresses
Exhibitions. Museums
6.A1 General works
6.A2-Z By region or country, A-Z
Subarrange each country by Table T4b
7 Collected works (nonserial)
9 Dictionaries and encyclopedias
12 Directories

28

An example of form subdivisions under the subclass TC, Hydraulic

engineering.
Some classifications may subdivide forms by place (as under Exhibitions.
Museums) or language. Language divisions are usually found under
periodicals and societies, as with T, Technology (next slide).

Fundamentals of LC Classification 3-28

Instructor Manual Session 3
Outline of LC Classification

Form subdivisions example 2

T Technology (General)
Periodicals and societies. By language of publication
1 English
2 French
3 German
4 Other languages (not A-Z)
(5) Yearbooks
see T1-4
6 Congresses
Industrial museums, etc. see T179-183
International exhibitions see T391-995
7 Collected works (nonserial)
8 Symbols and abbreviations
Dictionaries and encyclopedias
9 General works
10 Bilingual and polyglot
29

Another example of forms, showing language subdivision of periodicals &

societies, as well as dictionaries and encyclopedias.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 3-29

Instructor Manual Session 3
Outline of LC Classification

Philosophy
„ Used primarily in main classes and
subclasses
„ Generally not found below the level of subclass
„ Often a single number, though may be
expanded to many numbers

QH Natural history (General)

14 Authorship
14.3 Philosophy
30

With Philosophy, we’re leaving Form subdivisions and going on to special

aspects of the discipline as a whole.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 3-30

Instructor Manual Session 3
Outline of LC Classification

A range of numbers for Philosophy

An example of a philosophy classification which is fairly complex -- note the

additional form subdivisions found under the main subdivision “Philosophy.”
Many classifications have a single number for Philosophy, as shown on the
previous slide, QH, Natural History (General):
QH14.3 Philosophy

Fundamentals of LC Classification 3-31

Instructor Manual Session 3
Outline of LC Classification

History
„ The history of a topic is often broken down into
specific time periods, e.g.,
„ 1945-1971
„ 1971-2000
„ 2000-
„ Dates refer to the period of time covered in the work
being classified
„ Some spans written as “Through [date]” when start is
undefined
„ Often combined with breakdown by region or country

32

Each period is closed off before beginning a new span.

Each span is interpreted to mean “1945 up to, but not including, 1971”; “1971
up to, but not including, 2000”; “beginning with 2000”.
As with “Philosophy,” generally not found below the level of subclass.

If questions arise about the assignment of numbers – it is covered in the

session on Principles/Assigning Numbers. Here is the relevant excerpt from
SCM F320:
General rule (SCM F 320). Assign the class number that corresponds to the
earliest period on which the work focuses when the work in hand covers
several of the time spans listed under the topic in question. Ignore brief
coverage of earlier periods that serves only to introduce the principal time
period(s) being discussed.
[NOTE: there is information on date spans representing date of publication
coming up, under discussion of General works]

Fundamentals of LC Classification 3-32

Instructor Manual Session 3
Outline of LC Classification

History examples
„ Example 1, subdivision by place:
QH Natural history (General)
14.3 Philosophy
History
15 General works
21.A-Z By region or country, A-Z

„ Example 2, subdivision by time period:

TD Environmental technology. Sanitary engineering
History
15 General works
16 Ancient
17 Medieval
18 Modern to 1800
19 Nineteenth century
20 Twentieth century
33

Some history subdivisions are very complex, depending on the topic/subtopic,

for example, in S, Agriculture (General), History and conditions is allotted the
class numbers S419-482, with subdivisions for both time period and place.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 3-33

Instructor Manual Session 3
Outline of LC Classification

History examples (2)

History subdivisions in the history classes are even more complex.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 3-34

Instructor Manual Session 3
Outline of LC Classification

Biography
„ Biography numbers are generally provided under
disciplines, subclasses, and broad subjects
„ Separate numbers for collective & individual

QE Geology
Biography
21 Collective
22.A-Z Individual, A-Z
e.g.
22.D25 Dana, James Dwight
22.L8 Lyell, Charles
22.S77 Steno, Nicolaus

35

Fundamentals of LC Classification 3-35

Instructor Manual Session 3
Outline of LC Classification

General works
„ “General works” -- comprehensive works covering a
topic
„ May also be listed as “Treatises” or “General”
„ Always found when there are any subtopics under a topic
„ Earlier schedules also included “General special” or
“Special aspects of the subject as a whole”
„ No new numbers of this type are being established
„ Other divisions in this category include “Popular
works,” “Juvenile works,” “Addresses, essays,
lectures”

36

Earlier schedules also included “General special” or “Special aspects of the

subject as a whole” separately from “General works.”
Refers specifically to special aspects of the subject as a whole, without
any hierarchical divisions or branches
These divisions are no longer being added to schedules
“General works” may also be subarranged chronologically, by date of
publication (example coming up).
Class numbers with the caption “Addresses, essays and lectures” (or a slight
variation) sometimes appear under major topics. Works that consist of
collected papers, miscellaneous articles, anthologies of readings, etc., are
classed in these numbers.
In 1986, the subdivision --Addresses, essays, lectures was discontinued in
subject heading practice. That change, however, did not affect classification
practice. (SCM F 300)

Fundamentals of LC Classification 3-36

Instructor Manual Session 3
Outline of LC Classification

General works example 1

GV RECREATION. LEISURE
Games and amusements
Indoor games and amusements
Board games. Move games
Checkers. Draughts
1461 Periodicals. Societies. Serials
Biography
1462 Collective
1462.2.A-Z Individual, A-Z
1463 General works
Strategies and tactics
1463.5 General works
1463.7 Openings
1463.9 End games

ANIMATION: click to bring in each arrow

A simple example, one number for General Works under Checkers.
Note that there is also a General Works number under a subtopic of Checkers,
Strategies and tactics.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 3-37

Instructor Manual Session 3
Outline of LC Classification

General works & date spans

„ Date spans used under “General works” are
based on publication date rather than
historical period
Through 1800 Dates do not overlap!
1801-1859
1860-1900
1901-
„ This is done to separate more recent material
from older material
„ Dates in captions refer to imprint date
38

Fundamentals of LC Classification 3-38

Instructor Manual Session 3
Outline of LC Classification

Example: dates of publication

HF COMMERCE
Business
Accounting. Bookkeeping
General works
English and American
5631 Through 1800
5633 1801-1850
5635 1851-2005
5636 2006-

39

Why might it make sense to separate recent material from older material?
Next slide has an example.
Remember these class numbers are not for the history of accounting and
bookkeeping, but for general works on accounting and bookkeeping (often
“how-to”).

Fundamentals of LC Classification 3-39

Instructor Manual Session 3
Outline of LC Classification

From LC’s catalog:

a few books classed in HF5631

An example of why it makes sense to separate older material on some topics –

accounting and bookkeeping practices of the 17th & 18 centuries are better
NOT mixed in with contemporary works.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 3-40

Instructor Manual Session 3
Outline of LC Classification

Study & teaching

„ Often a single number, but may receive a
span of numbers
„ Example from QH Ecology:
Study and teaching. Research
541.2 General works
541.215 Outlines, syllabi
Special teaching methods and aids
541.22 General works
541.23 Audiovisual aids
541.235.A-Z Other methods, A-Z
541.235.G34 Games

41

An example of study and teaching, greatly abbreviated.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 3-41

Instructor Manual Session 3
Outline of LC Classification

Topics & subtopics

„ Comprise the bulk of individual developments
or expansions of classes and subclasses
„ Each class, subclass & discipline developed
independently
„ Arranged logically where possible
„ Alphabetical arrangement of subtopics often
found, as well

42

Contrast with Subject Divisions.

Topics & Subtopics are lists, sometimes further subarranged with more
specific lists. The full range of form/special aspects arrangement is generally
not used under topics.
Examples of logical & alphabetical arrangements follow.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 3-42

Instructor Manual Session 3
Outline of LC Classification

Logical arrangement
QE GEOLOGY
840.5-882 Chordata
840.5 Cephalochordata. Tunicata. Hemichordata.
Enteropneusta. Pterobranchia.
Graptolinthina
841-882 Vertebrates
841 General works, treatises, and textbooks
842 Juvenile works
845 Fossil footprints
846 Fossil teeth
847 Amniotes
851-853 Fishes
861-862 Reptiles
867-868 Amphibians. Batrachia
871-875 Birds
881-882 Mammals

A greatly abbreviated example of logical arrangement. The arrangement is

from simple to complex animals. This arrangement is used in all classes that
describe the relationships of living organisms (e.g., zoology, botany).
The logical arrangement of simple to complex is maintained for each
systematic level from phylum (e.g., Chordata), subphylum (e.g., Vertebrates),
and class (e.g., Mammals, the next hierarchical level down from vertebrates).

Classes* are arranged logically, from primitive (i.e., they appeared earlier in
time) animals (or plants, in QK) to advanced animals, which appeared more
recently.
Below the level of class, orders and families are arranged alphabetically. (next
slide)

[*Classes here refers to science classification, not the LCC classes.]

Fundamentals of LC Classification 3-43

Instructor Manual Session 3
Outline of LC Classification

Alphabetical arrangement: orders

QE GEOLOGY
881-882 Mammals
881 General works, treatises, and textbooks
882.A-Z Systematic divisions, A-Z
882.C15 Carnivora
882.C5 Cetacea
882.C8 Chiroptera
882.C84 Cimolesta
882.C9 Creodonta
882.D4 Deltatheridia
882.D45 Desmostylia
882.D6 Docodonta
882.E2 Edentata. Xenarthra
882.E86 Eupantotheria
882.H47 Herbivora
882.I5 Insectivora

An example of alphabetical arrangement: orders are the lowest systematic

division in QE.

[NOTE: QL & QK go down a level to family; also arranged alphabetically.]

Fundamentals of LC Classification 3-44

Instructor Manual Session 3
Outline of LC Classification

Geographic divisions
„ Topics may be subdivided geographically in
two ways:
„ Alphabetical arrangement under one number, e.g.,
“By region or country, A-Z”
„ It is common to assign a separate number or numbers to
the U.S.
„ A span of numbers, with preferred order:
„ New World -- Northern Hemisphere, followed by
Southern Hemisphere
„ Old World -- Northern Hemisphere, followed by Southern
Hemisphere; west to east
„ Pacific Islands, Arctic & Antarctic regions last
„ Further subdivision within each region either naturally or
alphabetically

Two ways geographic subdivisions are added to the schedules

•Strictly alphabetical arrangements are generally not printed explicitly, but by the phrase, “By region or country, A-Z.”
Exception: sometimes the U.S. is singled out with its own number(s) and the phrase “By state,
A-Z”; followed by “Other regions and countries, A-Z.”
•Classes and subclasses generally use a span of numbers for a classified arrangement of countries by continent
“Natural order” groups countries by region, e.g., all Western European countries before Eastern
European countries
Preferred order --
America
North America
United States
British N.A. Canada
Mexico
Central America
West Indies
South America
Europe
Great Britain
Continental Countries (A-Z, often)
Asia
Africa
Australia & New Zealand
Pacific Islands
Arctic regions
Antarctic regions

Fundamentals of LC Classification 3-45

Instructor Manual Session 3
Outline of LC Classification

By region or country, A-Z

SF ANIMAL CULTURE
Pets
Dogs
Dog breeders, owners etc.
422.7 General works
422.73.A-Z By region or country, A-Z

46

Simplest example.
Mention that there is a table (SCM G 300) that gives guidance on what to do
for each country in the A-Z arrangement (covered in an upcoming session).

Fundamentals of LC Classification 3-46

Instructor Manual Session 3
Outline of LC Classification

U.S. with breakdown by state

Special countries
United States
T55.7 General works
T55.72.A-W By state, A-W
T55.74.A-Z Other American countries, A-Z
T55.75.A-Z Europe. By country, A-Z
T55.76.A-Z Asia. By country, A-Z
T55.775 Australia
T55.778 New Zealand
47

Fundamentals of LC Classification 3-47

Instructor Manual Session 3
Outline of LC Classification

U.S with breakdown by city

HT COMMUNITIES. CLASSES. RACES

City planning
166 General works
By region or country
United States
167 General works
167.2 Dept. of Housing and Urban Development
167.5.A-Z By region or state, A-Z
168.A-Z By city, A-Z
169.A-Z Other regions or countries, A-Z 48

Sometimes possible to give a breakdown by city, as here with HT168, City

planning by city A-Z.
There is no table for cities of the U.S.
Also note that classification here is directly to the city, not through the state.

[NOTE: instructor could give an example of a Cutter number for the city in
which the workshop is held.]

Fundamentals of LC Classification 3-48

Instructor Manual Session 3
Outline of LC Classification

TG BRIDGE ENGINEERING

21-127 Country divisions

21-54 America
55-95 Europe
72.P23 Paris. Alexander III Bridge
99-113.5 Asia
114 Arab countries
Span of numbers,
114.5 Islamic countries
115-119 Africa Preferred order
120-120.5 Indian Ocean islands
120.7-122.7 Australasia
123-124 Pacific Islands
125-125.5 Arctic regions
126 Antarctica
126.5 Tropics

Place divisions in preferred order.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 3-49

Instructor Manual Session 3
Outline of LC Classification

Place divided by topic

„ Differs from usual LCC practice (classify by
topic, sub-arrange by place)
„ Place divided by topic is characteristic of
history schedules (D,E,F), laws of countries
(KD-KWX) and some areas of the social
sciences
„ Class or subclass divided geographically,
with further subdivisions by form, topic, or
period
„ Allows more specific enumeration of topics
appropriate to each country 50

Preference is to divide topics by place, as with LCSH.

2nd bullet: for example, in schedule D, each country has its own subclass with
appropriate topical subdivisions, e.g., History by period, Description and
travel, etc. (C, Auxiliary sciences of history, follows the usual pattern of topic
subdivided by place).

Fundamentals of LC Classification 3-50

Instructor Manual Session 3
Outline of LC Classification

Place divided by topic

DA HISTORY OF GREAT BRITAIN
1-3 Historiography
4 Study and teaching
10-18.2 British Empire. Commonwealth of Nations. The Commonwealth
Including Great Britain, the dominions, and the colonies.
For individual dominions and colonies, see DS-DU, F, etc.
20-690 England
700-745 Wales
750-890 Scotland
900-995 Ireland
900 Periodicals. Societies. Serials
905 Sources and documents
906 General works
Biography (Collective) see DA916
908-908.7 Historiography
909-965 History
969 Description and travel

A greatly abbreviated example of place divided by topic.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 3-51

Instructor Manual Session 3
Outline of LC Classification

Place divided by topic

Another example, showing more of the topical and chronological breakdown

under Ireland.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 3-52

Instructor Manual Session 3
Outline of LC Classification

Tables
„ Tables are used extensively in LCC
„ Allow for subarrangement of similar topics
without the need to print the same
information repeatedly
„ Some tables apply to very limited topics,
some are used throughout the system
„ Lots of help with tables throughout the
workshop
53

Tables are discussed in the session on Principles and Assigning Numbers

(tables of general application in particular).
Sessions on Schedules H, N, and P include a great deal of practice working
with the tables in those schedules.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 3-53

Instructor Manual Session 3
Outline of LC Classification

Exercises 1 & 2

Fundamentals of LC Classification 3-54

Instructor Manual Session 3
Exercises
Outline: Exercise 1

Using the QH540 Ecology schedule from Appendix A, select a classification number for
the following topics:

Where would you class:

1. A dictionary of ecology

2. A collection of speeches on ecology

3. A history of ecology in the U.S.

4. A work on the ecology of Costa Rica

5. A textbook on ecology

6. A book on teaching ecology

Fundamentals of LC Classification 1
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
FOR DOUBLE SIDED COPY
Instructor Manual Session 3
Exercises

Outline: Exercise 2

LC Class # RA576+

Where would you class a book on the impact of air pollution on public health in…

1. The United States

2. Virginia

3. Richmond, Virginia

4. France

5. Central America

6. Paris, France

Fundamentals of LC Classification 2
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
FOR DOUBLE SIDED COPY
Instructor Manual Session 4
Tools for LC Classification

Tools for LC Classification

Session 4

Fundamentals of LC Classification 4-1

Instructor Manual Session 4
Tools for LC Classification

This session covers:

„ Versions of LC Classification available
„ Print and electronic
„ Primary tools for understanding and
applying LC Classification
„ Additional resources useful in applying
LC Classification
„ Overview of features in Classification
Web
2

To use LC Classification, you of course need to have the classification

schedules, in print or electronic format.
There are also auxiliary tools that are important for understanding and
applying LC Classification in accordance with LC policies and practices.
In this session, we’ll identify these tools and also some additional resources
that are very useful in applying LC Classification.
We’ll also take a brief look at some of the features in Classification Web.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 4-2

Instructor Manual Session 4
Tools for LC Classification

LCC schedules: print

„ Issued in 41
separate volumes
by Cataloging
Distribution Service
„ Available as
individual volumes
or as a set
„ Each schedule
revised on its own
timetable
3

3rd bullet: LCC is being revised continuously. Numbers are added or revised
weekly. Additions and changes are communicated to users through Weekly
Lists of updates posted on the LC web page as they are approved.
For the print version, a new edition of a particular schedule is issued when
there are sufficient changes and available personnel to prepare the new edition.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 4-3

Instructor Manual Session 4
Tools for LC Classification

LCC schedules: print (2)

„ SuperLCCS issued
by Thomson Gale
„ LC Classification
schedules combined
with additions,
changes, deletions
„ Updated annually

Thomson Gale also issues a print version of the LCC schedules,

SuperLCCS, which is updated annually. It combines in one sequence
the current edition of every LC classification schedule and all of the
additions, changes, and deletions.

[NOTE: Super LCCS also includes some explanatory notes, such as

“GALE NOTE: ".x" represents the cutter number for the state” and
“GALE NOTE: to develop this number range, integrate the subtopics
into the table structure.” In some cases, SuperLCCS incorporates
numbers from tables into number ranges in the text of the schedule.]

Fundamentals of LC Classification 4-4

Instructor Manual Session 4
Tools for LC Classification

LCC schedules: electronic

„ Classification Web
„ http://classificationweb.net/
„ Web-based tool for access to LC Classification
and LC Subject Headings
„ Updated daily – most up-to-date version
„ MARC Distribution Service (MDS)
Classification
„ Full set of LC Classification records in MARC 21
or MARCXML format, distributed weekly
„ Includes records only; no software for display
5

More on ClassWeb in following slides.

Worth emphasizing that ClassWeb is now updated daily.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 4-5

Instructor Manual Session 4
Tools for LC Classification

Classification Web
„ Full-text display of all LCC
schedules
„ LCSH, with links to schedules
„ Correlations between class
numbers and LCSH
„ Automatic calculation of table
numbers
„ Available by subscription
„ “Quick Start Tutorial” for help
with searching and other
features
6

4th bullet: Available by subscription; price based on number of concurrent

users.

5th bullet: At the end of this session, we take a brief look at the Tutorial and
some of the ClassWeb features (not in-depth training!!)

[NOTE: if you are training a group of attendees who do not have access to
ClassWeb at their home institutions, you can omit the slides at the end of this
session. It’s still useful to give this brief overview of ClassWeb here.]

Fundamentals of LC Classification 4-6

Instructor Manual Session 4
Tools for LC Classification

Main menu of ClassWeb.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 4-7

Instructor Manual Session 4
Tools for LC Classification

Example of Classification Web display

An example of the display of a schedule in ClassWeb – here a portion of the E

schedule (History of the U.S.).

Notice the letters [H R B L D S] following each caption. These letters are

features of ClassWeb and do not appear in the print schedules. For example,
H show the full classification hierarchy for that line at the top of the screen; R
shows the MARC 21 classification record that is used to produce the display.
There is a fuller explanation of the letters and features at the end of this session
(slide 40).

Fundamentals of LC Classification 4-8

Instructor Manual Session 4
Tools for LC Classification

Tools for applying the schedules

„ Manuals
„ Outline
„ Authority records
„ Auxiliary tools

Now we’ll talk about the tools that help catalogers understand and assign LC
classification in accordance with LC policies and practices.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 4-9

Instructor Manual Session 4
Tools for LC Classification

Manuals
„ Subject Cataloging Manual: Classification
„ guidelines for assigning LC classification numbers
following LC policy and standards
„ Subject Cataloging Manual: Shelflisting
„ guidelines for formulating the unique book number
portion of call numbers
„ Available in electronic form (Cataloger’s
Desktop) or loose-leaf print versions
„ We will reference these tools often during the
workshop
10

ANIMATION: click to bring in each bullet

Began as internal manuals for LC staff.
Not intended to be comprehensive explanations of the systems, but rather to
help with common recurring questions.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 4-10

Instructor Manual Session 4
Tools for LC Classification

SCM: Classification
„ 1st ed., 1992 (with 1995
update)
„ Instruction sheets
prefaced with “F”
„ Useful for guidance on:
„ Choosing a class number
„ Understanding use of form
captions
„ Classifying special topics or
categories of material
(folklore, genealogy, literary
authors, etc.)

When we refer to “the Classification Manual” or mention an instruction sheet

prefaced with “F”, this is what we’re talking about.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 4-11

Instructor Manual Session 4
Tools for LC Classification

Example of guidance found in the Classification manual.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 4-12

Instructor Manual Session 4
Tools for LC Classification

SCM: Shelflisting
„ 2nd ed., 1995 (out of print,
available through Cataloger’s
Desktop only)
„ Instruction sheets prefaced with
“G”
„ Includes tables used throughout
the LCC schedules
„ Including “By region or

country, A-Z”
„ Useful for guidance on:
„ Completing the call number

„ Cutter numbers

„ Dates in call numbers

When we refer to “the Shelflisting Manual” or mention instruction sheets

prefaced with “G”, this is what we’re talking about.

3rd bullet: the regions and countries Cutter table (G 300) is only one of the
general tables in the manual – also includes the translation and biography
tables (discussed more fully in the Principles/Assigning Numbers session)
4th bullet: there is much more in the Shelflisting Manual than shown here –
also has guidance on interpreting the class schedules, filing rules, shelflisting
practices for special types of material, etc.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 4-13

Instructor Manual Session 4
Tools for LC Classification

Example of a table found in the Shelflisting Manual: G 300 Regions and

Countries Table

Fundamentals of LC Classification 4-14

Instructor Manual Session 4
Tools for LC Classification

New combined manual:

coming soon
„ Subject Cataloging Manual: LC Classification
and Shelflisting (in progress)
„ New ed of SCM: Shelflisting
„ To be combined with SCM: Classification in one
physical volume
„ Much of the new & revised material now available
in Cataloger’s Desktop
„ Two sections: General & LC-Specific
„ Information:
http://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/scmsl.html

15

Fundamentals of LC Classification 4-15

Instructor Manual Session 4
Tools for LC Classification

Outline
„ Detailed outline of LCC
„ Helps classifiers
understand the system
and locate appropriate
schedules
„ Available in print from
CDS (7th ed., 2003)
„ Available online:
www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/lcco/

16

The outline contains more than just the captions of the subclasses, but less than
the full text of the schedules.

[NOTE: instructors may wish to have a print copy of the Outline available for
the workshop; ask workshop hosts if they can provide it.]

Fundamentals of LC Classification 4-16

Instructor Manual Session 4
Tools for LC Classification

http://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/lcco/

The main page of the online version, showing the main classes.
Files of the individual class outlines are available in PDF (Adobe Acrobat
Reader required; available for download from this page) or in WordPerfect 8
format.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 4-17

Instructor Manual Session 4
Tools for LC Classification

This is the broad outline of Class L – Education. (PDF format)

Fundamentals of LC Classification 4-18

Instructor Manual Session 4
Tools for LC Classification

Detailed outline of subclass LC – Special aspects of education. This is the

final level in the outline (cannot further expand the number ranges).

Fundamentals of LC Classification 4-19

Instructor Manual Session 4
Tools for LC Classification

Library of Congress Subject Headings

„ Entries in LCSH sometimes include

suggested LC Classification numbers for the
heading
„ Class numbers represent the most common
aspects of the topic
„ Added only if very close correspondence between
subject heading & LCC schedules
„ Class numbers are not always kept up-to-date
„ Use as a starting point only! Always consult the
LCC schedules

20

4th & 5th sub-bullets: emphasize that class numbers in LCSH entries are
created at the time the heading is established. No effort is made to maintain
the currency of the numbers as the classification develops.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 4-20

Instructor Manual Session 4
Tools for LC Classification

LCSH entry for Learning disabilities:

class numbers in different disciplines

Fundamentals of LC Classification 4-21

Instructor Manual Session 4
Tools for LC Classification

Authority records
„ Subject authority records
„ contain the same information as LCSH entries
„ Name authority records
„ Literary authors have specific LC Class numbers
„ Many appear in name authority records
„ LC Class number appears in 053 field
„ Caution: as noted for class numbers in LCSH,
not kept up-to-date. Use as a starting point
only!

22

[NOTE: 053s are also being added to name authority records for composers
now. These are for biography and criticism only, not for works by the
composer.
Example, on authority record for Franz Liszt:
053 #0 $a ML410.L7 $c Biography ]

Fundamentals of LC Classification 4-22

Instructor Manual Session 4
Tools for LC Classification

Subject authority record with class numbers

This is a screen shot from the OCLC Connexion Browser.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 4-23

Instructor Manual Session 4
Tools for LC Classification

Name authority record: literary author

This is a screen shot from the OCLC Connexion Browser.

Caution: class numbers for juvenile literary authors are not entered in 053.
Snicket, Lemony [PZ7.S6795] has the 053 number for Handler, Daniel
[PS3558.A4636]

Fundamentals of LC Classification 4-24

Instructor Manual Session 4
Tools for LC Classification

Auxiliary tools
„ Useful for:
„ Learning more about LC Classification
„ Keeping up with changes
„ Proposing new or revised class numbers

25

Fundamentals of LC Classification 4-25

Instructor Manual Session 4
Tools for LC Classification

LC’s Cataloging
and Acquisitions
web site

http://www.loc.gov/aba

LC’s Cataloging and Acquisitions web site has a wealth of information and
news about cataloging, organized by category.
Resources related to classification are easily accessible here.
One of the most important resources is right at the top of the list: the Weekly
Lists [shown in next slide]

Fundamentals of LC Classification 4-26

Instructor Manual Session 4
Tools for LC Classification

This is where you find weekly lists of additions and changes to the LC
Classification schedules.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 4-27

Instructor Manual Session 4
Tools for LC Classification

New class numbers from Weekly List 05 (2007)

The entire hierarchy of the proposal is included in the weekly list now.
(Former practice, before November 2006, was to print only the caption and
anchor point.)

Weekly lists are now available as RSS feeds – details are on the Cataloging
and Acquisitions web site (slide 26).

Fundamentals of LC Classification 4-28

Instructor Manual Session 4
Tools for LC Classification

Chan, Lois Mai. A

Guide to the Library
of Congress
Classification, 5th
ed. (Englewood,
CO: Libraries
Unlimited, 1999)

29

Lois Chan’s A Guide to the Library of Congress Classification is a

comprehensive textbook and reference guide to LC Classification. It outlines
the principles, structure, and format of the classification, and provides a
detailed examination of tables, individual schedules, and special types of
material. Throughout the book, examples of application are given. Chan’s
work has long been used as an authoritative training tool; much of the material
in this workshop was drawn from this book.

This edition is based on the 4th edition of Immroth’s Guide to the Library of
Congress Classification (1990, also by Chan), updated to reflect many
developments in the 1990s. Given that it was published in 1999, catalogers
should be aware that A Guide to the Library of Congress Classification may
not always reflect current LC practice.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 4-29

Instructor Manual Session 4
Tools for LC Classification

http://www.loc.gov/catdir/pcc/saco.saco.html

The final session in this workshop explains how to propose new class numbers
or changes to existing numbers. The SACO home page has a wealth of
information on this topic. This is the top of the screen – to see pertinent
information about classification in particular, scroll down [shown in next
slide].

Fundamentals of LC Classification 4-30

Instructor Manual Session 4
Tools for LC Classification

SACO home page (2)

Further down the page, we see LC Classification Proposal Guidelines and a

link to new procedures for submitting classification proposals through
ClassWeb (lots more on this in SACO session). There is also a link to the
SACO Participants’ Manual by Adam Schiff, a very useful resource for
classification proposals, with many examples.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 4-31

Instructor Manual Session 4
Tools for LC Classification

http://catalog.loc.gov/

The Library of Congress’ online catalog can be a very useful resource for
identifying possible class numbers for a topic or for exploring the types of
resources LC has classed under a particular number.
To use LC’s catalog effectively, you need to be aware of some caveats. It is
not a substitute for learning to use the classification schedules. Never use
class numbers from LC catalog records without checking the numbers in the
class schedules. The records in the online catalog span over a century and
many of them do not exemplify policies and practices currently in use.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 4-32

Instructor Manual Session 4
Tools for LC Classification

LC Call Number browse

Basic search on LC Class number

Fundamentals of LC Classification 4-33

Instructor Manual Session 4
Tools for LC Classification

LC Call Number browse results

An example of selected results of the call number browse.

Caution: class numbers may be obsolete.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 4-34

Instructor Manual Session 4
Tools for LC Classification

LC Authorities: http://authorities.loc.gov

LC Authorities is another resource that can be useful for classification. It

includes subject, name, title, and name/title authority records (including in-
process subject proposal records). Users can browse and display authority
headings and download authority records in MARC format, free of charge.

Here we see the authority record for Chimpanzees as pets, including the class
number (SF459.C47) that we saw on the Weekly List (slide 28).

Fundamentals of LC Classification 4-35

Instructor Manual Session 4
Tools for LC Classification

ClassWeb Quick Start Tutorial

„ Available in ClassWeb and at
http://www.loc.gov/cds/classweb/
„ Help with:
„ Browsing class numbers
„ Searching (captions, keywords, index terms, etc.)
„ Customizing
„ Correlating subject headings and class numbers
„ And more….

36

[NOTE: if you are training a group of attendees who do not have access to
ClassWeb at their home institutions, you can omit most of these slides.
However, you should still go over the information in slide 40 that explains the
ClassWeb features [H R B L S]. Examples of ClassWeb displays are used
throughout the workshop and it’s useful for people to know what these mean.]

Fundamentals of LC Classification 4-36

Instructor Manual Session 4
Tools for LC Classification

Fundamentals of LC Classification 4-37

Instructor Manual Session 4
Tools for LC Classification

You can begin with a class number and browse the schedules – when you
select “Browse Classification Schedules” you get the input box shown here.
Type in a class number and click “Go” (or hit Enter)

Fundamentals of LC Classification 4-38

Instructor Manual Session 4
Tools for LC Classification

Results: browsing GV854.9

The Cf. notes are hot links to the class numbers referenced.
The tutorial also explains the [H R B L D S] letters we see in ClassWeb
displays [next slide]

Fundamentals of LC Classification 4-39

Instructor Manual Session 4
Tools for LC Classification

Some ClassWeb features

„ H (display classification hierarchy)
„ shows the full hierarchy for that line at the top of the screen
„ R (display classification record)
„ shows the MARC 21 record that is used to build the database
„ B (display bibliographic records with this number)
„ shows links to several library catalogs; when you select one,
you see records in that catalog classed under that number
„ L (display LC subject headings for this number)
„ displays subject authority records that have that class number
in the 053
„ S (display subject correlations for this number)
„ shows subject headings in LC’s catalog that are closely
associated with the class number 40

ANIMATION: click to bring in each bullet

[NOTE: there is an example of “B – display bibliographic records with this
number” in the next slide.]

ClassWeb actually consists of three separate databases:

•LC Classification schedules
•LCSH
•Bibliographic records

The three databases are linked.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 4-40

Instructor Manual Session 4
Tools for LC Classification

Checkers. Draughts.

Clicking the “B” next to the caption takes you to a list of library catalogs you
can search by call number – ClassWeb comes with a default list and you can
add others (University of Oregon added here to top of list by UO staff
member)

ANIMATION: click to bring in arrow by Library of Congress OPAC

We’ll search LC’s catalog

Fundamentals of LC Classification 4-41

Instructor Manual Session 4
Tools for LC Classification

Call number search in LC’s catalog

We see books that have been classed under this number in LC’s catalog (this is
the same type of search we did earlier, when beginning from LC’s catalog
home page, but here we went directly from the ClassWeb display).

There are many other useful features in ClassWeb, some of which we’ll
highlight in the workshop. Anyone can explore the features from the URL
given in the slide (no subscription required for the tutorial).

Fundamentals of LC Classification 4-42

Instructor Manual Session 4
Tools for LC Classification

Search options are explained in this part of the tutorial -- we won’t go over
them here. We do go over some of the basics (caption vs. keyword searching)
in a later session (Principles/Assigning Numbers).

Fundamentals of LC Classification 4-43

Instructor Manual Session 4
Tools for LC Classification

Summary
„ Have essential tools at hand
„ Ensure that you have up to date
versions of schedules and manuals
„ Make use of auxiliary tools to increase
skill and efficiency

44

There are many ways to access the tools. Often they are found in more than
one location or format – LCC schedules are found in print and in electronic
format via ClassWeb; LCSH is found in print, in electronic format via
ClassWeb and LC Authorities.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 4-44

Instructor Manual Session 5
Elements of LC Call Numbers

Elements of LC Call Numbers

Session 5

Fundamentals of LC Classification 5-1

Instructor Manual Session 5
Elements of LC Call Numbers

This session covers:

„ The elements that make up a call
number (notation)
„ Use of Cutter numbers
„ Basics of shelflisting
„ Additions to call numbers
„ MARC coding of call numbers

Intro: This session describes the elements that make up a call number and how
they are determined.
There are many factors that come into play as a cataloger decides where to
classify an item. That decision process will be covered in the next session
(Principles of LC Classification and Assigning Numbers).
In this session, we’ll talk about what you do once you’ve made the decision
about where to class your item – how you complete the call number – so you’ll
have an idea of what the entire process is like.
We introduce the basic concepts in this session and go into more detail about
specialized practices in other sessions.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 5-2

Instructor Manual Session 5
Elements of LC Call Numbers

What is a call number?

„ Call number = class number + book number
„ Class number
„ alphanumeric
„ taken or derived from schedules
„ Book number
„ also called Item number or Author number
„ distinguishes among items classed under the
same number
„ usually begins with Cutter number
3

A call number consists of two main parts: a class number and a book number.
The class number reflects the subject matter of the work being cataloged. It is
alphanumeric and is taken or derived from the classification schedules.
The book number (or item number, or author number) distinguishes among
items classed under the same number and organizes works on a subject,
generally in alphabetical order by main entry (author or title).
Since 1982, call numbers for monographs also include the date of publication.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 5-3

Instructor Manual Session 5
Elements of LC Call Numbers

Overview: example 1
Animals in translation : using the mysteries of
autism to decode animal behavior / Temple
Grandin and Catherine Johnson, 2005.

Class number: QL Zoology

751 Animal behavior
Book number: .G73 Cutter for Grandin
2005 Year of publication
4

Fundamentals of LC Classification 5-4

Instructor Manual Session 5
Elements of LC Call Numbers

Overview: example 2
Essential Brittany / by Lindsay Hunt,
1997.

Class number: DC History of France

611 Regions
.B848 Brittany
Book number: H84 Cutter for Hunt
1997 Year of publication

Some class numbers contain Cutters that reflect subject matter, a geographic
area, or a name.

[NOTE: in case anyone asks – the Cutter number for Brittany (.B848) comes
from the classification schedule (range of B841-.B9173 is for the history of
Brittany, .B848 is Description and travel) . Some Cutters for places are based
on G 300 Regions and Countries Table. The Cutter table is not used to
formulate these (an attendee asked why the Cutter for Brittany was not .B75 as
it would be if derived from the the Cutter table).]

Fundamentals of LC Classification 5-5

Instructor Manual Session 5
Elements of LC Call Numbers

Cutter numbers
„ Named for Charles Ammi Cutter
„ developed several tables using letters and numbers to
achieve an alphabetical arrangement
„ Capital letter followed by Arabic numerals
„ Cutter numbers may be based on:
„ Personal or corporate names
„ Geographic names
„ Topics
„ Titles
„ Cutters used as book numbers generally correspond
to main entry (name or title)
„ The first Cutter in a call number is preceded by a
decimal 6

We refer to Cutter numbers throughout this session so here is an explanation of

the term.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 5-6

Instructor Manual Session 5
Elements of LC Call Numbers

Class numbers must contain:

„ one, two, or three capital letters
D History
DG History of Italy
DJK History of Eastern Europe
K Law
KF Law of the United States
KFP Law of Pennsylvania

Now we’ll take a closer look at the parts of the call number – first the class
number.
[NOTE: this was covered in the Outline session, quick review]
A single letter denotes a main class and most subclasses are designated by
double letters.
Classes E and F do not use double letters.
Triple-letter combinations have been used only for some subclasses in D and
K.
[If more detail is wanted:
D only uses three letters for DAW (History of Central Europe) and DJK
(above)
K frequently uses the third letter. In KE (Law of Canada) and KF (Law of the
United States) the third letter represents province or state names
mnemonically, for example, KFL, Law of Louisiana.]
(Could give example of state or province where workshop is held)

Fundamentals of LC Classification 5-7

Instructor Manual Session 5
Elements of LC Call Numbers

Class numbers must contain: (2)

„ whole numbers (1-9999)
HV875 Adoption
TK7881 Industrial electronics

„ may have decimal extensions

HV875.5 Intercountry adoption

TK7881.85 Automobile sound systems and
equipment

A decimal extension is used when it is necessary to insert a topic between two

consecutive whole numbers.
HV876 was already used for Children’s villages, so the half-page expansion
under Adoption required numerous decimals.
TK area for electronics was squeezed into a small space and requires several
pages of decimal expansions.

Decimals MAY represent a subtopic of the whole number, as is the case with
the two numbers shown here, but this is not always the case.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 5-8

Instructor Manual Session 5
Elements of LC Call Numbers

Class numbers: decimal extensions

„ Decimals do not necessarily represent
subtopics of a whole number:
Water sports
GV836 Houseboats and houseboating
GV836.2 Swimming. Periodicals

Horse racing
SF357 Individual running races, A-Z
SF357.3 Quarter racing. Periodicals

Fundamentals of LC Classification 5-9

Instructor Manual Session 5
Elements of LC Call Numbers

Class numbers may contain:

„ single Cutter number extension
BQ5075.P73 Prayer wheels in Buddhism
HN79.M3 Social conditions in Maryland
HV5824.C42 Drug use by celebrities

„ double Cutter number extension

HF5382.5.U6 F64 Vocational guidance in Florida
N6530.N72 C646 History of art in Columbia
County, New York

10

Cutter numbers shown in these examples have topical significance; they

extend the class number.
Cutters numbers may represent topics (prayer wheels, celebrities) or places
(Maryland, United States, Florida, New York, Columbia County)

LCC is usually arranged in a logical or hierarchical order, but in many cases,

an alphabetical order is used instead. This is common for names of countries,
regions, states, cities, etc., for individual biography, and in other cases where a
series of topics does not lend itself to a logical or hierarchical order.
Notice that the first Cutter is preceded by a decimal.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 5-10

Instructor Manual Session 5
Elements of LC Call Numbers

Book numbers
„ Used to arrange material in a given class
„ generally by main entry (primary access point)
„ Usually begin with a Cutter number
„ single capital letter, followed by Arabic numerals
G73 for Grandin H84 for Hunt
„ preceded by decimal, if this is the first Cutter
„ Arabic numerals represent remainder of
name or title, derived from Cutter table
„ Table is in SCM: Shelflisting G 63
„ also in appendix for this workshop
11

ANIMATION: click to bring in each bullet

Once you have assigned a class number, you need to determine a book number
for the work you’re cataloging, to place it in the appropriate order among other
items with that class number. Generally that order is by main entry (or
primary access point, in the terminology that is proposed for RDA), though the
schedules specify otherwise in some cases.
[NOTE: Alert attendees that they should get the Cutter table out of the
appendix at this time.]

Fundamentals of LC Classification 5-11

Instructor Manual Session 5
Elements of LC Call Numbers

Cutter Table examples

After initial vowels
for the second letter: b d l-m n p
use number: 2 3 4 5 6

After initial letter S

for the second letter: a ch e h-i m-p
use number: 2 3 4 5 6

12

Partial view of table, does not show r, s-t, u-y for initial vowels or t, u, w-z for
initial letter S

Fundamentals of LC Classification 5-12

Instructor Manual Session 5
Elements of LC Call Numbers

Cutter Table examples (2)

After other initial consonants
for the second letter: a e i o r u
use number: 3 4 5 6 7 8

For expansion
for the letter: a-d e-h i-l m-o p-s t-v
use number: 3 4 5 6 7 9

13

Partial view, does not show letters y for other initial consonants or w-z for
expansion
These slides also do not show the portion of the table for initial letters Qu and
Qa-Qt
“For expansion” : adding another digit
Can show how the Cutter for Grandin was determined using the table -- G73
Also show what you would find in the table for Hunt -- H86 – and note that it
is different from the Cutter assigned in the example given (Essential Brittany,
by Lindsay Hunt, Cutter for Hunt is H84). Note that the table is a guide only –
it may be helpful in determining the book numbers, but it is just one piece of
the process.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 5-13

Instructor Manual Session 5
Elements of LC Call Numbers

Shelflisting
„ The process of determining the book number
is called shelflisting
„ Shelflist:
„ a file of cards or bibliographic records arranged in
the same order as the corresponding materials on
the shelves
„ Shelflisting:
„ to arrange materials within a subject, normally by
author; to determine the book number

14

Shelflist can be physical or virtual (call number browse in online catalog);

both represent the order of materials on the shelf.
The goal is to arrange materials systematically within a subject. A book
number calculated from the Cutter tables often needs to be adjusted based on
the works already in the shelflist to achieve this arrangement and to avoid
duplicating call numbers.

We’ll go over the basic process of shelflisting in this session; more detail on
special situations or types of material follows in later sessions.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 5-14

Instructor Manual Session 5
Elements of LC Call Numbers

Using the Cutter Table:

first letter is a consonant
„ Main entry: Campbell, Joseph
„ begin with C
„ for 2nd letter a, use number 3: C3
„ expansion row : 3rd letter m-o, use 6: C36
„ Main entry: French political parties…
„ begin with F
„ for 2nd letter r, use number 7: F7
„ expansion row: 3rd letter e-h, use 4: F74

15

First, just practice using the table to come up with a Cutter number
Have attendees follow along looking at the Cutter tables

ANIMATION: click to bring in each bullet

Fundamentals of LC Classification 5-15

Instructor Manual Session 5
Elements of LC Call Numbers

Using the Cutter Table:

initial vowel, initial letter “S”
„ Main entry: The “other” eighteenth century
„ begin with O
„ for 2nd letter s-t, use number 8: O8
„ expansion row: 3rd letter e-h, use 4: O84
„ Main entry: Schreiber, Daniel
„ begin with S
„ for 2nd letters ch, use number 3: S3
„ expansion row: next letter p-s, use 7: S37

16

ANIMATION: click to bring in each bullet

Fundamentals of LC Classification 5-16

Instructor Manual Session 5
Elements of LC Call Numbers

Determining the Cutter

„ Find the filing position in the shelflist
„ search by class number and view main entries
„ in most cases, arrangement is alphabetical order
by main entry
„ Consider whether use of the Cutter table will
achieve the proper position
„ if so, use the Cutter table
„ if not, adjust by using different numbers or by
expanding with additional numbers
„ The shelflist always takes precedence
17

In the examples just given, we built the Cutter number entirely using the
numbers given in the table. However, the goal is to fit your item into the
arrangement already in the shelflist.
First, find the filing position in the shelflist.
In many cases, Cutters must be adjusted to file correctly and to allow room for
later entries.
Numbers can be expanded decimally – there is no limit.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 5-17

Instructor Manual Session 5
Elements of LC Call Numbers

Where should a new entry file?

„ G 100 Filing Rules has complete information
„ General principle: File elements exactly as
they appear, word by word, then character by
character
„ File abbreviations exactly as written
„ Treat hyphenated words as separate words
„ Ignore initial articles (such as a, an, the)
„ list of articles in many languages is in G 100
„ BUT do not ignore initial articles in personal
and place names
18

ANIMATION: click to bring in each bullet

G 100 has many examples of correct practice as well.
This is a much simplified summary of some filing rules.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 5-18

Instructor Manual Session 5
Elements of LC Call Numbers

An example of the instructions in G100, here for names with a prefix.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 5-19

Instructor Manual Session 5
Elements of LC Call Numbers

Adjusting the Cutter:

expanding numbers
„ In order to permit infinite expansion between
numbers, Cutters are treated as decimals
.B3
.B47
.B56
.B564
.B583
.B66 Do not end a Cutter with 1 or 0
.B7

20

Given that you may need to “adjust” the Cutter to fit your item into its place in
the filing order – how do you do that?
Cutter numbers are treated as decimals, so .B66 files after .B583, .B7 files
after .B66, etc.
This makes it possible to insert new numbers into the existing arrangement at
any point by adding additional digits to a number and maintain the order.
ANIMATION: click to bring in text box
A zero is not used at the end of a Cutter because it adds no filing value and
takes up space.
1 is avoided because to file something before it requires a zero, which can look
like a capital O.
Generally speaking, when shelflisting, try to avoid blocking a future work.
[NOTE: spoiler alert: the next three slides pose questions we’ll work through
together – the answers are already printed in the manual, so people may want
to just watch the screen if they want to try and figure out the answer]

Fundamentals of LC Classification 5-20

Instructor Manual Session 5
Elements of LC Call Numbers

Adjusting the Cutter: expanding numbers

„ What Cutter would fit between these two?
.S39
.S392

.S395

.S396

.S3965

.S39995
.S4
21

ANIMATION: click to bring in each set of numbers – in the order listed in

notes:
Good choices for filing between the two numbers:
.S395
.S396
.S3965
Extremes that might occasionally be required:
.S3922
.S39995

Fundamentals of LC Classification 5-21

Instructor Manual Session 5
Elements of LC Call Numbers

Main entry: letter not given in table

„ For: Gladwell, Malcolm Cutter table: “L” not specified
„ Shelflist shows:

BF448 Galotti, Kathleen Making decisions that

.G35 2002 matter

BF448 Gelatt, H. B. Creative decision making

.G45 2003

BF448 Glaser, Rollin O. Groupthink index

.G57 1993
Could use: .G53

Many letters are not included in the Cutter table. For example, when Cuttering
for the name “Gladwell”, we find that the second letter “L” is not included in
the table for letters after initial consonants.
In such cases, you will likely assign the next higher or lower number, adjusting
as necessary to fit within the numbers already assigned in the shelflist.
When we look at the shelflist in this case, we see that Gladwell needs to come
after Gelatt and before Glaser
ANIMATION: click to bring in arrow
click again to bring in text box
[NOTE: Work shelflisted is Gladwell, Malcom. Blink : the power of thinking
without thinking. BF448 = Psychology -- Consciousness. Cognition --
Thought and thinking -- Decision making]

Fundamentals of LC Classification 5-22

Instructor Manual Session 5
Elements of LC Call Numbers

Example: inserting the number

„ For: Levitt, Stephen Cutter table suggests: L48
„ Shelflist shows:
HB74.P8 Levine, David P. Normative political
L477 2001 economy.

HB74.P8 Levine, David P. Subjectivity in political

L478 1998 economy.

HB74.P8 Lewis, Alan. New economic mind

L48 1995

Could use: L479

ANIMATION: click to bring in arrow

click again to bring in text box

[NOTE: work shelflisted is Levitt, Stephen D. Freakonomics: a rogue

economist explores the hidden side of everything. HB74.P8 = Economic
theory -- Economics as a science -- Relation to psychology]

Fundamentals of LC Classification 5-23

Instructor Manual Session 5
Elements of LC Call Numbers

Cuttering for numerals: SCM G 63

„ When Cuttering for Roman or Arabic
numerals, use the Cutters .A12-.A19
„ PR8858 .A17 1995
The 1916 poets / edited with an introduction by Desmond
Ryan, 1995.
„ When numerals are expressed as words,
Cutter like any other word:
„ BM723 .F48 1996
Fifty-eighth century : a Jewish renewal sourcebook / edited
by Shohama Harris Wiener, 1996.

24

1st bullet: Choose a number toward the center of the available span when
Cuttering for the first numeral in a class. The middle of the range is used for
the first numeral Cuttered because no matter what number you have, there is
an infinite number of possible larger and smaller numbers. LC staff are
instructed to use .A15 automatically for the first entry beginning with a date.
Reserved Cutters .A12-.A19 use a numerical sort, not an ASCII sort.
Note: If entries already in the shelflist have been assigned “document
numbers” (.A5 for the corporate heading United States. Dept. of… ) Cutter
numerals to file directly after those entries. Examples:
UF523
.A5 U.S. Ordnance Dept.
1918a Handbook of ordnance data … 1918.

UF523
.A53 1880’s American arms … 1981.
1981

Fundamentals of LC Classification 5-24

Instructor Manual Session 5
Elements of LC Call Numbers

Exercise 1

Elements of LC Call Numbers

Exercise 1: Applying the Cutter Table

is at the end of this session

25

Fundamentals of LC Classification 5-25

Instructor Manual Session 5
Elements of LC Call Numbers

More on class numbers…MAY

contain:
„ a date as an extension of the class
number:
JK1968 2004 .R63 2005
Election returns. By date of election
HV600 1746 .L55 P47 2001
Disaster relief. Earthquakes. By date of
occurrence

26

Now that you’ve had some practice applying the Cutter table, let’s talk more
about what can go into a call number.
Class number is shown in blue.
The next slides demonstrate guidance in how to subarrange such numbers.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 5-26

Instructor Manual Session 5
Elements of LC Call Numbers

Example from Classification Web

The schedules provide instructions in such cases, including instructions on

how to subarrange items within the class number.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 5-27

Instructor Manual Session 5
Elements of LC Call Numbers

Example from Classification Web

Fundamentals of LC Classification 5-28

Instructor Manual Session 5
Elements of LC Call Numbers

Example of complete call number

„ For a work about the 1746 earthquake
in Lima, Peru with main entry Pérez:

HV Social pathology. Social and public welfare

600 Earthquake relief
1746 Date of occurrence
.L55 Subarranged by place Lima
P47 Cutter for Pérez
2001 Date of publication

29

Fundamentals of LC Classification 5-29

Instructor Manual Session 5
Elements of LC Call Numbers

How many Cutter numbers?

„ Schedules may provide instructions for sub-
arrangement
„ these always take precedence over general
practices
„ No more than two Cutter numbers in a call
number (except G schedule)
„ No special instructions in the schedules?:
„ assign single Cutter for main entry
QL751.G73 Grandin, Temple

30

2nd bullet: Call numbers for maps in class G may in some cases contain three
Cutters – very specialized practices in G, not covered in this basic workshop
FYI: a Cutter for a geographic area (local areas), a subject letter number
representing the subject focus of the map (such as .P2 for a road map), and a
Cutter for main entry.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 5-30

Instructor Manual Session 5
Elements of LC Call Numbers

How many Cutter numbers?

„ If class number includes a Cutter
(representing topic, place, etc.):
„ assign an additional Cutter for the main
entry:

DC611.B848 H84 Hunt, Lindsey

HN79.M3 C37 Carr, Lois
HV5824.C42 K87 Kusinitz, Marc

31

Again, this assumes there are no special instructions in the schedules

Examples:
DC611.B848 - History of France, Brittany
HN79.M3 - Social conditions in Maryland
HV5824.C42 – Drug use by celebrities

Fundamentals of LC Classification 5-31

Instructor Manual Session 5
Elements of LC Call Numbers

How many Cutter numbers?

„ If class number requires two Cutter
numbers to express the topic:
„ add digits to the second number to achieve
alphabetical arrangement by main entry

HF5382.5.U6 F6+ Florida

F62 one work about Florida
F64 another work about Florida
F645 yet another…
F67 and another
32

Topic here is vocational guidance in Florida.

Many shelflisters use the “expansion” part of the Cutter table for selecting a
digit expansion of the second Cutter.

FYI: examples are from the LC shelflist:

F62 Florida Industrial Commission. Florida job
guide for young workers … 1959.
F64 Florida State Employment Service. Florida job
guide for young workers … 1957.
F645 Florida VIEW. Careers. 1994.
F67 Smith, Tom Q. 47 ways to make money in
Florida. 1952.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 5-32

Instructor Manual Session 5
Elements of LC Call Numbers

A-Z Topical Cutters

„ Topical Cutters are used in a schedule when
a series of topics does not lend itself to a
logical or hierarchical order:
TX557 Vegetables, cereals, fruits, etc.
558 Special, A-Z
.A3 Acorns
.A6 Apples
.B3 Bananas
.B35 Barley
33

We’ve seen some examples of topical Cutters already; here is more

information about them.
There is more on formation of topical Cutters in the sections on individual
schedules such as H.

[NOTE: TX557 -- Dietary studies, food values, experiments, tests, etc. for
vegetables, cereals, fruits, etc.]

Fundamentals of LC Classification 5-33

Instructor Manual Session 5
Elements of LC Call Numbers

A-Z Topical Cutters (2)

„ Most topical Cutters are printed in the
schedules
„ Previous practice: in some areas, only
representative or sample Cutter numbers were
given, preceded by “e.g.”
„ Some types of Cutters are not printed: personal,
corporate, geographic names, languages (when
topic is subarranged by language)
„ New topical Cutters can be proposed through
SACO

34

If the question comes up: can I use a topical Cutter that is not in the schedules without
proposing it?
Here are some considerations:
Cutters should be established in the schedule if not preceded by “e.g.”
Some libraries create their own topical Cutters based on what makes sense in their own
catalog.
Disadvantages to creating your own topical Cutter without proposing it include:
•LC may later establish a topical Cutter for that topic that is different from the one you used
•Most catalogers using your record as copy would assume the Cutter has been established,
unless you code your call number as a non-LC call number
•Different libraries could use different terminology for the topic, so different Cutters could be
used for the same concept
•Keeping track of Cutters assigned locally can be challenging

Fundamentals of LC Classification 5-34

Instructor Manual Session 5
Elements of LC Call Numbers

Reserved Cutter numbers

„ A span of Cutter numbers at the
beginning (“A”) or end (“Z”) of the
sequence set aside for special purposes
„ “A” Cutters are often for form divisions
(periodicals, congresses)
„ “Z” Cutters are often for special
divisions of the subject (biography and
criticism of a literary author)
35

Fundamentals of LC Classification 5-35

Instructor Manual Session 5
Elements of LC Call Numbers

.A1, .A15, .A2 are reserved

For general works, Cutter for main entry

“Abell” should be greater than .A3

For reserved Cutters, add a second Cutter

based on main entry

Cutter numbers .A1, .A15, and .A2 have been assigned special meanings here.
What if you had a general work:
ANIMATION: click to bring in arrow
and you needed to assign a Cutter for an author named Abell? According to
the Cutter table this would be .A23, but you would need to assign a Cutter
greater than A3 because .A2 has a specific meaning.
ANIMATION: click again to bring in text box “For general works…”

Also, notice that you cannot follow the general practice for Cuttering for
numerals (using A12-19) in this situation. Entries beginning with numerals
need to appear before entries beginning with the letter A, so space should be
left for numerals.
ANIMATION: click to bring in “For reserved Cutters…” text box
When you assign one of the reserved Cutters (for a periodical or a congress or
a directory, for example), you add a second Cutter based on main entry.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 5-36

Instructor Manual Session 5
Elements of LC Call Numbers

Additions to call numbers

„ Date of publication is added in most
cases
„ Work letter (or mark)
„ Volume number
„ Terms such as Index or Suppl.
„ Local decisions:
„ Copy 1, 2, etc.
„ Oversize designation
37

We’ve talked about class numbers and book numbers, and how Cutter numbers
are used in each.
These are some additional elements you may see in call numbers.
Date of publication is added in most cases, but the others will be added only in
certain situations. We’ll see examples of these throughout the workshop, but
will address the general practice for adding dates now.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 5-37

Instructor Manual Session 5
Elements of LC Call Numbers

Date of publication: G 140

„ General rule: add the date of imprint to all
monographs
„ prior to 1982, not done routinely
„ Dates are not added to the call numbers for
serials and certain loose-leaf publications
associated with legal materials
„ G 140 includes instructions on handling
multiple or complex dates
„ and exceptions to the general rule

38

LC practice: an imprint date is routinely added to book numbers for

monographs (policy established in 1982)

Note that the practice of adding dates to the call numbers of monographic
works applies to cataloging performed since 1982, not items published since
1982. A title cataloged today for a 1975 imprint would include a date in the
call number.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 5-38

Instructor Manual Session 5
Elements of LC Call Numbers

This is just a partial view of the list – there are many more examples of types
of dates and what to use in G140.
More on use of dates (conference dates, work letters, etc.) in a later session

Fundamentals of LC Classification 5-39

Instructor Manual Session 5
Elements of LC Call Numbers

Display of the notation

„ The same LC call number may be
displayed in numerous ways

RC RC RC569 RC569.5
569.5 569.5 .5 .S56B36
.S56 .S56B36 .S56B36 1988
B36 1988 1988
1988

40

Once you’ve created your call number, what might you want to do with it?
Get it into a bibliographic record
Print a label
Display it in your catalog

Fundamentals of LC Classification 5-40

Instructor Manual Session 5
Elements of LC Call Numbers

MARC 21 Coding
„ In a bibliographic record, the LC call number
appears in field 050

050 00 $a QL751 $b .G73 2005

050 00 $a RC569.5.S56 $b B36 1988

„ Subfield codes:
$a Classification number
$b Item number

41

Subfield $a contains the classification number portion of the call number.

Subfield $a may be repeated to record an alternative class number.
Subfield $b contains the item number portion of the call numbers (“item
number” here is MARC 21 terminology)

FYI: other subfields are defined in the MARC 21 format but are not commonly
used in general cataloging so not covered here ($3, $6, $8)

Fundamentals of LC Classification 5-41

Instructor Manual Session 5
Elements of LC Call Numbers

050 field: indicators

„ First indicator: existence in LC collection
_ No information provided
0 Item is in LC
1 Item is not in LC
„ Second indicator: source of call number
0 Assigned by LC
4 Assigned by agency other than LC

42

Both of the examples in the previous slide had indicators “00” – held by LC,
assigned by LC.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 5-42

Instructor Manual Session 5
Elements of LC Call Numbers

MARC 21 Coding
„ Reminder: classification number portion of
the call number may include a Cutter
050 00 $a QL751 $b .G73 2005
050 00 $a DC611.B848 $b H84 1997

„ First Cutter is preceded by decimal

„ General rule: delimiter for the item number
($b) precedes the last capital letter
43

2st bullet:
ANIMATION: click to bring in arrows
In addition, sometimes the Cutter in the item number portion is actually part of
the class number, when two Cutters are needed to express a topic.

$b delimiter also precedes the decimal before that letter, if present

Fundamentals of LC Classification 5-43

Instructor Manual Session 5
Elements of LC Call Numbers

MARC Coding in OCLC

„ 090 field: Locally assigned LC-type call number
„ based on LC classification schedules but assigned locally
„ both indicators are blank
090 # # RM735.7.K54 $b P373 2005
„ When transcribing LC copy, use 050 field for LC call
number
„ When assigning LC call number, libraries may use:
090 OR 050 #4
„ 090 field is not retained in master record if record
also contains 050 field

44

050 #4 = no information about LC holdings, number assigned by agency other

than LC
If you are assigning a local number that does not conform to the LC class
numbers, use field 099 (Local free-text call number)

[FYI: 4th bullet: exception is if 050 field contains a word or phrase – LAW,
NOT IN LC – in such cases, 090 is retained in master record]

Fundamentals of LC Classification 5-44

Instructor Manual Session 5
Elements of LC Call Numbers

BIBCO usage
„ LC call number is assigned in 050 field
„ 050 #4
„ 1st indicator blank (no information provided about
existence in LC collection)
„ 2nd indicator 4 (assigned by agency other than LC)
„ When/if a BIBCO record is used by LC, the
indicators are changed to “00”
„ For more information:
http://www.loc.gov/catdir/pcc/bibco/classfaq.html
45

BIBCO is the bibliographic record component program of the PCC through

which participants create cataloging records using mutually agreed upon
standards. The hallmark of the BIBCO record is that authorized headings
support those access points which call for established forms.

BIBCO participants agree to assign a classification number on BIBCO-

designated bibliographic records (excluding those exempted in the core record
standards) from an established classification system supported by the MARC
21 format e.g., Dewey, LC Classification (LCC).

Those participants using LC Classification (LCC) assign a classification

number that adheres to LC practice and that includes the data that represents
the topic. The number is input in field 050 using the value “blank” (no
information provided) in the first indicator position and value “4” (assigned by
an agency other than LC) in the second indicator position. Setting the first
indicator to “blank” prevents the need to determine whether LC holds the item
and improves the efficiency of supplying a classification number.

[FYI, only a classification number is required, not a full call number, though
many BIBCO participants supply full call numbers.]

Fundamentals of LC Classification 5-45

Instructor Manual Session 5
Elements of LC Call Numbers

Exercise 2

46

Fundamentals of LC Classification 5-46

Instructor Manual Session 5
Exercises
Elements of LC Call Numbers Exercise 1: Applying the Cutter Table

1. Apply the Cutter table to the following names or words, and write the Cutter number
in the space provided.

Wycliff __________ Anderson __________

Shrimp __________ Quality __________

Your last name _________________________

2. For the names Blades and Dwyer, the second letter is not given specifically in the
table and it is more difficult to create a good Cutter. What might you do?
• Library of Congress practice in this situation is to “move left and add 8;” in other
words, for the second letter of the name, select the number from the Cutter Table
that corresponds to the letter to the left of the second letter in the name, and then
add the numeral 8 as the expansion; it also is possible to:
• Use the earlier number from the table and expansion
• Use the later number from the table and expansion
• Use something in between
• Remember that the existing arrangement in the shelflist must always be taken into
account before formulating Cutter numbers

Blades earlier number: B53 later number: B63 ?________________

Dwyer earlier number: D89 later number: D99 ?________________

In making your choice, consider the shelflist below. Other entries already in the shelflist
are given in bold type. Also think about other words that might later need to fit in (some
possibilities given in italics):

Bizness .B59 Duzhnikov .D89

Bjorn Dwight
Blades Dwyer
Blyth Dying
Board of … .B63 Dzurko .D98

Fundamentals of LC Classification 1
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
FOR DOUBLE SIDED COPY
Instructor Manual Session 5
Exercises
Elements of LC Call Numbers Exercise 2: Identify the coding errors

Find the errors in the MARC coding of these call numbers. Write the call number with
the correct coding.

TS191.8 $b Z34 1990

T55.3 $b H3C353 1991

QP34.5. $b H625 1989

B3279.H49 B696 2000

B 8313 $b F35 2000

TR646 .G32 $b W653 1999

HE558 $b .G48 $b G56 2003

TX716.M4 $b .K44 1989

Fundamentals of LC Classification 2
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
FOR DOUBLE SIDED COPY
Instructor Manual Session 6
Principles of Classification and
Assigning Class Numbers

Principles of Classification and

Assigning Class Numbers

Session 6

Fundamentals of LC Classification 6-1

Instructor Manual Session 6
Principles of Classification and
Assigning Class Numbers

This session covers:

„ SCM: Classification F 10
„ Principles that generally apply when using
LC classification
„ Principles applicable in all schedules
„ Finding a number
„ Strategies
„ Works on a single topic, on multiple topics

Fundamentals of LC Classification 6-2

Instructor Manual Session 6
Principles of Classification and
Assigning Class Numbers

General principles
„ Class works according to their subject matter

„ Class a work by its specific subject, not by its

form under a broader topic

„ Within given topical area, ignore form unless

form captions have been established

Intro: first we’ll talk about the general principles outlined in F 10.

2nd bullet: Specific instructions in the shelflist take precedence. Also, there is an
important exception for serials that will be covered in the next session, Special Types
of Material

SCM F 10 was created to codify existing LC practice. It is a guideline only. Often an

existing classification arrangement may appear to be in violation of the principles
outlined in the instruction sheet. However, LC’s policy is to not reclass items when an
existing arrangement may not conform to the guidance in SCM F 10.

[NOTE: SCM F 210 Periodicals, section 4 says: Unless there are other specific
provisions printed in the schedule, class all serial publications, including periodicals,
numbered monographic series, and topical serial society publications in this number
(i.e., the class number for periodicals at the head of an important topic).]

Fundamentals of LC Classification 6-3

Instructor Manual Session 6
Principles of Classification and
Assigning Class Numbers

General principles (2)

A work on a congress on weed control would be classed under SB610.2

ANIMATION: click to bring in first arrow
But: A work on a congress devoted to biological control of weeds would be classed
under SB611.5
ANIMATION: click to bring in second arrow

Fundamentals of LC Classification 6-4

Instructor Manual Session 6
Principles of Classification and
Assigning Class Numbers

General principles (3)

„ Within a given topical area, prefer
classing by subject over classing by
place

„ Exceptions
„ Instructions in schedules take precedence
„ Clear precedent in shelflist takes
precedence

Fundamentals of LC Classification 6-5

Instructor Manual Session 6
Principles of Classification and
Assigning Class Numbers

General principles (4)

A work on female sex offenders in Germany would be

classed at:
HV6557
not at HV6592-6593 (By region or country)

ANIMATION: click to bring in each text box

Fundamentals of LC Classification 6-6

Instructor Manual Session 6
Principles of Classification and
Assigning Class Numbers

General principles (5)

„ Use the most specific number available

„ Use a broader number if:

„ No specific number is available, and
„ It is not feasible to propose a new number

Instructions for proposing new numbers will be covered in the session on the SACO
Program.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 6-7

Instructor Manual Session 6
Principles of Classification and
Assigning Class Numbers

General principles (6)

„ When several subjects are discussed in a
work, choose a class number according to
the most appropriate of these guidelines:
„ Class according to instructions in schedules
„ Class according to dominant subject
„ If no subject is dominant, class under first subject
mentioned in the work
„ Class with a broader subject, if the work deals with
several subjects that, taken together, constitute a
major part of a larger subject

Choose a classification number according to the most appropriate of these guidelines.

ANIMATION: click to bring in each sub-bullet

Fundamentals of LC Classification 6-8

Instructor Manual Session 6
Principles of Classification and
Assigning Class Numbers

General principles (7)

„ When several numbers appear
satisfactory:
„ Class according to the intent of the author

„ Alternatively, class where it appears the

work would be most usefully located

First bullet: Often “author’s intent” may be swayed by the academic degree held by
the author.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 6-9

Instructor Manual Session 6
Principles of Classification and
Assigning Class Numbers

General principles (8)

„ Influence of one subject on another:
„ Class with the subject influenced
„ But, instructions in the schedules and past
practices take precedence

Example:
How to use social norms marketing to prevent driving
after drinking / Jeffrey W. Linkenbach. 2006.
Class in:
„ HE5620.D7 Drunk driving. Drinking and traffic accidents

10

ANIMATION: click to bring in each bullet

Example: NOT classed with Social norms, Marketing, etc.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 6-10

Instructor Manual Session 6
Principles of Classification and
Assigning Class Numbers

General principles (9)

„ Relationship between order of subject
headings and class number

„ Subject Cataloging Manual: Subject

Headings H 80

„ Class number and first subject heading

usually match
11

An exact match is not always possible since the classification system and the subject
heading system have different conventions.
Class numbers may be more or less specific than subject headings
In some cases, it requires several subject headings collectively to designate what the
classification expresses in a single caption.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 6-11

Instructor Manual Session 6
Principles of Classification and
Assigning Class Numbers

Exercise 1

12

Exercise 1: attendees have the exercise at the end of this session in the manual. The
complete class listing of QH540 Ecology (Appendix A) should be consulted when
completing the exercise.

The goal of the exercise is to supply the class number for the titles given, using the
most specific number available.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 6-12

Instructor Manual Session 6
Principles of Classification and
Assigning Class Numbers

Finding a number
„ General principles
„ Choose the most specific number possible
„ Locate the item with related materials
„ Some strategies
„ Classification Web
„ Other bibliographic records
„ LCSH, authority records
„ Schedules
13

Intro: Next we’ll talk about some strategies for finding an appropriate class number,
keeping in mind the general principles.
There can be more than one appropriate number for a given item. In such cases,
compare similar items for consistency.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 6-13

Instructor Manual Session 6
Principles of Classification and
Assigning Class Numbers

Finding a number (2)

„ Classification Web
„ Classification search
„ Captions
„ Keywords
„ Index terms
„ LC Subject Heading & LC Classification
Number Correlations

14

ANIMATION: click to bring in each sub-bullet

In ClassWeb, you can search by captions, keywords, or index terms. (More complex
searches are possible, but we’re focusing here on the basic search options.)
You can also search correlations between LC Subject Headings and LC Class
numbers.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 6-14

Instructor Manual Session 6
Principles of Classification and
Assigning Class Numbers

ClassWeb search options

„ Caption
„ Searches text in captions only
„ Left match: retrieves only captions that begin with
the search term
„ Caution: easy to miss relevant numbers

„ Keyword
„ Word or phrase anywhere
„ Searches notes, multiple captions
15

The next few slides illustrate and compare these two options.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 6-15

Instructor Manual Session 6
Principles of Classification and
Assigning Class Numbers

Caption Search

Simple caption search on “plate tectonics”.

ANIMATION: click to bring in arrow

Fundamentals of LC Classification 6-16

Instructor Manual Session 6
Principles of Classification and
Assigning Class Numbers

Caption search results

Search retrieved two numbers: Z6033.P713 (subject bibliography) and a range of

numbers in QE511.4-.46.
The brackets indicate that a range of numbers was retrieved rather than a single
number. We click on the numbers to go to that schedule.

In order to use the caption search effectively, you need to know the schedules well
and be able to predict the exact terms that are used in captions. This is not an
especially good approach for beginners because it’s easy to miss relevant numbers. In
this case, it worked fine.

[NOTE: next slides show examples of the limitations of caption search].

Fundamentals of LC Classification 6-17

Instructor Manual Session 6
Principles of Classification and
Assigning Class Numbers

Caption vs. keyword

Browse caption results: no match for “Food safety”

Here we’re trying a caption search on “food safety.”

ANIMATION: click to bring in arrow by Browse button
click again to bring in curved arrow and
search results
It doesn’t retrieve any results.

[NOTE: Food safety would have appeared at the top of the results list if there were
any hits.]

Fundamentals of LC Classification 6-18

Instructor Manual Session 6
Principles of Classification and
Assigning Class Numbers

Caption vs. keyword (2)

Keyword search results: 2 items matching “Food safety”

Now we’ll try “food safety” as a keyword search.

ANIMATION: click to bring in arrow by Search button

click to again to bring in second arrow
and search results

This search retrieves two hits, one in the TX schedule, one in TP. Both have the
caption “Safety measures”. We’ll click on the first number to go to TX911.2.S24.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 6-19

Instructor Manual Session 6
Principles of Classification and
Assigning Class Numbers

[Only the first search results box displays]

Look at the top of the screen to see the hierarchy for this caption – this one is for
safety measures in the food service and hospitality industry.

ANIMATION: click TWICE to bring in arrows in first box

Keyword search retrieves words anywhere in the schedules – in the full hierarchy for
the term, in notes, etc.

ANIMATION: click to bring in second search results box

click TWICE to bring in arrows in
second box

If we went back to the search results screen and selected the TP373.5 number, we’d
see that TP373.5 is for safety measures relating to food processing.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 6-20

Instructor Manual Session 6
Principles of Classification and
Assigning Class Numbers

Class/Subject Correlations

Intro: Now we’ll take a look at the Class/Subject Correlations feature.

This can be a very useful tool for finding a class number. When you enter a subject
heading, it retrieves records in LC’s catalog which have that heading as the first
subject heading in the record and shows the LC Classification numbers used on those
records. Remember that the first subject heading and the class number usually match.
An important limitation: the correlations search does not show 600 or 610 tagged
entities, even if one is the first subject heading in the record.
Keep in mind that this search simply reflects what is on bib records in LC’s database –
it does not provide any qualitative assessment of the “best” class number to use with
that heading. It’s a great feature, but must be used with caution.

Here we’re looking for the class number correlation with the subject heading
“Sociology--Dictionaries--German.”
When keying a subject heading, hyphens between elements are optional

Fundamentals of LC Classification 6-21

Instructor Manual Session 6
Principles of Classification and
Assigning Class Numbers

Class/Subject Correlations (2)

Always check numbers

for currency!

The numbers in parentheses indicate the number of LC records in the database with
that class number where “Sociology--Dictionaries--German” is the first heading.
ANIMATION: click to bring in arrow
In this case it would appear that HM17 is probably the number to use.
ANIMATION: click to bring in text box
But, numbers should always be checked for currency.

The underlined call numbers are hot links to the classification schedules. We’ll take a
look at HM17.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 6-22

Instructor Manual Session 6
Principles of Classification and
Assigning Class Numbers

Class/Subject Correlations (3)

HM17 is in parentheses, meaning that it is no longer a valid number. There is a “see”

reference to HM425.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 6-23

Instructor Manual Session 6
Principles of Classification and
Assigning Class Numbers

Class/Subject Correlations (4)

HM425 is the currently valid number

HM425 is the number we should use for a dictionary of sociology.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 6-24

Instructor Manual Session 6
Principles of Classification and
Assigning Class Numbers

Finding a number (3)

„ Consult other bibliographic records
„ Prefer recent LC records
„ Searching LC’s online catalog is a good
strategy
„ Remember that the first subject heading
usually matches the call number
„ Remember that catalog records may
include obsolete numbers or reflect
obsolete practices

25

Consulting other bibliographic records is a good way to explore possible class

numbers for a topic. An advantage to this approach is that it promotes consistency –
we want to class a work with similar works already in the collection.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 6-25

Instructor Manual Session 6
Principles of Classification and
Assigning Class Numbers

Subject search on “identity theft” in LC’s

catalog – selected results:
HV6675 .N48 1999
Identity theft : the cybercrime of the millennium / by John Q. Newman .
1999.
SUBJECT: Identity theft.
Internet fraud.
Computer crimes.

KF9367.Z9 J37 2006

Identify theft and how to protect yourself / by Margaret C. Jasper. 2006.
SUBJECTS: Identity theft--United States--Popular works.
Identification cards--Forgeries--United States--Popular
works.
SERIES: Law for the layperson

26

Here’s an example of a situation in which searching LC’s catalog can be very helpful.

If you were cataloging a book on identity theft and thinking about where to classify it,
where would you start?
Searching “identify theft” in ClassWeb turns up no results, by caption or keyword.
When you search the subject “Identity theft” in LC’s catalog, you get over 100 hits
(including heading with subdivisions for form, place, narrower topic).
Here are a few of the results, showing several different class numbers.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 6-26

Instructor Manual Session 6
Principles of Classification and
Assigning Class Numbers

Subject search on “identity theft” in LC’s

catalog – selected results:
QA76.9.A25 T96 2005
Computer privacy annoyances : how to avoid the most annoying invasions
of your personal and online privacy / Dan Tyan. 2005.
SUBJECTS: Computer security.
Computers--Access control.
Data protection.
Identity theft.

HV6679 .C49 2004

Save your identity : ID theft awareness, prevention, and recovery / Michael
Chesbro. 2004.
SUBJECT: Identity theft--United States.
Identity theft--United States--Prevention.

27

Fundamentals of LC Classification 6-27

Instructor Manual Session 6
Principles of Classification and
Assigning Class Numbers

Checking the schedule: HV6675+

A general work on identity theft would be classed at HV6675.

A work focusing on identity theft in the U.S. would be classed at HV6679.

This might be a good candidate for a SACO proposal.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 6-28

Instructor Manual Session 6
Principles of Classification and
Assigning Class Numbers

Finding a number (4)

„ LCSH and subject authority records
„ Suggested class numbers are included for
some headings
„ only if very close correspondence between
subject heading & LCC schedules
„ Not kept up-to-date
„ Never use these numbers without checking
„ In subject authority records, class
number is in 053 field
29

Some subject headings in LCSH, and their associated authority records, include
suggested class numbers.

Class numbers are added at the time of creation. No attempt is made to keep them up
to date.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 6-29

Instructor Manual Session 6
Principles of Classification and
Assigning Class Numbers

Example: class numbers in LCSH

A heading may have more than one suggested class number, for different aspects of
the topic.
Sometimes a range of numbers is suggested, as we see here: GE195-199.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 6-30

Instructor Manual Session 6
Principles of Classification and
Assigning Class Numbers

Example: 053 field in subject authority record

This is a display of the subject authority record in the OCLC Connexion Browser.
The 053 field is repeatable.

When numbers are given in both subfield a and subfield b, a range of numbers is
indicated.

Captions are given in subfield c to differentiate multiple numbers or ranges of

numbers.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 6-31

Instructor Manual Session 6
Principles of Classification and
Assigning Class Numbers

Finding a number (5)

„ Go directly to the schedules
„ Often difficult for the beginner
„ May be the best approach for those
working in specialized subject areas
„ Consult the outline for guidance on
where to start
„ Use the index of the appropriate
schedule
32

Catalogers working with specialized collections become quite familiar with the
schedule(s) used.

Generalist catalogers may find it difficult to gain this type of familiarity with multiple
schedules.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 6-32

Instructor Manual Session 6
Principles of Classification and
Assigning Class Numbers

Using the index

Strategic marketing : an applied perspective / Karel Jan
Alsem.
SUBJECT: Marketing--Management.

From Schedule H Index:

Market share: HD2757.15
Market surveys: HF5415.3
Marketing: HF5410+
Accident insurance: HG9321
Accounting: HF5686.M35
Accounting business: HF5628.5
Banks: HG1616.M3

Example of using the index to locate a number for this work, Strategic marketing : an
applied perspective, with the subject heading Marketing--Management.

We see that the range of numbers beginning with HF5410 is for the topic of
Marketing.
We also see other numbers for different aspects of marketing.
While there is not an entry for marketing management, the index indicates that
HF5410+ is a good place to begin looking in the schedules.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 6-33

Instructor Manual Session 6
Principles of Classification and
Assigning Class Numbers

HF COMMERCE
Business
Marketing
5410 Periodicals. Societies. Serials
5411 Congresses
-----------------------------------------------------------
5415 General works
By region or country
5415.1 United States
54415.12 Other regions or countries, A-Z
-------------------------------------------------------------------
Marketing management
5415.13 General works
5415.135 Decision making
Product management
5415.15 General works
5415.152 Bundling

When we go to HF5410 and browse the subtopics, we see the subtopic “Marketing
management”. The general works number under this subtopic, HF5415.13, is a good
fit for the book.

[NOTE: lines indicate where some portions of the schedule have been omitted.]

Fundamentals of LC Classification 6-34

Instructor Manual Session 6
Principles of Classification and
Assigning Class Numbers

Works on a single topic

„ Choose a number for the topic or a
facet of the topic

„ If a breakdown is not provided, use the

General Works number

35

Intro: now that we’ve considered different strategies for finding a class number, we’ll
talk about assigning numbers in the context of the general principles of LC
classification.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 6-35

Instructor Manual Session 6
Principles of Classification and
Assigning Class Numbers

Works on a single topic (2)

„ General special:
„ SCM: Classification F 290
„ No longer used in newly published
schedules, but continues to appear in older
schedules
„ Used for “amorphous” works for which it is
impossible to determine precisely the
actual concepts discussed

36

Fundamentals of LC Classification 6-36

Instructor Manual Session 6
Principles of Classification and
Assigning Class Numbers

Works on a single topic (3)

„ General special (cont’d)
„ Used for works involving subjects so new
that it cannot be immediately determined
where they fit in a classification hierarchy
„ Do not use when number can be
determined and designated. Propose a
new number if necessary
„ Do not propose new General special
numbers

37

Fundamentals of LC Classification 6-37

Instructor Manual Session 6
Principles of Classification and
Assigning Class Numbers

Works on a single topic (4)

Fundamentals of LC Classification 6-38

Instructor Manual Session 6
Principles of Classification and
Assigning Class Numbers

Works on a single topic (5)

General special is sometimes qualified by the phrase Special aspects of the subject as
a whole.
This work on the relationship between human evolution and life on other planets
represents a concept deemed too new or unique to warrant its own number.

Other examples of titles classed in General special:

HV8706 Social pathology. Social and public welfare. Criminology--Criminal justice
administration--Penology. Prisons. Corrections--Forms of punishment (Modern)--
Imprisonment. Penal servitude--General special. Special aspects of the subject as a
whole
Prisons and their moral performance: a study of values, quality, and
prison life / Alison Liebling ; assisted by Helen Arnold. 2004.
Changing attitudes to punishment : public opinion, crime and justice /
edited by Julian V. Roberts and Mike Hough. 2002.

GV1043.7 Recreation. Leisure--Sports--Cycling. Bicycling--General special

Critical mass : bicycling’s defiant celebration / edited by Chris
Carlsson. 2002.
Cycling past 50 / Joe Friel. 1998.
The art of urban cycling : lessons from the street / Robert Hurst ;
[foreword by Marla Streb]. 2004.
Fundamentals of LC Classification 6-39
Instructor Manual Session 6
Principles of Classification and
Assigning Class Numbers

Works on a single topic (6)

„ Form numbers:

„ Periodicals, societies, congresses,

dictionaries, etc.

„ Use form numbers if given, otherwise class

with General works

40

Special numbers for societies are for works about the society, e.g. news of the society,
membership lists, etc.
Publications by a society dealing with topics of interest to the society are classed for
the topic.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 6-40

Instructor Manual Session 6
Principles of Classification and
Assigning Class Numbers

Works on a Single Topic (7)

This screen shows examples of form numbers under the subject Business education.
If you had a congress on Business education, you would class it at HF1102.
If you had a directory of programs of business education in the U.S., where would you
class it? HF1131 – by country, United States, General works. We would use the
General works number because there is no form number for directories.

The Collected works form number is now obsolete; collected works should now be
classed in HF1106, the General works number.

Also note that the General special number is now obsolete.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 6-41

Instructor Manual Session 6
Principles of Classification and
Assigning Class Numbers

Works on a single topic (8)

„ Place numbers:
„ For a work treating a topic with regard to a
particular place:
„ class with a number that brings out both topic
and place, if available
„ if there are no geographic provisions under the
specific topic, class with the specific topic

42

Fundamentals of LC Classification 6-42

Instructor Manual Session 6
Principles of Classification and
Assigning Class Numbers

Where would you class a work on the diet of athletes in China?

A work on the diet of athletes in China would be classed under TX361.A8. The place
is not reflected in the class number.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 6-43

Instructor Manual Session 6
Principles of Classification and
Assigning Class Numbers

Works on a single topic (10)

„ Period numbers:

„ Class in period numbers if provided

„ If work covers several time spans listed,

select the earliest

44

However, if the coverage of the earlier time spans serves only to introduce the
principle time period covered, class for the period emphasized.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 6-44

Instructor Manual Session 6
Principles of Classification and
Assigning Class Numbers

Works on a single topic (11)

Here we see the beginning range of class numbers for fashion design in France by
period.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 6-45

Instructor Manual Session 6
Principles of Classification and
Assigning Class Numbers

Works on a single topic (12)

This work covers fashion in France from 1700-1900 (18th and 19th centuries), so the
number for the earlier century (18th) is used – GT860.

[NOTE: Instructor may want to emphasize that 18th century refers to 1701-1800, and
19th century refers to 1801-1900.]

Fundamentals of LC Classification 6-46

Instructor Manual Session 6
Principles of Classification and
Assigning Class Numbers

Works on multiple topics

„ If there are two or more topics:
„ Follow instructions in schedule

„ No instructions in the schedule: class for the

dominant topic

Fundamentals of LC Classification 6-47

Instructor Manual Session 6
Principles of Classification and
Assigning Class Numbers

Works on multiple topics (2)

Promotions is the dominant topic

Commerce—Business—Personnel management.
Employment management—By topic—Promotions

Example of classing for the dominant topic.

The title is How to get a raise or promotion without asking : and how to make the
most of what you make.
Multiple topics including getting a promotion, getting a raise, and managing your
finances. Promotions appears to be the dominant topic as it is the first subject heading
assigned.
ANIMATION: click to bring in “Promotions is the dominant topic” text box & arrow
The class number assigned is HF5549.5.P7, for Promotions
ANIMATION: click to bring in underline of class number, arrow, and full hierarchy

Fundamentals of LC Classification 6-48

Instructor Manual Session 6
Principles of Classification and
Assigning Class Numbers

Works on multiple topics (3)

„ If there is no dominant topic:
„ Class under the first topic mentioned in the
work
„ Choose the broader topic if the two or
three topics constitute the whole of the
topic
„ If there are four or more topics, choose the
general number

49

Fundamentals of LC Classification 6-49

Instructor Manual Session 6
Principles of Classification and
Assigning Class Numbers

No dominant topic
„ Class under first topic mentioned in the work
Chemistry of arsenic, antimony, and bismuth. 1998.
QD Chemistry
181 Special elements, A-Z
.A7 Cutter for Arsenic

„ Class under broader topic if the two or three topics

constitute the whole of the broader topic
„ for a work on the management of beef cattle and dairy cattle,
class under the broader topic, Cattle

50

2nd bullet: Beef cattle is classed at SF207

Dairy cattle is classed at SF208
Cattle—General works is SF197

Fundamentals of LC Classification 6-50

Instructor Manual Session 6
Principles of Classification and
Assigning Class Numbers

Relationships among topics

„ Use the number for the relationship if
available, e.g., BL239-265 Religion and
science

„ When the work treats the influence of

one topic on another, class for the topic
being influenced

51

Fundamentals of LC Classification 6-51

Instructor Manual Session 6
Principles of Classification and
Assigning Class Numbers

Relationships among topics (2)

„ When the work treats the application of
one topic to another, class with the topic
being acted upon

„ Computers and the history of art, class in N

„ Cable television and education, class in L

52

Fundamentals of LC Classification 6-52

Instructor Manual Session 6
Principles of Classification and
Assigning Class Numbers

Practice

This practice exercise is intended for group discussion (not a written exercise).

Where would you class:

An annual report on substance abuse control in Wyoming? HV4999.3.W8

A book on adolescent substance abuse? HV4999.Y68

A book on parental substance abuse in the U.S.? HV4999.P37

A work on Zambia’s plan to control illicit drugs? HV5000.Z33

Fundamentals of LC Classification 6-53

Instructor Manual Session 6
Principles of Classification and
Assigning Class Numbers

Summary
„ Remember the general principles
outlined in SCM F 10
„ There are many strategies used to find
a number, using many different tools
„ Keep the focus of the work in mind
when determining an appropriate class
number

54

Fundamentals of LC Classification 6-54

Instructor Manual Session 6
Exercise
Principles of LC Classification: Exercise 1

LC Class # QH540+ (Appendix A)

Principle: Use the most specific number available.

Supply the class number (not complete call number) for the following titles:

1. Nature’s economy : a history of ecological ideas.

2. Dictionary of the environment.

3. Economy of nature : a textbook in basic ecology.

4. Ecological research strategy.

5. Performing ecological risk assessments.

6. Philosophy of ecology : from science to synthesis.

7. Survey methods for ecosystem management.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 1
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
FOR DOUBLE SIDED COPY
Instructor Manual Session 7
Tables

Tables

Session 7

Fundamentals of LC Classification 7-1

Instructor Manual Session 7
Tables

Tables
„ Tables are used extensively in LCC
„ Some tables apply to very limited topics,
some are used throughout the system
„ In this session:
„ Overview of the types of tables
„ Tables of general application
„ Later sessions: tables used in H, N, P
2

This session covers the use of tables in LCC. Often when you assign a class
number, you need to apply a table.
We’ll give an overview of the types of tables found in LCC, but in this session
we’ll focus specifically on the use of tables that apply throughout the
schedules.
Later sessions will include explanation of the tables in schedules H, N, and P,
with lots of practice.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 7-2

Instructor Manual Session 7
Tables

Where are tables found?

Tables that apply: Appear:
To a specific subject or In the text of the
span of numbers schedule:
“Internal tables”
To various subjects in At the end of the
a class or subclass schedule, before the
index:
“External tables”
Throughout the In SCM: Shelflisting
schedules

External tables for classes K and P are published in separate volumes.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 7-3

Instructor Manual Session 7
Tables

Internal table : class T

T TECHNOLOGY (GENERAL)

Industrial directories
11.95 General works
By region or country
United States
12 General works
12.3.A-Z By region or state, A-Z
Under each state:
.x General works
.x2A-Z Local, A-Z

Example of an internal table.

Lots of help with applying such tables coming up.

This is the first time attendees see the notation .x, .x2A-Z, etc.
It is important to mention here the meaning of this shorthand notation used in
LCC.
It will be referred to later in this session as “the call number up to here,” but it
should be mentioned here as an introduction to the later slides. It is an
important concept that will reappear throughout the remainder of the sessions.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 7-4

Instructor Manual Session 7
Tables

External table in Class H (Social Sciences) : H16

Example of an external table.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 7-5

Instructor Manual Session 7
Tables

Tables of general application

„ These tables may be used in any
schedule
„ Tables are not used if the particular
schedule has its own provisions
„ Geographic tables based on Cutter
numbers
„ Biography table
„ Translation table
6

Fundamentals of LC Classification 7-6

Instructor Manual Session 7
Tables

Regions and Countries Table (G 300)

„ Provides Cutter numbers for regions,

countries, historical jurisdictions or
entities, and islands

„ Used when caption in classification

schedule reads: By region or country,
A-Z
7

1st bullet: “regions” here means regions larger than a country or crossing national
boundaries.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 7-7

Instructor Manual Session 7
Tables

Regions and Countries Table (2)

Provides Cutter numbers for countries, historical jurisdictions or entities, and

islands
Used when caption in classification schedule reads: By region or country, A-Z

Fundamentals of LC Classification 7-8

Instructor Manual Session 7
Tables

Regions and Countries Table (3)

„ Not used when Cutter number for place has

already been established in the shelflist or
classification schedule

„ If a conflict exists with adjacent Cutter

numbers, continue the existing Cutter
arrangement, adjusting the new Cutter to
maintain proper alphabetic arrangement

Fundamentals of LC Classification 7-9

Instructor Manual Session 7
Tables

American States and Canadian

Provinces Table: G 302

„ Used when caption in classification

schedule reads: By state, A-W or By
province, A-Z

„ Same restrictions apply to G 302 as to

G 300

10

Second bullet: it is a good idea to point out here that a work on a region within a US
state or a Canadian province will be Cuttered for the state or the province, not for the
region within the state or province. A work on a region larger than a US state or
Canadian province also would not be a candidate for this table (remind attendees that
“regions” in this case means regions larger than a US state or a Canadian province, the
first order political divisions).

Fundamentals of LC Classification 7-10

Instructor Manual Session 7
Tables

American States and Canadian Provinces

Table: G 302

Fundamentals of LC Classification 7-11

Instructor Manual Session 7
Tables

Translation table
.x Original work
.x12 Polyglot (3 or more languages)
.x13 English translation
.x14 French translation
.x15 German translation
.x16 Italian translation
.x17 Russian translation
.x18 Spanish translation
12

The expansion is added to the first Cutter if there is only one Cutter, or to the second
Cutter if there are two Cutters.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 7-12

Instructor Manual Session 7
Tables

Translation table (2)

„ Used only when a uniform title plus
language(s) is provided
„ If two languages are specified in the uniform
title, Cutter for the first language
„ If the language is not listed in the table, select
a number that agrees alphabetically with the
table and the shelflist
„ Former practice was to omit the 1, e.g., .x3
for an English translation

13

ANIMATION: click to bring in each bullet

3rd bullet: For example, a Swedish translation might use the number .x19.

4th bullet: Continue the old practice only when there is a well established pattern in
the shelflist.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 7-13

Instructor Manual Session 7
Tables

Translation table (3)

„ Do not use the translation table:
„ When the main entry is under the heading for a
corporate body or a conference
„ When there are specific provisions for translations
in the schedules
„ When the caption for the class number is “By
language A-Z”
„ Use a Cutter based on the name of the language, e.g.,
E5 for English, G4 for German, etc.
„ In class M, Music
„ The Music Translation Table is used

14

Fundamentals of LC Classification 7-14

Instructor Manual Session 7
Tables

Translation table examples

RC532 .F73813 2004
Freud, Sigmund, 1856-1939.
Studien über Hysteria. English
Studies in hysteria / Sigmund Freud and Josef Breuer ;
translated by Nicola Luckhurst. 2004.
E169.Z8 B42313 1999
Beauvoir, Simone de, 1908-1986.
Amérique au jour le jour. English
America day by day / Simone de Beauvoir ; translated
by Carol Cosman. 1999.
15

1st example: the digits 13 at the end of the Cutter number indicate that this is a
translation into English.

2nd example: When there are two Cutters, the two-digit translation expansion is
appended to the second Cutter.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 7-15

Instructor Manual Session 7
Tables

Translation table examples (2)

F2513 .L65167 2001
Levasseur, Emile, 1828-1911.
Brésil. Portuguese
O Brasil / por E. Levasseur. 2001.
From translation table:
.x16 Italian translation
.x17 Russian translation
„ Cataloger chose the expansion 167 to fit the
Portuguese translation between the numbers for
Italian and Russian
16

Fundamentals of LC Classification 7-16

Instructor Manual Session 7
Tables

Biography table: G 320

„ Used when biography numbers are
specified in the schedule, i.e.,
Biography A-Z
„ Used when the biographee is on the
first Cutter
„ Not used in classes N and P, which
have their own biography tables

17

Fundamentals of LC Classification 7-17

Instructor Manual Session 7
Tables

Biography table: G 320

.x = “the call number up to here”

.x Cutter for the biographee

.xA2 Collected works. By date
.xA25 Selected works. Selections. By date
.xA3 Autobiography, diaries, etc. By date
.xA4 Letters. By date.
.xA5 Speeches, essays, and lectures. By date
Including interviews
.xA6-Z Individual biography and criticism.
By main entry
Including criticism of selected works,
autobiography, quotations, letters,
speeches, interviews, etc.
18

The Biography table is found in both the Shelflisting Manual (G 320) and the
Classification Manual (F 275).
Remind attendees that “.x” = the Cutter you start with “the call number up to
here” or “the call number up to this point” – in this case, the class number plus
the Cutter for the biographee.
ANIMATION: click to bring in text box & arrow
There are provisions in the table for Collected works, selected works,
autobiography, speeches, and for individual biography.
Picture the resulting shelf arrangement – use of this table gathers works by the
biographee in a particular order, followed by works about the person, arranged
by main entry.
Second Cutters A2-A5 are used for the works by the biographee. Individual
biography and criticism must fit within the range of A6-Z.
Note that there is no provision for separate works in the biography table.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 7-18

Instructor Manual Session 7
Tables

Biography table (2)

„ Biography and criticism are limited to the
range .xA6-Z

„ Suggested Cutter numbers for entries

beginning with A are:
Aa-Af A6-699
Ag-Al A7-799
Am-Ar A8-899
As-Az A9-999
19

The suggested range is necessary because you cannot use a Cutter number below A6.
If you had an individual biography with the main entry “Adams” you might use this
guide and class it within the A6-699 range, assuming that fits with your shelflist.

[NOTE: The Translation Table may be used for the .xA6-Z range of the Biography
Table, but not with the .xA2-.xA5 area.]

Fundamentals of LC Classification 7-19

Instructor Manual Session 7
Tables

Classifying biographies: F 275

„ Class biographical works, individual or
collective, under the topic with which the
biographee is most closely identified
„ For persons with multi-faceted careers, but one
facet is emphasized, class with that facet
„ Class in CT (Biography):
„ Works on individuals not identified with a specific
topic
„ Individual biography of a person with multiple
careers, no particular one emphasized

20

Though we are focusing on the use of the Biography table in this session, here is some
context for the choice of classification number for biographies. This is explained in
the Classification manual, F 275.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 7-20

Instructor Manual Session 7
Tables

Collective vs. individual

biography
„ Collective biography:
„ discusses the lives and/or contributions of two or
more persons with a discrete section of the work
devoted to each
„ the biography table is not used for collective
biography
„ Individual biography:
„ discusses the life and/or contributions of an
individual to a given field
„ an autobiography

21

Fundamentals of LC Classification 7-21

Instructor Manual Session 7
Tables

No biography number?
„ If no biography number is provided:
„ Class biographies of individuals closely
associated with a particular topic in the
General works number for the topic

„ Use double Cutter numbers, first for

biographee, second for main entry

22

When the first Cutter represents a topical or geographical aspect and the biographee’s
name is represented by the second Cutter, do not use the biography table. Use instead
a series of Cutter numbers to interfile works by and about the person according to the
main entry.

If biography numbers have not been established under subdisciplines, but there is a
biography number under the broader discipline, use the biography number.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 7-22

Instructor Manual Session 7
Tables

Biography table examples

The next three examples all use this biography number.

Alert attendees that they should have their copy of the biography table (from the
appendix) handy.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 7-23

Instructor Manual Session 7
Tables

Individual biography
GN21.B45 Y68 2005
Young, Virginia Heyer.
Ruth Benedict : beyond relativity, beyond pattern. 2005.
SUBJECTS:
Benedict, Ruth, 1887-1948.
Women anthropologists--United States--Biography.

„ Biography table: .xA6-Z, Individual biography, by

main entry
„ First Cutter for the biographee (Benedict): .B45
„ Second Cutter for main entry (Young): Y68
„ Add date of publication
24

Fundamentals of LC Classification 7-24

Instructor Manual Session 7
Tables

Autobiography
GN21.F6 A3 2004
Fox, Robin, 1934-
Participant observer : memoir of a transatlantic life. 2004.
SUBJECTS: Fox, Robin, 1934-
Anthropologists--England--Biography.
Anthropologists--United States--Biography.

„ Biography table: .xA3 Autobiography, diaries, etc. By date

„ First Cutter for the biographee (Fox): .F6
„ Second Cutter A3 from the biography table: A3
„ Add date of publication
25

This is an example of an autobiography.

The first Cutter is for the biographee.

The second Cutter is for Autobiography from the biography table.
The table further says by date, so the date is added.
When the table indicates “by date”, no further Cuttering is done.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 7-25

Instructor Manual Session 7
Tables

Selected works
GN21.M25 A25 1993
Malinowski, Bronislaw,1884-1942.
The early writings of Bronislaw Malinowski / edited by Robert J.
Thornton and Peter Skalník
SUBJECTS: Malinowski, Bronislaw, 1884-1942.
Ethnology.

„ Biography table: .xA25 Selected works. Selections. By

date
„ First Cutter for the biographee (Malinowski): .M25
„ Second Cutter A25 from the biography table: A25
„ Add date of publication 26

This is an example of the selected works of an author.

The first Cutter is for Malinowski.

The second Cutter is the Cutter for Selected works, selections, by date.
The table indicates by date, so no further Cuttering is done and the date is added.
Note that Collected works and Selected works are provided for in the table, but there
is no provision for individual works.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 7-26

Instructor Manual Session 7
Tables

Exercise 1

Fundamentals of LC Classification 7-27

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
FOR DOUBLE SIDED COPY
Instructor Manual Session 7
Exercise
Tables: Exercise 1

Supply the complete call number for the titles below. Use the LC Cutter table where
necessary.
Cutter for Jane Goodall: .G58

Call Number Record. Main Entry in Bold

Goodall, Jane, 1934- . Through a window : my thirty years with the
chimpanzees of Gombe. 1990.
SUBJECTS:
Goodall, Jane, 1934-
Chimpanzees--Behavior--Tanzania--Gombe Stream National Park.
Zoologists--Biography.

Goodall, Jane, 1934- . Africa in my blood : an autobiography in letters :

the early years. 2000.
SUBJECTS:
Goodall, Jane, 1934- --Correspondence.
Primatologists--Correspondence.

Goodall, Jane, 1934-. Beyond innocence : an autobiography in letters :

the later years. 2001.
SUBJECTS:
Goodall, Jane, 1934- --Correspondence.
Primatologists--Correspondence.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 1
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
FOR DOUBLE SIDED COPY
Instructor Manual Session 7
Exercise
Greene, Meg. Jane Goodall : a biography. 2005.
SUBJECTS:
Goodall, Jane, 1934-
Primatologists--England--Biography.

Koebner, Linda. Tickled by a gorilla, kissed by a whale : career paths of

women who work to save wildlife. 1997.
SUBJECTS:
Animal specialists--New York (State)--New York--Biography--Juvenile
literature.
Women animal specialists--New York (State)--New York--Biography--
Juvenile literature.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 2
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
FOR DOUBLE SIDED COPY
Instructor Manual Session 8
Schedule P:
Language and Literature

Schedule P:
Language and Literature

Session 8

Fundamentals of LC Classification 8-1

Instructor Manual Session 8
Schedule P:
Language and Literature

Overview
„ General: background, features, outline,
and tables
„ Languages
„ Literature
„ General
„ Individual
„ History and criticism
„ Individual authors

Fundamentals of LC Classification 8-2

Instructor Manual Session 8
Schedule P:
Language and Literature

Background
„ Began development in 1909; completed
in 1948
„ Includes 19 subclasses
„ Published in thirteen different schedules
and tables

Much of the development was done by Walter Koenig. Individual schedules

were published on completion; the first to be published was PR, PS, PZ,
English and American Literature, Juvenile Belles Lettres in 1915 and the last
was PG Russian Literature in 1948. (From Lois Mai Chan. A guide to the
Library of Congress Classification. 5th ed. 1999.)

Fundamentals of LC Classification 8-3

Instructor Manual Session 8
Schedule P:
Language and Literature

Features of Schedule P
„ General pattern: language and literature
in the same subclass
„ EXCEPTION: Literatures in major Western
European languages are represented by
subclasses
„ Extensive use of tables
„ Classification of literature: languages
and forms take precedence over topic
4

ANIMATION: click to bring in each bullet

Fundamentals of LC Classification 8-4

Instructor Manual Session 8
Schedule P:
Language and Literature

Outline of Subclasses (1)

P Philology. Linguistics
PA Greek and Latin languages and literatures
PB Modern languages (General). Celtic languages
PC Romance languages
PD Germanic languages (General). Scandinavian
languages
PE English language
PF West Germanic languages
PG Slavic, Baltic, Albanian languages and literature
PH Uralic, Basque languages and literature
PJ Oriental philology and literature (General). Semitic
languages and literature

Fundamentals of LC Classification 8-5

Instructor Manual Session 8
Schedule P:
Language and Literature

Outline of Subclasses (2)

PK Indo-Iranian languages and literatures
PL Languages and literatures of Eastern Asia,
Africa, Oceania
PM Hyperborean, Indian, and artificial languages
PN Literature (General)
PQ French, Italian, Spanish, and Portuguese
literatures
PR English literature
PS American literature
PT Germanic literatures
PZ Fiction and juvenile belles lettres

Although the language and literature subclasses PC-PF do address the literary
aspect of some languages, the literature aspect is not developed in great detail.
For the major European languages, there is no literature development in PC-
PF. The literature schedules for Romance, English, American, and Germanic
literature are reserved for the subclasses PQ-PT.
Note that there is also a subclass for general literature, which we will discuss
in more detail later in the session.

[Note: in case attendees ask, artificial languages include such languages as

Esperanto and Klingon.]

Fundamentals of LC Classification 8-6

Instructor Manual Session 8
Schedule P:
Language and Literature

Print schedules and tables

„ Many schedules in P are published with multiple
subclasses in one volume
„ PB-PH Modern European Languages

„ PR, PS, PZ English and American Literature,

Juvenile Belles Lettres
„ Tables for all schedules were consolidated,
renumbered, and published in a single volume, P-PZ
Tables, in 1982
„ References to tables in older editions of P schedules
may not correspond to current numbering

ANIMATION: click to bring in each bullet

2nd bullet As we have indicated in earlier sessions, the external tables in most
of the other schedules are located at the end of the book. For the P schedules,
on the other hand, the collected external tables are now printed separately.
3rd bullet: current editions of P schedules have the correct numbering of tables
in references. However if your library uses older print schedules, you may
need to convert references to tables to the correct table number. The 1982
edition of P-PZ Tables included a conversion table showing the old table
numbers and the corresponding new table numbers. The conversion table has
not been included in recent editions of P-PZ Tables because the new tables
have been in effect for so long (and catalogers should be using current editions
of the schedules).

Fundamentals of LC Classification 8-7

Instructor Manual Session 8
Schedule P:
Language and Literature

Selected P-PZ Tables for

Languages
P-PZ1 Languages (599 nos.)
P-PZ2 Languages (431 nos.)
P-PZ3 Languages (199 nos.)
P-PZ4 Languages (99 nos.)
P-PZ5 Languages (46 nos.)
…
P-PZ15 Languages (1 no.)
P-PZ16 Languages (Decimal no. or Cutter no.)
8

The P-PZ tables are divided into several broad categories: language, literature,
authors, and works. Here is a selection of tables for languages.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 8-8

Instructor Manual Session 8
Schedule P:
Language and Literature

Typical broad outline of language

tables
Periodicals
(Societies, Serials, Collections)
(Encyclopedias, Study and teaching)
General works
(Language acquisition, History of the language)
Grammar
(Textbooks, Readers, Syntax)
Dictionaries
(same language, two or more languages)
Dialects
9

The language tables arrange material on a particular language generally in the

order shown here, beginning with periodicals, then general works, grammar,
dictionaries, and dialects.
The shorter (later) tables include very few numbers (or few decimal extensions
or Cutters) and so the categories are broad.
The larger (earlier) tables include much more detail, such as specific numbers
or number ranges for the kinds of topics shown in parentheses, as well as many
more. For example, in these more detailed tables, you can sometimes assign a
specific number or Cutter number for topics such as:
-manuals for special classes of students (like .S57 Social workers)
-parts of speech (noun, article, pronoun, verb)
-slang spoken by various groups (students, prisoners, etc.).

Fundamentals of LC Classification 8-9

Instructor Manual Session 8
Schedule P:
Language and Literature

Applying the language tables

Beginning Manx Gaelic : lessons in Manx / [Mona
Douglas]. 2002
SUBJECT: Manx language--Textbooks for foreign
speakers--English.

PB Modern languages. Celtic languages

Manx
1801-1846 Language (Table P-PZ5)

Note the range is 46 numbers

10

If you use ClassWeb, selecting the Enhanced or Hierarchy Browser options

will automatically supply the table-derived numbers for you. You only need to
determine the table number derivations if you use ClassWeb’s Standard
Classification Browser or if you are relying on a printed LC schedule.
To demonstrate how a number is derived from a table, let’s assume you’re
working from the Standard Browser or a printed version of the schedule. In the
schedule, you will find a range of numbers, 1801-1846, assigned to the Manx
language, with the table to be applied following the caption.
ANIMATION: click to bring in box & arrow

Fundamentals of LC Classification 8-10

Instructor Manual Session 8
Schedule P:
Language and Literature

Table P-PZ5
Table for languages (46 nos.)
….
10.5 Script
Grammar
11 General works
12 General special
Textbooks
13.A2 History and criticism
13.A3-Z Textbooks
….
11

As noted earlier, there is a separate publication of external tables for language

and literature. Find the P-PZ5 table, and browse through the list of 46 captions
to find the one that is most appropriate--Textbooks in this case, a form topic.
Note the number and Cutter range assigned to Textbooks.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 8-11

Instructor Manual Session 8
Schedule P:
Language and Literature

Applying the language tables (2)

Base number from schedule: 1800
Add number from table: 13
1813

Cutter for main entry (Douglas) within A3-Z

range (D68)

PB1813.D68 2002
12

ANIMATION: click to bring in box

There are two ways to determine the derived number from the table. You can
add the table number to a base number. The base number in this case is the
initial range number minus one; the last digit of the base number is always 0.
That’s what we did here. Or you can remove the last 2 digits of either number
in the range and replace with the table number 13. In either case you will end
up with PB1813.
The table Cutter range A3-Z is for your main entry. Based on the LC Cutter
table, you get .D68, but you may need to adjust the number to be consistent
with your shelflist.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 8-12

Instructor Manual Session 8
Schedule P:
Language and Literature

Lexicography: Monolingual vs. Bilingual

„ Diccionario de la lengua española. 2005.
PC4625 .D478 2005
„ HIERARCHY: Romance philology and languages – Spanish
– Language – Lexicography – Dictionaries – Spanish only –
1800- -- General

„ The American Heritage pocket Spanish dictionary.

2001.
PC4640 .A46 2001
„ HIERARCHY: Romance philology and languages – Spanish
– Language – Lexicography – Dictionaries – Bilingual –
Spanish-English; English-Spanish

13

For many languages, sections that were once derived from external tables
have been shifted into the schedules. The numbers for Spanish dictionaries
formerly derived from the P-PZ1 tables are now integrated into the PC
schedule. It’s important to remember that in most cases separate numbers are
assigned for dictionaries with definitions in the home language and
dictionaries with definitions in other languages, since you don’t want to assign
the number for a monolingual dictionary to a bilingual dictionary.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 8-13

Instructor Manual Session 8
Schedule P:
Language and Literature

Lexicography vs. Subject

„ Vocabulaire trilingue des véhicules de
transport routier = Trilingual vocabulary of
road transport vehicles = Vocabulario trilingüe
de autotransporte de carga.

„ CALL NUMBER: HE141 .V63 1995

HIERARCHY: Transportation and
communications. Dictionaries. Encyclopedias.
„ SUBJECTS:
Trucking--Dictionaries.
Trucking--Dictionaries--French.
Trucking--Dictionaries--Spanish.
14

Although for the classification of literature the language and form take
precedence over the topic, this is not the case with subject dictionaries. Class a
subject dictionary to the subject, not to the language.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 8-14

Instructor Manual Session 8
Schedule P:
Language and Literature

Exercise 1

Schedule P
Exercise 1:
P-PZ1b (German language)

is at the end of this session

Stop at this point and do the language exercise (P-PZ1b).

Attendees will need to have the LC Cutter Table out.

Go over the instructions with attendees.

It is wise to work through the first title in each exercise as a group, so that
everyone is clear on what they need to do. After that, instructors may wish to
give attendees time to complete the exercises on their own, or to continue
working through as a group.

Answers are given in slides in a separate file. Manuals also have answers
printed in the appendix.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 8-15

Instructor Manual Session 8
Schedule P:
Language and Literature

PN: Literature (General) Plus--

16

PN addresses topics in general literature. However, as you can see from this
ClassWeb screenshot, PN also includes subject divisions that are not general
literature such as Journalism and Performing Arts.
In case you’re wondering why you don’t see a subject division for Poetry, it
can be found in the Literature (General) range under PN1010-1551. The range
for Prose PN3311-3503 includes fiction.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 8-16

Instructor Manual Session 8
Schedule P:
Language and Literature

PN: Examples (1)

„ Radiant textuality : literature after the World
Wide Web / Jerome McGann. New York :
Palgrave, 2004.
SUBJECT: Criticism--Data processing.

„ CALL NUMBER: PN98.E4 M39 2004

HIERARCHY: Literature (General) – Criticism –
Special Topics. By subject A-Z – Electronic Data
Processing
17

An example of general literature criticism.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 8-17

Instructor Manual Session 8
Schedule P:
Language and Literature

PN: Examples (2)

„ Hangin' with Lindsay Lohan / by Michael-
Anne Johns. New York, Scholastic, c2004.
ALTERNATE TITLE: Hanging with Lindsay Lohan

„ CALL NUMBER: PN2287.L623 J64 2004

HIERARCHY: Drama – Dramatic representation.
The theater – Special regions and countries –
America – North America – United States –
Biography – Individual, A-Z

18

The classification number for movie star biographies is not particularly

intuitive. You probably wouldn’t expect to find movie stars under General
Literature, and even within the PN subclass, movie stars are not classed under
PN1560-1590 for Performing arts and Show business, but rather in the Drama
subdivision range PN1600-3307.2.
(This example begs the question whether any user who would include the “g”
in the title would be searching for this book!)

Fundamentals of LC Classification 8-18

Instructor Manual Session 8
Schedule P:
Language and Literature

Literature: Subarrangement
„ Under each individual literature:
„ History and criticism
„ Collections or anthologies of more than
one author
„ Individual authors
„ Non-national (local) literature

19

Now we’ll move on to discuss the literature of individual languages.

Remember that general topics in literature are addressed by subclass PN. For
the literature of individual languages, we will consider subarrangement in the
schedules, how to assign numbers for literary authors, and how to use the
literature tables.

2nd sub-bullet: Collections consist of two or more independent literary works

by different authors not specifically written for the publication in hand.

4th sub-bullet: Non-national (local) literature – typically includes, for

example, Spanish literature outside of Spain, including Spanish colonies,
countries other than Spain where Spanish is the national language, and
Spanish-language literature written in countries where Spanish is not the
national language. We’ll see an example later on.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 8-19

Instructor Manual Session 8
Schedule P:
Language and Literature

Selected P-PZ Tables for Literature

P-PZ20 Literature (194 nos.)
P-PZ25 Literature (1 no.)
P-PZ28 Anonymous works (1 no.)
P-PZ31 Authors (49 nos.)
P-PZ32 Authors (19 nos.)
P-PZ34 Separate works (5 nos.)
P-PZ39 Authors (1 no.)
P-PZ40 Authors (Cutter no.)
P-PZ43 Separate works (Successive Cutter nos.)

20

The tables for literature are another major category. Here are some examples.
Note that different tables are applied for the literature of a language, for
individual authors in a given language, and individual works in a given
language.
As is the case with the language tables, the ClassWeb Enhanced and Hierarchy
browsers will provide the table derived numbers in the schedules if the tables
are a range of numbers. If the Standard Browser or the LC printed schedules
are used, the number must be constructed from the appropriate table.
However, if a table is based on a Cutter number, as is the case with P-PZ40,
the number is not supplied in the ClassWeb Enhanced/Hierarchy browsers.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 8-20

Instructor Manual Session 8
Schedule P:
Language and Literature

Example 1:
History and criticism
„ The Cambridge history of Spanish literature.

SUBJECT: Spanish literature--History and criticism.

PQ6001-8929 Spanish literature

PQ6001-6168 Literary history and criticism
PQ6031-6168 History of Spanish literature
PQ6032-6036 1801-
PQ6033 English

21

This is an example of History and criticism of a national literature. A table is

not used in this instance.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 8-21

Instructor Manual Session 8
Schedule P:
Language and Literature

Example 2: History and criticism

Historia de la literatura mexicana : desde sus
orígines hasta nuestros días. 1996-2002

SUBJECT: Mexican literature--History and criticism

PQ7020-8929 Spanish literature outside of Spain

PQ7081-7087 Spanish America
PQ7100-7298.436 Mexico (Table P-PZ20 modified)

22

In this example, a table is used.

Translation of title: History of Mexican literature : from its origins to our days.

Note the word “modified” after the table reference – more on that in a minute.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 8-22

Instructor Manual Session 8
Schedule P:
Language and Literature

Table P-PZ20
Table for literature (194 nos.)
History
10 Early works
Modern treatises
11 General works
12 Textbooks

23

We have a modern treatise on the history of Mexican literature, so 11 is the

number to apply from this table.
However, remember that the table reference in the schedule included the word
“modified”. This means that the actual numbers used in the range for Mexican
literature may be slightly different than they would be if you simply applied
the numbers from the table. The schedule itself will specify any changes.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 8-23

Instructor Manual Session 8
Schedule P:
Language and Literature

Table P-PZ20 modified

Base number from schedule: 7100
Add number from table: 11
7111

Cutter for (title) main entry (Historia)

PQ7111.H57 1996
24

There are two ways to determine the derived number from the table. You can
add the table number to a base number. The base number in this case is the
initial range number minus one; the last digit of the base number is always 0.
That’s what we did here. Or you can remove the last 2 digits of either number
in the range and replace with the table number 11. In either case you will end
up with PQ7111.
There is no specified Cutter range for the main entry, so you can construct
your number from the LC Cutter table and adjust the number to be consistent
with your shelflist.
ANIMATION: click to bring in box

Fundamentals of LC Classification 8-24

Instructor Manual Session 8
Schedule P:
Language and Literature

Example: Collections
„ The best winners of the Booker Prize. 1991.
PR1105 .B47 1991
„ Hierarchy: English literature--Collections of
English literature--General collections--Collections
published after 1801

„ The Columbia anthology of American poetry.

1995.
PS584 .C66 1995
„ HIERARCHY: American literature--Collections of
American literature--Poetry--Collections published
1961-
25

Fundamentals of LC Classification 8-25

Instructor Manual Session 8
Schedule P:
Language and Literature

Individual authors
„ Works by a literary author and about that
author are arranged in a single group
„ Individual authors are grouped by period
under each national literature
„ Example: American literature
PS700-893 Colonial period
PS991-3390 19th century
PS3500-3549 1900-1960
PS3550-3576 1961-2000
PS3600-3626 2001-
26

Periods reflect the time period during which the author was productive – not
when he/she was born.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 8-26

Instructor Manual Session 8
Schedule P:
Language and Literature

Literary author numbers (F 632)

„ Normally all works by & about an author
classed in one number (or range)
„ Determined by language in which author writes and
author’s nationality (and period if applicable)
„ Authors who write in a language most
commonly associated with a different country
may be classed in the non-national area for that
literature
„ Arundhati Roy, author from India writing in English,
classed in PR9499.3 (English literature outside of
Great Britain)
27

ANIMATION: click to bring in each sub-bullet

1st bullet: Translations and critical studies of the author’s works are classed
with works by the author.
Simplest situation for determining location: author writes in one language only
and is a citizen of the country associated with that language (author writes in
French and is a French citizen). Authors living in the country most commonly
associated with a particular language are classed with the general literature
area for that language. But what about an author who writes in a language not
commonly associated with the country in which she lives?
2nd bullet: the schedule for English literature, for example, has PR9080-9680
for English literature outside of Great Britain. Many literatures, however,
have no geographic development, may be only partially expanded (such as
literature of former colonies), or may have special locations for collections but
not individual authors.
Literature of the United States is the exception to the standard arrangement of
keeping the literature of a particular language together in the same subclass.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 8-27

Instructor Manual Session 8
Schedule P:
Language and Literature

Literary author numbers (F 632)

„ Many authors write in more than one language or are
associated with more than one country
„ Authors who write in more than one language: a
number is established under the literature of each
language
„ Vladimir Nabokov:

„ PG3476.N3 Russian language works

„ PS3527.A15 English language works

„ PG3476.N3 General criticism and biography

28

2nd bullet: translations and critical studies of individual works are classed with
the original works. Collective criticism of several works is classed with the
language of the group of works studied. General criticism and biography of the
author is classed in the one number that best represents the total literary output
of the author.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 8-28

Instructor Manual Session 8
Schedule P:
Language and Literature

Literary author numbers (F 632)

„ Authors associated with more than one
country
„ One number only: class with the country of
citizenship
„ Citizen of several countries? – prefer country of
author’s most productive years, where scholars
associate the author
„ Once a decision is made, only changed if clearly
in error
„ Scarce information? Use what is available

29

1st bullet: from SCM F 632: Class a literary author with the country of
citizenship, if the literature of his or her language provides for arrangement of
authors by country. If the author was a citizen of several countries, prefer the
country in which the author's most productive years were spent or under the
country usually associated with the author by scholars in the field. If no
preference can be determined, make an arbitrary selection of a country….Note:
Once a decision has been made to class an author with a particular country,
this number will usually continue to be used. Do not change the number unless
the original choice was clearly in error.
2nd bullet: For living authors about whom little information is known, select a
country based on available information (i.e. birthplace, parentage, residences,
place of publication of the work(s) being cataloged).

Fundamentals of LC Classification 8-29

Instructor Manual Session 8
Schedule P:
Language and Literature

Individual authors (Notation)

„ Most authors receive one number or a Cutter
number
„ Major authors have been assigned very large
ranges
„ William Shakespeare, PR2750-3112
„ Other prolific authors may have smaller
ranges
„ Mark Twain, PS1300-1348
„ Oscar Wilde, PR5810-5828
„ Louisa May Alcott, PS1015-1018
30

We’ll discuss how to deal with these ranges of numbers, but first more
information on how class numbers for literary authors are determined.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 8-30

Instructor Manual Session 8
Schedule P:
Language and Literature

20th and 21st century authors

„ Assigned a Cutter number each, regardless
of amount of material published
PS3511.A86 William Faulkner
PS3551.N464 Maya Angelou
„ Cutter number generally based on the second
letter of author’s last name
„ Class number based on the first letter of
author’s last name

31

Fundamentals of LC Classification 8-31

Instructor Manual Session 8
Schedule P:
Language and Literature

Example: Where is William

Faulkner (PS3511.A86)?

32

In this example, PS3511 = early 20th century American author beginning with
“F”
Note that Faulkner is not listed here (PR3511.A86)
Take a look at the captions for the authors listed – do you notice anything?
Most of the captions are “see” references to another number. (explanation of
current policy on next slide)

Fundamentals of LC Classification 8-32

Instructor Manual Session 8
Schedule P:
Language and Literature

Printing literary author numbers

„ Policy for printing literary author numbers in
the P schedules:
„ Author’s name changes significantly
„ Authors born before 1875
„ Authors with pseudonyms
„ Anonymous works published before 1899
„ How to find an author number
„ Check the author’s authority record
„ Check a library catalog (LC’s, your own)
33

When the Cutter is based on an author’s last name, the schedules do not
establish each author Cutter. Some author numbers are listed, primarily as
references to different numbers, or in some rare cases because they have
been expanded with a table application. Here are listed the conditions for
printing a literary author number in the schedules.
Name change may be due to a change in marital status, etc., or to a change in
cataloging rules.
William Faulkner is not listed under PS3511 because his number does not
require a reference or a table expansion.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 8-33

Instructor Manual Session 8
Schedule P:
Language and Literature

Finding Faulkner’s number fast

34

So, where in the world is William Faulkner’s number?

For most well-known twentieth-century authors, LC has recorded the
established author number in field 053 of the author’s name authority record.
Searching the Library of Congress Authorities database is free. If you have
access to OCLC, you can also search for Faulkner’s name authority record
there.
If a 053 field has not been added to the authority record, you can sometimes
determine the established number by finding LC-cataloged records for the
author’s works and examining the 050 field.
Whether you use the same Cutter used by LC is local policy. Some libraries
record the number used locally in their authority records. If you catalog for
PCC, your 050 field should use the number established by LC.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 8-34

Instructor Manual Session 8
Schedule P:
Language and Literature

Cutter to first or second letter?

„ Not all schedules base the Cutter
number for individual authors on the
second letter of the author’s last name!
„ Vladimir Nabokov:

„ PG3476.N3 Russian language

works
„ PS3527.A15 English language

works
35

Remember the Vladimir Nabokov example from the earlier discussion on

where to classify authors who write in more than one language? Did you
notice that his individual number for Russian literature uses a Cutter based on
the first letter of his last name, while his individual number for American
literature Cutters to the second letter?
If most of your cataloging is in Anglo-American literature, you need to
remember that not all literature schedules follow the same notation practice for
individual authors when you classify individual authors.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 8-35

Instructor Manual Session 8
Schedule P:
Language and Literature

Using tables for literary

authors
„ Once you have located a literary author in the
schedules, determine which table to use
„ For authors listed in the schedules, specific
table references are given
„ PS815-819 Paine, Thomas (Table P-PZ35)
„ For modern authors with one Cutter number,
use Table P-PZ40 unless instructed
otherwise

36

ANIMATION: click to bring in each bullet

If you use ClassWeb, keep in mind that ClassWeb will do table calculations
for numbers, but not for Cutter numbers. For authors with one Cutter number,
you will have to determine the Cutter without software support.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 8-36

Instructor Manual Session 8
Schedule P:
Language and Literature

Literary author: individual work

At terror street and agony way : [poems] /
Charles Bukowski.

The author was born in Germany but

grew up and published in the U.S.;
published after 1961.

37

Let’s start by considering one of the most common types of literary authors
you will encounter, a modern author with a single Cutter number.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 8-37

Instructor Manual Session 8
Schedule P:
Language and Literature

Classification

38

Four elements determine Bukowski’s individual author class number: he is a

literary author, he is a U.S. literary author, his publications were issued during
the 1961-2000 period, and his last name begins with B.
The schedule indicates that the first Cutter number will be based on the
author’s last name, but beginning, in this case, with the second letter of that
name. The exact number will be determined by examining the shelflist to
make sure that the number assigned to Bukowski is consistent with the
alphabetical order of author Cutters previously assigned.
The scope note instructs the cataloger to use the P-PZ40 table to complete the
call number.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 8-38

Instructor Manual Session 8
Schedule P:
Language and Literature

Shelflisting the author Cutter

PS3552.U399 Bukoski, Anthony

PS3552.U4 Bukowski, Charles

PS3552.U52 Bulgin, Bess

39

The Cutter for the author must first be determined to fit within the alphabetical
sequence of previously established author Cutters.
You can skip this step if other literary works by Bukowski are already
represented in your shelflist; in that case, you would just assign the number
that has been “established” for Bukowski.
If you are cataloging for PCC, the author number in the 050 of your record
must match the author number in the 053 of the national authority record for
Charles Bukowski.
Once the author Cutter number has been determined, the cataloger needs to
consult the P-PZ40 table to complete the call number.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 8-39

Instructor Manual Session 8
Schedule P:
Language and Literature

P-PZ40

40

Here is a compressed view of the P-PZ40 table, indicating the main categories.
Note that the range A199-A59 is applied to collected or selected works in
translation and not to translations of individual works.
The applicable caption in this case is Separate works. By title. This means that
the cataloger needs to construct a Cutter number for the title of the work
within the range A61-Z458.
Before we apply the number range to the separate work At terror street and
agony way, let’s clarify what the table means by Collected works, Selected
works, and Separate works.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 8-40

Instructor Manual Session 8
Schedule P:
Language and Literature

P-PZ40: Works
„ P-PZ40 revised in 2005
„ Collected works/Selections: apply for
collections of works that were previously
published in book form or never published in
the author’s lifetime
„ Collected works is now used for either
complete collected works or collected works
in a particular genre
„ Separate works: use also for collections
published in book form while the author is still
living
41

More detail is provided in SCM: Classification, F 633. This instruction sheet is

being revised, so use it with care.
One area catalogers may find confusing is the distinction between collections
as collected works vs. collections as separate works.
An author like Charles Bukowski can publish 20 poems in various magazines
and journals. When these poems are collected and printed in book form for the
first time, the collection is Cuttered as a separate work, i.e., to the title of the
collection, At terror street…
If some or all of the poems first published in the collection At terror street…
are then republished in a collection with some other poems published by
Bukowski in earlier books, the collection is Cuttered as a selection: A6. (A
number of posthumous collections of Bukowski’s poems have been Cuttered as
separate works by LC; an apparent oversight.)
If all of Bukowski’s published poems are republished as a collection, then the
collected works section of the P-PZ40 table applies. In that case, a second
Cutter is not assigned, only a date. <the A13 in the hierarchical compressed
display is obsolete; trainees should refer to the P-PZ40 table in the appendix>

Fundamentals of LC Classification 8-41

Instructor Manual Session 8
Schedule P:
Language and Literature

Shelflisting the book number

PS3552.U4 A67 Another academy /
[Charles Bukowski].
PS3552.U4 A9 1968 At terror street and
agony way : [poems] / Charles
Bukowski.
PS3552.U4 B7 1983 Bring me your love /
Charles Bukowski …

42

Just as the author Cutter must fit into the sequence of author Cutters under
PS3552, so the Cutter for the work must fit into the sequence under the
number for Bukowski, PS3552.U4. Bukowski was fairly prolific, and he
published more than one title beginning with A.
Keep in mind that the P-PZ40 table restricts separate works to the range of
numbers between A61-Z458. That’s why the previous title could not be
assigned A5.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 8-42

Instructor Manual Session 8
Schedule P:
Language and Literature

Applying P-PZ40: individual work

PS American literature
3552 Individual authors who published
between 1961-2000, last name B
.U4 Author Cutter constructed
from 2nd letter of last name
A9 Book number [for “At terror
street”] from LC Cutter table, but
must be within the range .A61-Z458
1968 Date of publication
43

To summarize, here is the completed call number.

Note that book numbers for the individual works of literary authors cutter to
the title of the work and not to the main entry. The book number for most call
numbers, on the other hand, generally maps to the main entry.
Why does the range for individual works have an upper limit at Z458? We’ll
see in the next slide, where we will open up the P-PZ40 table for Biography
and Criticism.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 8-43

Instructor Manual Session 8
Schedule P:
Language and Literature

P-PZ40: biography and criticism

44

The range for the second Cutter from Z4581 through Z999 has been reserved
for several categories of biography and criticism.
Note that the captions for Dictionaries, Autobiography, and Letters have the
additional instruction “By date.” This means that different works falling into
any of these categories are differentiated by date and not by adding digits to
the Cutter. This represents a fairly recent change in practice, and you may see
LC records for autobiography and letters where extra digits have been added to
the form Cutter.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 8-44

Instructor Manual Session 8
Schedule P:
Language and Literature

P-PZ40: Correspondence
Beerspit night and cursing : the correspondence
of Charles Bukowski and Sheri Martinelli,
1960-1967 / edited by Steven Moore. 2001.

PS3552.U4 Z48 2001

SUBJECTS (selected):
Bukowski, Charles--Correspondence.
Authors, American--20th century--Correspondence.
Martinelli, Sheri--Correspondence.

45

Here is an example of Bukowski’s correspondence. We will break it down in

the following slide.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 8-45

Instructor Manual Session 8
Schedule P:
Language and Literature

Applying P-PZ40:
Correspondence
PS American literature
3552 Individual authors, last name B
.U4 Author Cutter constructed
from 2nd letter of last name
Z48 Z48 for correspondence (from
table)
2000 Date of publication
46

Different correspondence collections should be differentiated by date and (if

necessary) work letter, not by adding additional digits to Z48. (The LC
cataloging for this record added a 9 to Z48)
Until recently the P-PZ40 table had an additional range .xZ481-xZ499 for
letters to and from particular individuals, arranged alphabetically. The table
was significantly abridged in 2005, and this is no longer current practice.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 8-46

Instructor Manual Session 8
Schedule P:
Language and Literature

P-PZ40: Biography
Drinking with Bukowski : recollections of the
poet laureate of Skid Row / edited by Daniel
Weizmann. 2000.

PS3552.U4 Z627 2000

SUBJECTS (selected):
Bukowski, Charles.
Bukowski, Charles--Friends and associates.
Authors, American--20th century--Biography.
47

Although the numbers for forms such as autobiography are invariant, this is
not the case with biography and criticism. If you check back to your P-PZ40
table, you see that there is a range Z5-Z999. How did the cataloger arrive at
Z627 for this book?

Fundamentals of LC Classification 8-47

Instructor Manual Session 8
Schedule P:
Language and Literature

Shelflisting the book number:

biography
050 Author Title/Imprint
PS3552.U4 Christy, Buk book : musings on
Z62 1997 Jim, 1945- Charles Bukowski… Toronto
: ECW Press, 1997.
PS3552.U4 Drinking with Bukowski …
Z627 2000 New York : Thunder’s Mouth
Press, c2000.
PS3552.U4 Duval, Buk et les Beats … Paris :
Z63 1998 Jean- Editions Michalon, c1998.
Francois
48

The cataloger needs to slide the book number between two previously
cataloged titles.
Note that with biography/criticism, the book number is mapped to the main
entry rather than to the title of the book, unless the title is the main entry.
There is no published table for mapping numbers in the range Z5-Z999 to
letters in the alphabet; the P-PZ40 table in your handouts includes LC’s in-
house table for mapping this range.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 8-48

Instructor Manual Session 8
Schedule P:
Language and Literature

Charles Dickens: 49 numbers

While 20th and 21st century authors are generally assigned a single Cutter,
authors from the 19th century and earlier are sometimes assigned an extensive
range of numbers.
As you recall from the brief history of LCC, most of the schedules were
conceived in the early 20th century. The schedule for PR was initially
published in 1915, when the great authors of the 19th century still loomed
large, and literary warrant required a wide range of numbers to organize the
publications by and about the most popular 19th century authors.
Over the past 100 years, some of these authors may have declined significantly
in popularity and fame, but this is probably not the case with Charles Dickens.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 8-49

Instructor Manual Session 8
Schedule P:
Language and Literature

Charles Dickens: individual works

Although the ClassWeb view on the previous slide did not show this, the
Charles Dickens number range as a whole is subarranged by Table P-PZ31
modified, as indicated by this view from the Standard ClassWeb browser.
Individual works by Dickens are assigned whole numbers and are further
subarranged by Table P-PZ41.

Here we see that the work David Copperfield has the class number PR4558.
ANIMATION: click to bring in red circle & arrow

Fundamentals of LC Classification 8-50

Instructor Manual Session 8
Schedule P:
Language and Literature

Charles Dickens: individual work, P-PZ41

Fundamentals of LC Classification 8-51

Instructor Manual Session 8
Schedule P:
Language and Literature

Charles Dickens: Applying

P-PZ41
A Routledge literary sourcebook on
Charles Dickens's David Copperfield /
edited by Richard J. Dunn. New York :
Routledge, 2004.
PR4558 David Copperfield
.R68 P-PZ41. Criticism .A7-Z [Cutter
to Routledge]
2004 Date of publication
52

The Cutter to the main entry would need to be adjusted, if necessary, to fit the
shelflist.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 8-52

Instructor Manual Session 8
Schedule P:
Language and Literature

Charles Dickens: general

criticism and interpretation
Charles Dickens' quarrel with America /
Sidney P. Moss. Troy, N.Y. : Whitston
Pub. Co., 1984.

SUBJECTS (selected):
Dickens, Charles, 1812-1870--Knowledge--
America.
Dickens, Charles, 1812-1870--Travel--United
States.
53

For Charles Dickens, constructing a call number for criticism of an individual

work is relatively simple, since you are using the table P-PZ41. The
construction is more complex when the criticism is more general.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 8-53

Instructor Manual Session 8
Schedule P:
Language and Literature

Charles Dickens: Applying P-PZ31

For criticism in general, you will need to apply table P-PZ31, since Dickens is
a 49 number author. This is a very large table which is displayed here in
compressed form. If you use the ClassWeb Enhanced or Hierarchy browser,
the entire range of numbers derived from the table will be supplied in the
schedule. If you use the Standard browser, the printed schedule, or
SuperLCCs, you will have to derive the number from the table.
For criticism and interpretation, there is a range of numbers (37.3-42)
ANIMATION: click to bring in red circle & arrow

Fundamentals of LC Classification 8-54

Instructor Manual Session 8
Schedule P:
Language and Literature

Charles Dickens: Applying P-PZ31:

Special subjects

Although it might be tempting to classify the book as general criticism (38)

and stop there, note that the PZ31 table has many specific options, in particular
a list of topics under Treatment and knowledge of special subjects. The caption
“America” seems to be the most appropriate.
How to translate this into a number? Note that the table gives you 42.A54.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 8-55

Instructor Manual Session 8
Schedule P:
Language and Literature

Charles Dickens: Applying P-

PZ31 42.A54
PR4550 Base number
+ 42 Treatment and knowledge of
special subjects
PR4592
.A54 America [Cutter from table]
M67 Moss (Main entry)
1984 Date of publication
56

To apply the table, add the number to the base class number, and then use the
table Cutter as the topical (first Cutter). Complete the call number by
constructing a second Cutter for the main entry and adding the publication
date.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 8-56

Instructor Manual Session 8
Schedule P:
Language and Literature

Selected literary authors sorted

by quantity of numbers assigned
Quantity Author Class no. range
363 William Shakespeare PR2750-3112
49 Edward Bulwer-Lytton PR4900-4948
19 George William Curtis PS1480-1498
9 Jane Austen PR4030-4038
9 Thomas Bailey Aldrich PS1020-1028
1 Emily Dickinson PS1541
1 Cutter Marcel Proust PR2631.R63
57

We’ve analyzed a literary author represented by a single Cutter, and another

represented by 49 numbers. The quantity of numbers assigned to authors varies
across the schedules. Again, because the schedules were conceived in the early
20th century, the quantity may not reflect early 21st century assessments, as you
can probably infer from this table.
If Bulwer-Lytton is still remembered, it is probably for the novel The last days
of Pompeii, and perhaps for the opening line from another work: “It was a
dark and stormy night.”*
The Library of Congress has cataloged over a hundred titles by George
William Curtis, but only about 20 books about him. In contrast, LC has
cataloged over 200 books about Emily Dickinson, who has been assigned a
single number. And LC has cataloged over 700 books about Marcel Proust,
who, like Charles Bukowski, has been assigned a single Cutter number. (LC
has cataloged around 30 books about Bukowski, about 10 more than Thomas
Bailey Aldrich)
*Per the Yale book of quotations, c2006, the work is: Paul Clifford (1830).

Fundamentals of LC Classification 8-57

Instructor Manual Session 8
Schedule P:
Language and Literature

Different numbers, different

tables
Jane Austen. PR4030-4038 (9 numbers)
Subarranged by Table P-PZ33
Emily Dickinson. PS1541 (1 number)
Subarranged by Table P-PZ39
William Shakespeare. PR2750-3112 (363 no.)
No comprehensive table, but tables are applied to
individual numbers and Cutter ranges
PR2823 Macbeth. Subarr. by Table PR4

58

As we have seen with the two Charles’s, Dickens and Bukowski, the schedules
rely on different tables to subarrange the class numbers, or in the case of
Bukowski, the Cutter number. Dickens, you recall, was subarranged by Table
P-PZ31, while Bukowski was subarranged by Table P-PZ40.
Emily Dickinson’s single number is subarranged by table P-PZ39; Jane
Austen’s numbers are subarranged by table P-PZ33. Shakespeare’s class
number range as a whole is not assigned by table, but tables are applied to
individual numbers.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 8-58

Instructor Manual Session 8
Schedule P:
Language and Literature

General reminders
„ Language and literature are not always together
„ PN includes a number of popular non-literary topics
(journalism, show business)
„ Most 20/21st century literary authors
„ Are not in the published schedules

„ Are assigned a single Cutter, often to the second

letter of the last name
„ Generally use the P-PZ40 table

„ The range of numbers for pre-20th century literary

authors is unpredictable!

59

Fundamentals of LC Classification 8-59

Instructor Manual Session 8
Schedule P:
Language and Literature

Exercise

(Literature)

Do the P-PZ40 exercise (V. S. Pritchett).

Appendix D includes two additional exercises for working with the literary
author tables. Given time constraints, it is generally not feasible to do these as
part of a two-day workshop. Attendees can complete them on their own;
answers with explanations are included in the appendix. Encourage attendees
to email you later with any questions about these exercises.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 8-60

Instructor Manual Session 8
Exercises
Schedule P: Exercise 1, P-PZ1b (German language)

Works on the German language are classed in the span PF3073-PF3693; Table P-PZ1b
modified is applied; the number or span of numbers chosen from the table is added to the
base number PF3000. Here is the outline of Table P-PZ1b:

Table P-PZ1b (Outline)

Here is an expansion of the span P-PZ1b 75-88, History of the language, from Table P-
PZ1b:

Table P-PZ1b History of the language (75-88)

Fundamentals of LC Classification 1
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
FOR DOUBLE SIDED COPY
Instructor Manual Session 8
Exercises
Here is an expansion of the span P-PZ1b 498-499, Translating, from Table P-PZ1b:

Table P-PZ1b Translating (498-499)

Here is an expansion of the span P-PZ1b 108-123 from Table P-PZ1b. This span is
contained within the span P-PZ1b 99-400, Grammar:

Table P-PZ1b (108-123)

Construct the call number (base number is PF3000). Use the LC Cutter table for the book
number; assume no conflict. The trainer will walk you through the first exercise.

Call Number Main Entry Title Imprint

Hervey, Thinking German translation : a New York :
Sándor G. J. course in translation method, Routledge,
German to English. c2005.
The German language and the real Oxford :
world : sociolinguistic, cultural, Clarendon
and pragmatic perspectives on Press, 1995.
contemporary German / edited by
Patrick Stevenson.
SUBJECT: German language--
20th century.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 2
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
FOR DOUBLE SIDED COPY
Instructor Manual Session 8
Exercises
Coggle, Improve your German. Chicago, Ill. :
Paul. SERIES: Teach yourself books McGraw-
(Lincolnwood, Ill.) Hill, 2004
Easy German phrase book : over New York :
740 basic phrases for everyday Dover
use. Publications,
c1994.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 3
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
FOR DOUBLE SIDED COPY
Instructor Manual Session 8
Exercises
Schedule P : Exercise 2, P-PZ40 Table (V. S. Pritchett)

V. S. Pritchett's literary author number is PR6031.R7, subarranged by table P-PZ40. Use

the table to complete the call numbers. Numbers in bold/underlined are already in the
shelflist. Otherwise, assume no conflict. Use the LC Cutter table where applicable. In the
Title column, uniform titles are in brackets.

Call Number Main Entry Title Imprint

PR6031.R7 Pritchett, V. S. [Essays] Complete New York :
(Victor Sawdon), collected essays. Random
1900-1997.
House, 1991.
PR6031.R7 Pritchett, V. S. [Short stories] New York :
(Victor Sawdon), Complete collected Vintage Books,
1900-1997.
stories. 1992.
PR6031.R7 Pritchett, V. S. The other side of a London :
(Victor Sawdon), frontier : a V.S. Robin Clark,
1900-1997.
Pritchett reader. 1984.
PR6031.R7 Pritchett, V. S. A man of letters : New York :
(Victor Sawdon), selected essays. Random
1900-1997.
House, c1985.
PR6031.R7 Pritchett, V. S. [Short stories. New York :
(Victor Sawdon), Selections] Essential Modern
1900-1997.
stories. Library, 1985.
PR6031.R7 Pritchett, V. S. Blind love, and other London :
(Victor Sawdon), stories. Chatto &
1900-1997.
Windus, 1969.
PR6031.R7 Pritchett, V. S. A cab at the door : a New York :
(Victor Sawdon), memoir. Random
1900-1997.
House, 1968.
PR6031.R7 Z59 1987 Baldwin, Dean V.S. Pritchett. Boston, Mass. :
R., 1942- Twayne
Publishers,
1987.
PR6031.R7 Bloom, The art of revision in New York :
Jonathan, 1960- the short stories of Palgrave
V.S. Pritchett and Macmillan,
William Trevor. 2006.
PR6031.R7 Stinson, John J. V.S. Pritchett : a New York :
study of the short Twayne
fiction. Publishers,
c1992.
PR6031.R7 Z897 2004 Treglown, V.S. Pritchett : a New York :
Jeremy. working life. Random
House, 2004.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 4
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
FOR DOUBLE SIDED COPY
Instructor Manual Session 9
Special Types of Material

Special Types of Material

Session 9

Fundamentals of LC Classification 9-1

Instructor Manual Session 9
Special Types of Material

Outline: special types

• Editions • Juvenile materials
• Work letters • Congresses
• Corporate main • Serials
entry
• Volume numbers

We’ve covered general principles, including tables, along with notation. They
say the devil is in the details, however, and there are certain details that can
occur across all of the schedules that sometimes succeed in bedeviling
catalogers. We’ve gathered them in this session all for you.
We’ll first consider some elements in call numbers that are used to relate
works (first column) on the shelf; then we’ll consider certain recurrent
publication categories—juvenile materials, and congresses. Finally, we’ll
consider the use of call numbers when the mode of issuance is not
monographic, i.e., serials.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 9-2

Instructor Manual Session 9
Special Types of Material

Editions (G 145)
• Unless otherwise indicated in the schedules,
generally keep editions together if the same
class number is appropriate
• To keep editions together under the same
class number, assign the same book number
and differentiate by date and (if necessary) by
work letter
• Do not keep editions together if a different
class number is appropriate
3

Intro: The standard procedures for processing editions are found in

SCM:Shelflisting (G 145).
3rd bullet: Examples where editions are not kept together under the same class
number in the schedules can often be found under sacred works, where a
separate number may be assigned to each distinct edition.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 9-3

Instructor Manual Session 9
Special Types of Material

Editions: same author & title (G 145)

• If a subsequent edition has the same author,
title, & class number, assign the same Cutter
number as the previous editions. A date is
used to distinguish between the earlier and
later editions.
• PN1995 .K23 1970
Going steady / Pauline Kael. -- 1st ed. -- Boston : Little,
Brown, 1970.

• PN1995 .K23 1994

Going steady : film writing, 1968-1969 / Pauline Kael. --
New York : M. Boyars, 1994.
4

Here we have an example of the most common situation, where the later
edition has the same author and title, and the class number has not become
obsolete

Fundamentals of LC Classification 9-4

Instructor Manual Session 9
Special Types of Material

Editions: variation in title (G 145)

• If the title changes on the subsequent edition, but the
author and class number are the same, assign the
same Cutter number as the previous edition
• PE1408 .F478
The way to write / by Rudolf Flesch. -- New York : Harper, 1947.
• PE1408 .F478 1949
A new guide to better writing / by Rudolf Flesch & A.H. Lass. --
New York : Harper & Row, 1949.
• PE1408 .F478 1996
The classic guide to better writing / by Rudolf Flesch and A.H.
Lass. -- 50th anniversary ed. -- New York : HarperPerennial,
c1996.
Rev. ed. of: A new guide to better writing, which was originally
published as The way to write.

ANIMATION: click to bring in each bullet

In this example, although Rudolf Flesch was the main entry in each of these
editions, you can see that the title changed significantly from the 1947 edition
to the “50th anniversary ed.” in 1996. Of course, it is the cataloger’s
responsibility to decide whether these different titles represent different
expressions of the same work.

[Hierarchy: English philology and language—Modern English—Language—

Rhetoric. Style. Composition—Treatises. Compends. Textbooks—Later (than
1860)—English]

Fundamentals of LC Classification 9-5

Instructor Manual Session 9
Special Types of Material

Editions: changes in author and/or

title (G 145)
• If the authorship and/or title of a work
changes from one edition to another,
but the classification number remains
the same, maintain the same book
number

What if not just the title changes, but the author as well? If you judge that the
underlying work is the same, you would normally assign the same book
number as long as there is no need to change the classification.

[NOTE: LC makes an exception for authorship changes if the earlier edition

was cataloged using preAACR2 rules, but this is now probably too rare to be
of much concern.]

Fundamentals of LC Classification 9-6

Instructor Manual Session 9
Special Types of Material

Example: author/title change

• RC280.B6 D33 1986
Dahlin, David C. (David Carl), 1917-
Bone tumors : general aspects and data on 8,542
cases / by David C. Dahlin and Krishnan K. Unni. 4th
ed. c1986.

• RC280.B6 D33 1996

Unni, K. Krishnan, 1941-
Dahlin’s bone tumors : general aspects and data on
11,087 cases / K. Krishnan Unni. 5th ed. c1996.
7

Cutter is not adjusted for the later edition even though the author has changed.

[NOTE: yes, the “K” appears after Krishnan in the 4th ed. and before
Krishnan in the 5th ed.]

Fundamentals of LC Classification 9-7

Instructor Manual Session 9
Special Types of Material

Editions: class number change

• If a subsequent edition should be assigned a
different class number, the editions are not
kept together
• Z694.M35
Handbook for AACR2 : explaining and illustrating Anglo-
American cataloguing rules, second edition / by Margaret F.
Maxwell. Chicago : American Library Association, 1980.

• Z694.15.A56 M39 1989

Handbook for AACR2 : explaining and illustrating the Anglo-
American cataloguing rules / by Margaret Maxwell ; with a new
chapter by Judith A. Carter. 1988 rev. Chicago : American
Library Association, 1989.
8

2nd bullet: The 1980 edition of Handbook for AACR2 was classed as a general
work on descriptive cataloging.
3rd bullet: When the 1989 edition was published, a specific number for the
Anglo-American Cataloging Rules had been added to the schedules. The new,
more specific number, was assigned to the later edition of the Handbook.
This is not stated explicitly in G 145, but the principle of specificity in
classification normally trumps SCM:Shelflisting procedures for editions.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 9-8

Instructor Manual Session 9
Special Types of Material

Editions: class number change (2)

„ Chemistry—General works, treatises, and

advanced textbooks
QD28 1761-1860
QD31 1861-1969

QD31.2 1970-2000

QD31.3 2001-
9

An even more common reason for a class number change is when a number for
a new imprint range is added to the schedules. Many of these have been
introduced for textbook numbers at the beginning of the new millennium.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 9-9

Instructor Manual Session 9
Special Types of Material

Example
• QD31.2 .E22 1996
General chemistry / Darrell D. Ebbing … 5th
ed. Boston : Houghton Mifflin, c1996.

• QD31.3 .E22 2002

General chemistry / Darrell D. Ebbing, Steven
D. Gammon. 7th ed. Boston : Houghton
Mifflin, c2002.

10

The standard practice is to assign the number for the appropriate imprint range
to the later edition, as we see in this example, although this may be trumped by
local policies and procedures.

Although the same Cutter has been assigned in these examples, using the same
book number is not necessary if the classification changes, because using the
same book number will not collocate the editions.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 9-10

Instructor Manual Session 9
Special Types of Material

Work Letters (G 140)

• Editions published in the same year are
usually differentiated by work letters, b-y

• When the main entry is a corporate

name, work letters a-z are used to
distinguish different works published in
the same year

11

Sometimes you need to differentiate editions published in the same year, and
work letters are used for this purpose. Work letters are used both to distinguish
the same work where the call number would otherwise be the same, and to
differentiate different works using the same call number.
Letters are used to distinguish different works published in the same year when
a corporate main entry is used.
Should all the available work letters be used up in the course of a year, the
standard practice is to double the letters, e.g. “bb” <this doesn’t seem to be
documented under G 140>

Fundamentals of LC Classification 9-11

Instructor Manual Session 9
Special Types of Material

Work letters: example

• DA591.A45 D5326 2000
Jephson, P. D.
Shadows of a princess : Diana, Princess of Wales,
1987-1996 : an intimate account by her private
secretary / P.D. Jephson. London : HarperCollins,
2000.
vii, 392 p., [8] p. of plates …

• DA591.A45 D5326 2000b

Jephson, P. D.
Shadows of a princess : Diana, Princess of Wales,
1987-1996 : an intimate account by her private
secretary / P.D. Jephson. 1st ed. New York :
HarperCollins Publishers, c2000.
456 p. : ill. …

Here is a typical example of a work letter used to distinguish different editions

published in the same year.
Apparently the same publisher, but the pagination (extent) indicates that these
are different editions.
In LC cataloging, you will frequently see the b work letter with large print
editions published in the same year as the regular print edition. (LCCN
2005023467, 2005008226, 2005010239)
Examples of work letters used when the main entry is a corporate name will be
shown later in the session.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 9-12

Instructor Manual Session 9
Special Types of Material

Work letters with “a” and “z”

• TX723.3 .P38 1860a
Petit, Alphonse. La gastronomie en Russie …
[Paris : L'Arche du livre, 1970]
NOTE: Facsim. of original, published Paris :
Chez l'auteur : Émile Mellier, 1860.

• DS798.9.K37 A53 1990z

The ancient city of Kharakhorum. Beijing :
New World Press, [199-]
13

The letter “a” is generally reserved for photocopies and facsimile

reproductions. Note that the date is the date of the original, not the date of
publication (SCM G 140, 2.c). CAUTION: LC practice defines “facsimile”
narrowly, according to the AACR2 definition (“A reproduction simulating the
physical appearance of the original in addition to reproducing its content
exactly”). Many, if not most, books with edition statements like “Facsimile
ed.” would not be assigned the work letter “a” by LC shelflisting staff.
The letter “z” is reserved for questionable dates.
Corporate names are treated differently – “a” and “z” do not have these
meanings.
Even if only one work is published in a given year, it cannot be assigned the
work letter “a” for facsimile/photocopy or “z” for questionable date. An
example of corporate name practice is on slide 16.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 9-13

Instructor Manual Session 9
Special Types of Material

Related works
• Sometimes the same classification and
book number is used to bring together
different but related works
• Examples:
• Corporate main entry
• Series (Classed together)

14

Intro: Although we use the term “work” letters, sometimes these work letters
are not used to collocate manifestations or expressions of the same
bibliographic work. From this point, we will be considering how LC
sometimes uses call numbers to show the relationship between works that may
be related but are not bibliographically equivalent.

[NOTE: other examples include supplementary works and commentaries, not

addressed in this workshop.]

Fundamentals of LC Classification 9-14

Instructor Manual Session 9
Special Types of Material

Corporate main entry (G 220)

• A corporate body is an organization or group of
persons that is identified by a particular name, and
that acts, or may act, as an entity
• Typical examples of corporate bodies are
associations, government agencies, religious bodies,
local churches, and conferences
• For materials entered under a corporate body
heading, Cutter for the name of the corporate body
• For monographic items, add the imprint date to the
call number to make each call number unique
• Do not apply G 220 to materials in class K
15

ANIMATION: click to bring in each bullet

3rd bullet: When a corporate name is used as the main entry, Cutter numbers
do not really differentiate or collocate works with the same class number. This
often doesn’t seem intuitive to catalogers, who will sometimes vary the Cutter
number in an effort to differentiate works.
4th bullet: Monographic examples using corporate name main entry might
include: commercial sales catalogs, catalogs of objects owned by a museum,
and reports of expeditions.
A typical example of a serial entered under a corporate body heading would be
an annual report. (For more on serials with corporate main entries, see the last
slides of this session)

Fundamentals of LC Classification 9-15

Instructor Manual Session 9
Special Types of Material

Corporate main entry example:

Call no. Main entry Title Date
TP937.B46 Benjamin Moore Moore’s floor paint. [190-?]
1900 & Co.

TP937.B46 Benjamin Moore Home decorative interior [19--?]

1900a & Co. suggestions.

TP937.B46 Benjamin Moore Muresco for wall and ceiling [ca. 1920]
1920 & Co. decoration.

TP937.B46 Benjamin Moore 100 years of exterior colors. [1983?]

1983 & Co.

16

The subarrangement used when a corporate name is the main entry is an

exception to general practice.
If the corporate name is the main entry, the same book number is used for all
works entered under the corporate name. Different works are distinguished by
date, or, if necessary, a work letter.
The work letter a is not reserved for photocopies or facsimiles.
Note that although the work letter z is ordinarily used when a decade or
century is replaced by a hyphen in the description (as in the first two
examples), the rule is not applied when the corporate name is the main entry.
When a decade or century is uncertain, the hyphen(s) is replaced by a zero in
the call number.

[NOTE: these were local catalog examples, modified to a degree;

TP937=paint catalogs]

Fundamentals of LC Classification 9-16

Instructor Manual Session 9
Special Types of Material

Series volume numbers

• Volume numbers are used to differentiate call
numbers for analytics of series.
• For monographic series, no date is used:
HT101 .R393 no. 181
HT101 .R393 no. 185
• For multipart item series, the initial date of the
series precedes the volume number:
PN4855 .H57 1994 no. 2
PN4855 .H57 1994 no. 3
17

Call numbers for analytics of series are another way to bring together related
works, in this case works related by the relatively broad content gathered
under the series heading. Yes, sometimes the relationship among works in a
series is more the publisher’s imagination than a reflection of reality.
Since LC won’t be classing together most series any more, you aren’t likely to
see numbers thus formatted in LC cataloging unless you specialize in music.
However, many libraries will continue to class series together, either because it
cuts down on time spent classifying, or because selectors believe this
arrangement is a convenience for their user community.
2nd bullet: Classification is … Urban sociology. Periodicals. Serials, cuttered
to the series title. The established form of the series is: Research paper
(University of Toronto. Centre for Urban and Community Studies).
3rd bullet: The est. form of the series is: History of American journalism. This
is a multipart (note the date in the call number), although interestingly an ISSN
is provided in the 440 of each record.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 9-17

Instructor Manual Session 9
Special Types of Material

Exercise 1

Special Types of Materials

Exercise 1

is at the end of this session

Stop at this point and do exercise 1 (editions).

Attendees will need to have the LC Cutter Table out.

Go over the instructions with attendees. Point out that the main entry for each
title is in bold.

It is wise to work through the first title as a group, so that everyone is clear on
what they need to do. After that, instructors may wish to give attendees time
to complete the exercise on their own, or to continue working through as a
group.

Answers are given in slides in a separate file. Manuals also have answers
printed in the appendix.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 9-18

Instructor Manual Session 9
Special Types of Material

Forms of publication
• Subjects have certain characteristic
types of publication and the schedules
usually have numbers at the beginning
of each subject
• Some forms of publication include:
• Juvenile materials
• Congresses (conferences)
• Serials

19

Now let’s consider how the schedules handle some common types of
publications. We’ll consider juvenile materials, conferences, and, finally,
serials.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 9-19

Instructor Manual Session 9
Special Types of Material

Juvenile materials (F 615)

• Belles-lettres PZ5-90 • Belles-lettres P-PT
• Juvenile & YA fiction • Poetry
• Collections • Drama
• Picture storybooks • Humor
• Alphabet & counting
books • Comic books
• Stories in rhyme
• Song texts illustrated for
children
• Juvenile folk tales
• Traditional nursery
rhymes

20

Most juvenile belles-lettres is classed in PZ. PZ is organized by language, and

each language is subarranged following roughly the same structure.
On the other hand, class juvenile poetry, drama, humor, and comic books in
the standard P-PT numbers. (Too difficult to distinguish from works in the
adult genres?!)
Historical note: PZ was at one time used also for works of popular fiction.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 9-20

Instructor Manual Session 9
Special Types of Material

Examples
• PZ7.B1135 $b Tu 2003
Babbitt, Natalie. Tuck everlasting. 2003.
• PZ8.B115 $b Ou 1998
Babbitt, Natalie. Ouch! : a tale from Grimm. 1998.
• PZ8.1 $b .T245 1997
Teeny tiny witch / [illustrated by Stephanie
Peterson]. 1997.
• PS627.C57 $b A15 2000
5 Christmas plays for children. c2000.

21

1st & 2nd bullets: if there is an author main entry, standard Cuttering is used
for the author, but, exceptionally, the book number is an abbreviated title; only
the first letter is upper case.
3rd bullet: on the other hand, if the resource is entered under title, standard
Cuttering is used.
4th bullet: The last example falls into the category of juvenile belletristic
material that does not use PZ; again, standard Cuttering procedures are used.

[NOTE: The author Cutter for Babbitt is different in PZ7 and PZ8 because the
range of entries in the shelflist in each class number is different.]
PZ7 -- General juvenile belles lettres, 1870-
PZ8 -- Fairy tales
PZ8.1 -- Folklore, legends, romance
PS627.C57 – American literature — Collections of American literature—
Drama—Special forms and topics, A-Z—Christmas.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 9-21

Instructor Manual Session 9
Special Types of Material

Topical juvenile materials

• Formerly classed in PZ9-10 & PZ15-16
• Now classed in regular subject classes
• Under the regular subject class, use the
Juvenile Works number, if present
• If there is no Juvenile Works number,
use the General number (or make a
SACO proposal)
22

For anything other than belle-lettres, the regular subject classes are applied,
but be on the lookout for a juvenile works or materials number.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 9-22

Instructor Manual Session 9
Special Types of Material

Examples
… Lexicography—Dictionaries—English only—
Juvenile, school dictionaries
PE1628.5 .M44 2004
Merriam-Webster's intermediate dictionary.
SUBJECT: English language--Dictionaries, Juvenile.

…African languages and literature—Special languages

(Alphabetically)—Zulu—Language—Dictionaries
PL8843 .W55 1998
Wilson-Max, Ken. Halala means welcome : a book of
Zulu words.
SUBJECT: Zulu language--Dictionaries, Juvenile--
English.

In the first example, there is a separate number for juvenile English language
dictionaries.

In the second example, there is not a separate number for juvenile Zulu
language dictionaries, so the work is classed with other Zulu language
dictionaries.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 9-23

Instructor Manual Session 9
Special Types of Material

Congresses (F 240)
• Use congress numbers to class:
• Collected papers delivered or published for
one or more named or unnamed
congresses, symposia, conferences,
meetings, etc.
• Condensations of these papers
• Reports of proceedings and discussions,
program statements, lists of delegates, etc.
• Combinations of the above
24

Intro: Most of the major topics in the schedules will have a congresses
number near the beginning of the range, grouped with other numbers for form
(e.g. Periodicals, Dictionaries).

Fundamentals of LC Classification 9-24

Instructor Manual Session 9
Special Types of Material

Congresses under Economic

history and conditions

Here is a screen shot from ClassWeb highlighting the Congresses number

HC13 under Economic history and conditions. Typically, the number appears
toward the top of the hierarchy of numbers under the subject.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 9-25

Instructor Manual Session 9
Special Types of Material

Congresses (established number)

• HC13. Economic history and conditions—
Congresses
• HC13 .I48 1984
Indiana University International Business
Forum (1984)
Managing amidst tensions and conflicts in a
global economy : background papers for the
Indiana University International Business
Forum …
26

Here’s an example applying HC13. Although in this case the main entry is the
name of the conference, this is not a requirement for classifying by the
congress number.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 9-26

Instructor Manual Session 9
Special Types of Material

Congress vs. serial number

• If a number has been established, class both
monographic and serial congresses in that number

• TL1-4. Periodicals and societies.

TL6. Congresses.

• TL6 .S78
The ... Stapp Automotive Crash and Field
Demonstration Conference : [proceedings] …

an annual publication

27

In most cases, a topic with a Congresses number will also have a number for
Periodicals, so keep in mind that if the the conference papers are issued
serially, the congress rather than the periodical number should be used.
In the example, the Stapp Conference is an annual, but the record is assigned
the Congresses number rather than the Periodicals and societies number. (TL1-
4050: Motor vehicles. Aeronautics. Astronautics)

Fundamentals of LC Classification 9-27

Instructor Manual Session 9
Special Types of Material

Congress vs. serial number (2)

• Do not class congresses in the number
for periodicals unless congresses are
explicitly included in the caption for that
number (as in class Q)
• QP474. Periodicals, societies, congresses,
serial publications.

28

Note that when a number applies to both congresses and periodicals, the
congress can be either a serial or a monograph.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 9-28

Instructor Manual Session 9
Special Types of Material

Congresses: no form number

• If no number has been established for
congresses, class congresses in the
General Works number, or in the
periodical number if the congress is
cataloged as a serial
• Class each monographic congress
according to its subject matter

29

Fundamentals of LC Classification 9-29

Instructor Manual Session 9
Special Types of Material

Congresses (General works)

LB2331.63. Theory and practice of education—Higher education—
Special aspects of higher education—Evaluation and ranking of
universities and colleges—By region or country—United
States—General works

• LB2331.63 .S95 1978

Summer Conference on Accreditation (1978 :
California State Polytechnic Association, Pomona)
Evaluating educational quality : a conference
summary …

• Not classed with form number under broader topic:

LB2301 Theory and practice of education—Higher
education—Associations, conferences, congresses

Here we have a conference summary entered under the name of the

conference.
Given the choice between classing to a broader education topic with a
congresses number* or the more specific topic with only a general works
number, you should class to the more specific topic. (“Class each monographic
congress to its subject matter.”)

*Presumably this would be LB2301 [Theory and practice of Education--

Higher Education—Associations, conferences, congresses]

Fundamentals of LC Classification 9-30

Instructor Manual Session 9
Special Types of Material

Congress dates (G 230)

• Significant exception to the use of the imprint
date for monograph call numbers: conference
main entry (use the date of the conference):
• PE1068.G5 B75 2001
British Association of Lecturers in English
for Academic Purposes. Conference (2001
: University of Strathclyde)
Directions for the future … -- Bern ; New
York : Peter Lang, 2004.
31

However, if the heading does not have a date, use the imprint date. (G 230b)

Fundamentals of LC Classification 9-31

Instructor Manual Session 9
Special Types of Material

Congress Cutters (G 230)

• For works with the same conference main
entry and the same class number, assign the
same Cutter number & differentiate by date
• Use a work letter to differentiate different
works with the same conference date
• Use the same Cutter even if the work is a
translation or selection
• If the conference is entered under title, Cutter
by title

32

Here is another instance of the use of call numbers to bring together related but
different works. The practice is similar to the practice where, under the same
class number, different works entered under the same corporate name are
gathered.

[NOTE: with the 2001 Amendments to AACR2, entry under title would be
unusual, since rule 21.1B now provides for main entry under the name of the
congress if it is named anywhere on the item. (Previously, the conference name
had to appear prominently.]

Fundamentals of LC Classification 9-32

Instructor Manual Session 9
Special Types of Material

Example:
• QA76.9.A25 I555 2001
International Conference on the Theory and
Application of Cryptology and Information Security
(7th : 2001 : Gold Coast, Qld.)
Advances in cryptology--ASIACRYPT 2001 …

• QA76.9.A25 I555 2002

International Conference on the Theory and
Application of Cryptology and Information Security
(8th : 2002 : Queenstown, N.Z.)
Advances in cryptology-ASIACRYPT 2002 …

33

The primary subject for both works is Computer security—Congresses. [A25

is the topical Cutter for Computers. Access. Computer security.] Since the
same class number is assigned, the same Cutter should also be assigned; even
though these are different collections of papers from conferences held on
different dates, the Cutter is not varied.
The call number date is taken from the date in the heading, although in this
case the heading and imprint dates are the same.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 9-33

Instructor Manual Session 9
Special Types of Material

Serials (F 210)
• Like conferences, there will usually be a class
number or group of numbers at the beginning of
major topics in the schedules for serials
• Caption examples:
Periodicals. Societies. Serials
Periodicals
Periodicals, etc.
Periodicals and societies
Periodicals, societies, congresses, and serial
collections
• No classification schedule has been developed for
newspapers
34

Fundamentals of LC Classification 9-34

Instructor Manual Session 9
Special Types of Material

Serials (F 210)
• Unless there are other specific
provisions in the schedule, class all
serial publications, including periodicals,
numbered monographic series, and
topical serial society publications on the
number at the beginning of the topic

35

In some ways, this seems to contradict the principle of specificity, F 10, #2:
“class a work by its specific subject, not by its form under a broader topic,” but
remember that F10 #2 qualifies this by stating “unless instructions to the
contrary are printed in the schedules.” Possible insurance in case the scope of
the serial is broader than it first appears?
[NOTE: slide with examples of specific provisions coming up]

Fundamentals of LC Classification 9-35

Instructor Manual Session 9
Special Types of Material

Schedule example: N1 Periodicals

Visual arts
Periodicals
N1.A1 Polyglot
N1.A12-Z American and English
N2 French
N3 German
N4 Italian
N5 Dutch and Flemish
N6 Russian. Slavic
N6.5 Scandinavian
N7 Spanish and Portuguese
N8.A-Z Other(including Oriental), A-Z
N9.A1 Yearbooks
Polyglot …

Here is an example of the range assigned to periodicals at the beginning of the

topic, in this case visual arts.
Sometimes the range assigned to Periodicals is followed by a range for
Yearbooks. Per F 210 and F 230, consider all Yearbook ranges to be obsolete.
Assign the appropriate periodical number to yearbooks. Numbers for
congresses and directories are not obsolete.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 9-36

Instructor Manual Session 9
Special Types of Material

Serial examples (general rule)

• N1.A12-Z. Visual arts—Periodicals—American and
English
• N1.T583
Today’s art and graphics.
SUBJECT: Art--Periodicals.
• N4. Visual arts—Periodicals—Italian.
• N4.C7
La critica d’arte.
SUBJECTS: 1. Art--Periodicals. 2. Art--Italy--
Periodicals.

37

Fundamentals of LC Classification 9-37

Instructor Manual Session 9
Special Types of Material

Serial examples (specific provisions)

• N328. Visual arts—Study and teaching. Research—
Art schools. Special regions or countries. United
States. General works.
• N328.D57
Directory of MFA programs in the visual arts.
SUBJECT: Art schools--United States--
Directories.
• N6480. Visual arts—History—Modern art—By
century—19th and 20th centuries—20th century—
Periodicals.
• N6480.C65
Contemporanea (New York, N.Y.)
SUBJECT: Art, Modern--20th century--
Periodicals.

Here are two examples where the serial would not be classed at the beginning
of the topic.
1st example: If the schedule provides for the geographic aspect of the topic,
classify a serial with a geographic focus as a general work under the
appropriate topic.
[NOTE: F 210 doesn’t mention this and there is no Periodical annotation in
the schedules in these situations. The SCCTP Serial workshop refers to this
practice, however.]
2nd example: this is an instance of specific provision in the schedules that
would override the general rule to class at the beginning of the topic.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 9-38

Instructor Manual Session 9
Special Types of Material

Serial title changes (linear)

• N1 .A243
Art instruction. [Stamford, Conn. : Watson-
Guptill Publications, c1937-c1939.
Continued by: American artist (Stamford,
Conn.)

• N1 .A243
American artist (Stamford, Conn.)
American artist. [Stamford, Conn. : Watson-
Guptill Publications, c1940-
Continues: Art instruction.

It’s a fairly common practice to assign the same class and Cutter to a serial
when there is a linear title change and there is no major change in scope.
Some libraries do not classify serials; they simply arrange them by title. One
of the advantages of classification is that for most serial title changes, volumes
issued under the earlier and later titles can be kept together on the shelf.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 9-39

Instructor Manual Session 9
Special Types of Material

Serial title changes (non-linear)

• N8554 .A77
Art research news.
Merged with: Stolen art alert, to form: IFAR
reports.
• N8795 .S76
Stolen art alert.
Merged with: Art research news, to form:
IFAR reports.
• N8554 .I34
IFAR reports.
Formed by the union of: Stolen art alert,
and: Art research news.

For non-linear title changes, the Cutter and sometimes the classification
number will be changed.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 9-40

Instructor Manual Session 9
Special Types of Material

Serials: corporate body as

main entry (G 220, 11)
• As with monographs, when a corporate
body is the main entry and the same
class number is used, the Cutter
number for the main entry is not
adjusted to differentiate works
• For serials, a work letter should be used
to differentiate works

41

The use of the work letter for serials is particularly common for the subset of
corporate main entry serials where the corporate name is a conference, because
the conference will often publish both a proceedings issue and an abstracts
issue, and the proceedings and abstract are cataloged as separate serials.

[NOTE: it is LC practice to add a work letter, starting with “a,” to serial

publications entered under corporate body (G 220, 9). Other libraries may
follow this practice or not, or may follow it only in certain situations (e.g.,
only for serial government publications entered under corporate body). The
instructions and examples here follow LC practice.]

Fundamentals of LC Classification 9-41

Instructor Manual Session 9
Special Types of Material

Serial example: work numbers

Call no. Main entry Title Imprint

Q11 .S79a Smithsonian Update. [Washington :

Institution. Smithsonian
Traveling Institution Traveling
Exhibition Exhibition Service]
Service.
Q11 .S79b Smithsonian Smithsonian year : City of Washington :
Institution. annual report of the Smithsonian
Smithsonian Institution Press :
Institution for the For sale by the Supt.
year ended Sept. 30 of Docs., U.S.
... G.P.O., 1980-
42

Note that subheadings are ignored when establishing the Cutter number, per G
220 #3.
G 220 does not address this, but presumably the usual practice for name
changes would apply in this situation also. A linear title change would use the
same work letter; a non-linear change, assuming the classification and main
entry are the same, would have the same Cutter with a different work letter.

[NOTE: LC used to do separate Cutters for all levels of the corporate name
hierarchy, but it was a lot of work. The decision was made to ignore all
subheadings in creating Cutters for non-jurisdictional corporate names.
The next slide shows the practice for creating Cutters for jurisdictional
corporate names; in this case the main heading and first subheading are taken
into account.]

Fundamentals of LC Classification 9-42

Instructor Manual Session 9
Special Types of Material

Serial example: work numbers (2)

Call no. Main entry Title Cutter from:

HJ11 Arkansas. Dept. Arkansas financial Arkansas + Dept. of

.A842a of Finance and management system. Finance and
Management. Management
HJ11 Arkansas. Dept. Budget preparation Arkansas + Dept. of
.A842b of Finance and manual. Finance and
Management. Management (but
Office of Budget. NOT Office of
Budget)
HJ11 Arkansas. Dept. Biennial report. Arkansas + Dept. of
.A87a of Revenues. Revenues

43

Note that if the main entry is a jurisdiction, the Cutter number is based on the
main element and the first subheading, but all further subheadings are ignored.
(Many examples for states under HJ11; see also HJ10.3 U55 for United States.
General Accounting Office)

Fundamentals of LC Classification 9-43

Instructor Manual Session 9
Special Types of Material

Exercises 2 & 3

Fundamentals of LC Classification 9-44

Instructor Manual Session 9
Exercises
Special Types of Material: Exercise 1

Supply the call number, based on the original edition. If necessary, construct any new or
additional Cutter based on the LC Cutter table (assume any new book number
constructed from the table does not conflict with a previously assigned number in the
shelflist)

Call Number Record. Main entry is in bold.

QD251 .C38 Channing, Margo, 1937- . All about organic chemistry. Margo
Channing. 1st ed. Paterson, N.J. Prentice Hall, 1968.
Channing, Margo, 1937- . All about organic chemistry / Margo
Channing. 2nd ed. Englewood Cliffs, N.J. : Prentice Hall, 1975.
[Cataloged June 1983]
Channing, Margo, 1937- . Basic organic chemistry / Margo Channing.
3rd ed. Victoria, N.S.W.. : Macmillan, 1984. NOTE: Previous ed.
published under title: All about organic chemistry.
Channing, Margo, 1937- . Essential organic chemistry / Margo
Channing. 3rd ed. Paterson, N.J. : Pearson Prentice Hall, 1984. NOTE:
Previous ed. published under title: All about organic chemistry.
Channing, Margo, 1937- . Basic organic chemistry / Margo Channing.
3rd ed. London : Hutchinson, 1984.
Harrington, Eve, 1954- . Essentials of organic chemistry / Eve
Harrington and Margo Channing. 4th ed. Upper Saddle River, N.J. :
Pearson Prentice Hall, 2000.
Harrington, Eve, 1954- . Channing's Essentials of organic chemistry /
Eve Harrington. 5th ed. Upper Saddle River, N.J. : Pearson Prentice
Hall, 2004.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 1
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
FOR DOUBLE SIDED COPY
Instructor Manual Session 9
Exercises
Special Types of Material: Exercise 2

Call number for the 6th conference has already been assigned. Assign call numbers to the
other titles.

Call Number Record. Main entry in bold

RC607.A26 I56 1990 International Conference on AIDS (6th : 1990 : San
Francisco, Calif.). AIDS in the nineties ... [S.l. : s.n., 1990?]
SUBJECT: AIDS (Disease)--Congresses.

International Conference on AIDS (7th : 1991 : Florence,

Italy). Science challenging AIDS ... Basel ; New York :
Karger, c1992.
SUBJECT: AIDS (Disease)--Congresses.

International Conference on AIDS (10th : 1994 :

Yokohama-shi, Japan). Global challenge of AIDS … Tokyo
: Kodansha ; Basel ; New York : Karger, c1995.
SUBJECT: AIDS (Disease)--Congresses.

International Conference on AIDS (10th : 1994 :

Yokohama-shi, Japan). One world, one hope ...
Philadelphia, PA : Rapid Science Publishers, 1997.
SUBJECT: AIDS (Disease)--Congresses.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 2
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
FOR DOUBLE SIDED COPY
Instructor Manual Session 9
Exercises
Special Types of Material: Exercise 3

Identify call numbers that do not follow standard practice. All titles are serials. The first
call number is correct.

Call Number Record.

PN2. H37 Hartford studies in literature.

PN2 .S78 Studies in literature.

NOTES: Continues: Hartford studies in literature
NOTES: Continued by: University studies in literature

PN2 .U56 University studies in literature : USL.

NOTES: Continues: Studies in literature
NOTES: Merged with: Connecticut studies in literature to form:
Connecticut literature yearbook

PN2 .C66 Connecticut studies in literature.

NOTES: Merged with: University studies in literature to form:
Connecticut literature yearbook

PN12 .C66 Connecticut literature yearbook.

NOTES: Formed by the merger of: University studies in literature
with: Connecticut studies in literature

Fundamentals of LC Classification 3
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
FOR DOUBLE SIDED COPY
Instructor Manual Session 10
Schedule H:
Social Sciences

Schedule H: Social Sciences

Session 10

Fundamentals of LC Classification 10-1

Instructor Manual Session 10
Schedule H:
Social Sciences

Overview of session
„ Historical overview
„ Topical layout of Schedule H
„ Scope notes
„ Types of tables
„ Shelflisting
„ Internal
„ External
„ Examples of the application of external tables
„ Geographic divisions
„ Subdivisions for industry and trade
„ Economic history and conditions 2

1st bullet: The first edition of Schedule H was published in 1910, with subsequent
editions published throughout the 20th century. The latest edition was published in
1995.

[NOTE: FYI, detailed information on publication history, from Preface to 2005

edition: “The first edition of Class H, Social Sciences, was published in 1910, the
second in 1920, and the third in 1949. The latter edition was reprinted in 1967 with
supplementary pages of additions and changes. For the fourth edition, Class H was
separated into two parts: H-HJ (Economics), published in 1981, and HM-HX
(Sociology), published in 1980. With the 1994 edition, the two parts were reunited
into a single volume. The 1997 edition incorporated changes made between 1994 and
1997, and contained a simplified subclass HJ as well as other revisions. …” Editions
also published in 2002 and 2004, latest edition published 2005.]

Fundamentals of LC Classification 10-2

Instructor Manual Session 10
Schedule H:
Social Sciences

Scope notes
HA – Statistics
Class here general works on social science statistics
and censuses, including statistical data and methodology.
For applications of statistics in the social sciences, see
the field.
For statistical data alone see HA154-4737
For works on the general theory and methodology of statistics see
QA276-280

There are two general subclasses in Schedule H: 1) Economics and 2) Sociology.

Point out the scope note under HA- Statistics. Scope notes explain what goes under a
caption. Most often they explain how to separate materials when the caption, in this
case statistics, is similar to other captions located elsewhere in the schedules.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 10-3

Instructor Manual Session 10
Schedule H:
Social Sciences

Application of the first scope note

Title:
Sampling methodologies : with applications.

SUBJECT:
Social sciences--Statistical methods.

Class number:
HA Statistics
HA31.2 Sampling. Statistical survey
methodology
4

First scope note = Class here general works on social science statistics and censuses,
including statistical data and methodology.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 10-4

Instructor Manual Session 10
Schedule H:
Social Sciences

Application of the second scope note

Title:
Analyzing contemporary social issues : a
workbook with student CHIP software.

SUBJECT:
Sociology--Statistical methods.

Class number:
HM Sociology
HM535 Statistical methods
5

Second scope note = For applications of statistics in the social sciences, see the field.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 10-5

Instructor Manual Session 10
Schedule H:
Social Sciences

Subclass HM Sociology
HM Sociology
The Numbers HM1-HM299 were used by
the Library of Congress until January
1999. After that date, they were replaced
by a revised subclass HM that begins at
HM401. The numbers HM1-HM299 are
currently used only to class new
continuations of serials that are already
classed in those numbers.

This note appears at the beginning of the second major subclass (Sociology) in
Schedule H. The terminology in the HM subclass was updated to reflect changes in
the discipline of sociology.
(LC Cataloging Newsline. V.7,no.8, June 1999)

Fundamentals of LC Classification 10-6

Instructor Manual Session 10
Schedule H:
Social Sciences

Use of tables in the H Schedule

„ Tables are used extensively throughout
the H Schedule
„ Types of tables used in the H Schedule
„ Shelflisting Tables of General Application
„ Internal Tables
„ External Tables
„ Hybrid Tables

Tables are an economical way to represent subdivisions that are applicable to many
schedules or subclasses within a given schedule. Using tables helps keep down the
size of schedules.
We will look at examples of each of these tables.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 10-7

Instructor Manual Session 10
Schedule H:
Social Sciences

Shelflisting tables of general

application
„ Used throughout most of LCC
„ Developed to create uniformity of Cutter
numbers across all classes
„ The Regions and Countries Table (G 300)
is often used in Schedule H
„ American States and Canadian Provinces
Table is not used in Schedule H
„ H has its own table of states (H28)
8

General information about tables, and about the Regions and Countries Table (G300)
in particular, has been presented in earlier sessions. We’ll look at an example of how
the Regions and Countries Table is applied in Schedule H in the following slides.

4th bullet: The American States and Canadian Provinces Table (G 302) is not used
with the H Schedule. Since the H Schedule has always contained a table of states, the
use of the American States and Canadian Provinces Table is not needed.
[NOTE: H28 is Table of States (Cutter number), there are also tables of states on one
number (H29) and two numbers (H30)]
Other shelflisting tables of general application include: Biography, Artists,
Criticism/Commentaries

Fundamentals of LC Classification 10-8

Instructor Manual Session 10
Schedule H:
Social Sciences

Regions and Countries Table

example
Title:
Evaluating in practice / Ian Shaw.
Publication data:
Aldershot, Hants, England : Arena ; Brookfield,
Vt., USA : Ashgate Pub. Co., c1996.

SUBJECT:
Social service--Great Britain--Evaluation.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 10-9

Instructor Manual Session 10
Schedule H:
Social Sciences

Regions and Countries Table example

HV SOCIAL PATHOLOGY. SOCIAL AND PUBLIC
WELFARE. CRIMINOLOGY
Social service. Social work. Charity organization and
practice
Social workers
HV40.6 Supply and demand
HV40.62 Salaries, pensions, etc.
HV40.8.A-Z By region or country, A-Z
HV41 General special

Works on Social service class in the range HV40-HV69.2. Under the caption Social
workers, there is an allowance for geographic subdivision at HV40.8. The caption By
region or country, A-Z is an indication that we can apply the Regions and Countries
Table G 300 to bring out the geographic aspect of the work being classified.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 10-10

Instructor Manual Session 10
Schedule H:
Social Sciences

Regions and Countries Table

example
G 300 Regions and Countries Table

11

This is an excerpt from the Regions and Countries Table, showing the Cutter that
would be used for Great Britain. If a different Cutter has already been assigned in the
shelflist for Great Britain, that Cutter takes precedence over the suggested Cutter
given in the Regions and Countries Table.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 10-11

Instructor Manual Session 10
Schedule H:
Social Sciences

Regions and Countries Table example

Evaluating in practice / Ian Shaw.
Aldershot, Hants, England : Arena ; Brookfield, Vt., USA :
Ashgate Pub. Co., c1996.
SUBJECT: Social service--Great Britain--Evaluation.

HV40.8 Class number for social workers,

by region or country, A-Z
.G7 Cutter for Great Britain from the
Regions and Countries Table
S53 Book number for main entry,
Shaw
1996 Year of publication
----------------------------------
HV40.8.G7 S53 1996 Completed call number

As with any Cutter from this table, G7 is only used if it is consistent with the local
shelflist.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 10-12

Instructor Manual Session 10
Schedule H:
Social Sciences

Internal tables
„ Only applicable to a specific span of
numbers
„ Found within the schedule
„ Applied with the caption “Under each”
„ Often used with an external table
„ Used to subarrange by form,
geography, or specific entry
13

Fundamentals of LC Classification 10-13

Instructor Manual Session 10
Schedule H:
Social Sciences

Internal table example

HD INDUSTRIES. LAND USE. LABOR
Special industries and trades
Mechanical industries
Electric utilities. Electrification
HD9685.A1 Periodicals. Societies. Serials
HD9685.A2 General works
HD9685.A4-Z By region or country, A-Z
Under each (except the United States):
.x Periodicals. Societies. Serials
.x2 General works. History
Including biography, A-Z
.x3A-.x3Z Local, A-Z
Do not use under regions
.x4A-.x4Z Firms, etc., A-Z

Here we see an internal table at HD9685.A4-Z, Electric utilities. Electrification, By

region or country, A-Z.
Identify types of subarrangement provided for in table
•Periodicals – form division
•Local, A-Z – geographic
•Firms – entities.

Ask how attendees interpret the notation: .x, .x2, .x3A-.x3Z, and .x4A-.x4Z in this
internal table.

The next slides will give examples of applying .x, .x2, .x3A-.x3Z, and .x4A-.x4Z as in
the “Under each” internal table shown here.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 10-14

Instructor Manual Session 10
Schedule H:
Social Sciences

Understanding .x, .x2, .x3A-.x3Z, .x4A-.x4Z

HD9685.A4-Z By region or country, A-Z

Under each (except the United States):

.x = HD9685.G7 .x Periodicals. Societies.

Serials
HD9685.G7 G74a .x2 GeneralOffice
Great Britain. works. of
History
Including biography,
Electricity Regulation. Annual A-Z
report. Local, A-Z
.x3A-.x3Z
Do not use under regions
.x4A-.x4Z Firms, etc., A-Z

The notation .x, .x2, .x3A-.x3Z, .x4A-.x4Z in the internal table at HD9685.A4-Z is
typical of notation used throughout the LC Classification schedules. Let’s talk about
this notation and use examples to show how it is applied:
.x represents the call number as built up to the application of this table.
For example, if our title is a periodical on electrification in Great Britain, “.x” would
be HD9685.G7
ANIMATION: HD9685.G7 flies in from left.
Remind participants that in the earlier example of the Regions and Countries Table
.G7 is used for Great Britain. We would then Cutter by main entry to complete the call
number. ANIMATION: a complete call no. for a periodical classed in HD9685.G7
flies in from bottom.
Remember that dates are not added to call numbers for periodicals, but corporate entry
for serials requires the addition of a work letter to the main entry Cutter (SCM H 220).

Fundamentals of LC Classification 10-15

Instructor Manual Session 10
Schedule H:
Social Sciences

Understanding .x, .x2, .x3A-.x3Z, .x4A-.x4Z

HD9685.A4-Z By region or country, A-Z

Under each (except the United States):
.x Periodicals. Societies. Serials

.x = HD9685.G7 + 2 .x2 General works. History

Including biography, A-Z
.x3A-.x3Z Local, A-Z
HD9685.G72 H69 2003 Howe, Douglas. Electricity
Do notinuse
distribution theunder regions
United
Kingdom,
.x4A-.x4Z 2003.
Firms, etc., A-Z

If our title is a monograph on the history of electrification in Great Britain, we would

append the digit “2” to the .x portion of the call number
ANIMATION: .x = HD9685.G7 + 2 flies in from left, followed by an arrow to
show where the 2 comes from
…and then Cutter by main entry and add a date of publication: HD9685.G72 + main
entry Cutter and date of publication.
ANIMATION: a complete call no. for a monograph on electricity distribution in
the United Kingdom flies in from bottom.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 10-16

Instructor Manual Session 10
Schedule H:
Social Sciences

Understanding .x, .x2, .x3A-.x3Z, .x4A-.x4Z

HD9685.A4-Z By region or country, A-Z
Under each (except the United States):
.x Periodicals. Societies. Serials
.x2 General works. History
Including biography, A-Z

.x = HD9685.G7 + 3 .x3A-.x3Z Local, A-Z

Do not use under
regions
.x4A-.x4Z
HD9685.G73 B384 1974 Eyles, Firms, etc., Edward.
William A-Z
Electricity in Bath, 1890-1974,
1974.

If our title is a monograph on the history of electrification in Bath, a city in England,

we would append the digit “3” to the .x portion of the call number
ANIMATION: .x = HD9685.G7 + 3 flies in from left, followed by an arrow to
show where the 3 comes from
…and then Cutter by the locality relevant to the work. The locality is Bath, so we
construct a Cutter, using the Cutter Table as a guide (or, if any entry for Bath already
exists in the shelflist, we would use that Cutter). Using the Cutter Table, B38 is a good
choice for Bath. Since we already have used two Cutters, and we are not allowed to
add a third, we must append a digit, using the Cutter Table as a guide (but again
following the existing shelflist arrangement) to represent the main entry of the work in
hand. To complete the call number, a date of publication is added.
ANIMATION: a complete call no. for a monograph on the history of
electrification in Bath flies in from bottom

Fundamentals of LC Classification 10-17

Instructor Manual Session 10
Schedule H:
Social Sciences

Understanding .x, .x2, .x3A-.x3Z, .x4A-.x4Z

HD9685.A4-Z By region or country, A-Z

Under each (except the United States):
.x Periodicals. Societies. Serials
HD9685.G74 B754 2006 Great Britain. National Audit
.x2 General works. History
Office. The restructuring of British
Including
Energy : report bybiography,
the A-Z
Comptroller
.x3A-.x3Z and Auditor General,
Local, A-Z
[2006] Do not use under regions
HD9685.G7 + 4 .x4A-.x4Z Firms, etc., A-Z

If our title is a report on the restructuring of British Energy, a firm based in Great
Britain, we would append the digit “4” to the .x portion of the call number
ANIMATION: .x = HD9685.G7 + 4 flies in from left, followed by an arrow to
show where the 4 comes from
…and then Cutter by the specific firm described in the work.
The Cutter is based on the firm’s AACR2 entry form (British Energy (Firm)). B75 is a
good choice of Cutter, according to the Cutter Table.
But we must account for the main entry of the work being cataloged in order to allow
for logical filing of works in this class, and we already have begun a second Cutter.
Since we cannot add a third Cutter for main entry, we must append a digit to the
second Cutter for British Energy (Firm) to represent the main entry. In this case, the
main entry is Great Britain. National Audit Office, so a digit based on the letter “G” in
Great Britain (“4” is a good choice) would be appropriate. Finally we add a date of
publication to complete the call number.
ANIMATION: a complete call no. for a report on the restructuring of British
Energy (Firm) flies in from bottom

Fundamentals of LC Classification 10-18

Instructor Manual Session 10
Schedule H:
Social Sciences

External tables
„ Found at the end of the schedule before the
index
„ Only applicable to a specific span of numbers
„ Applied when the caption is followed by a
specific table number
„ Example: Greek (Table H48)
„ Used to extend classification by geography,
form, time period, or subject

19

4th bullet: Examples:

Geography – Table of States (H28-H30)
Form – Tables of Statistics, By Country (H11-H14a)
Subject – Table for Labor, by Industry or Trade (H50)
Tables of Time Period subdivision not used in Schedule H

Fundamentals of LC Classification 10-19

Instructor Manual Session 10
Schedule H:
Social Sciences

Identifying an external table in the

H Schedule
HS SOCIETIES: SECRET, BENEVOLENT, ETC.
Other societies. By classes
Race societies
By nationality
Southeastern Europe
HS2051-2055 Albanian (Table H48)
HS2061-2065 Greek (Table H48)
HS2071-2075 Romanian (Table H48)

20

When a particular external table is authorized for use in a subclass of Schedule H, the
table is indicated at the end of the caption, as above.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 10-20

Instructor Manual Session 10
Schedule H:
Social Sciences

Examples of external tables used

in Schedule H
Table H11 Table for statistics, by country (19 nos.)
Table H15 Table for economic history and
conditions, by country (10 nos.)
Table H18 Table for industries and trades
(19 nos.)
Table H24 Table for statistics (U.S. states)
(7 nos.)
Table H35 Table for income taxes by country
(except the United States)
(3 nos.)
21

These are only five examples of external tables used in Schedule H. There are 78
external tables used in Schedule H, and also additional tables used in specific
subclasses of Schedule H. Working with Schedule H requires a strong understanding
of how these external tables are applied.
We will now look at several examples of the use of external tables in Schedule H.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 10-21

Instructor Manual Session 10
Schedule H:
Social Sciences

External tables:
geographic divisions
„ Most common external table in Class H
„ Typographically complex
„ Subject subdivision under places are
often represented by additional internal
tables
„ Applied with caption heading (Table #)
„ Example: HA4559 Lebanon (Table H14)

22

Tables H1-H10 are the major tables of geographic division.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 10-22

Instructor Manual Session 10
Schedule H:
Social Sciences

External tables:
geographic divisions
H5 Tables of Geographical Divisions
1 America. Western Hemisphere
North America
2 General Works
3-6 United States
7-10 Canada
10.25 Saint Pierre and Miquelon Islands
Latin American
10.5 General Works
11 Mexico
Central America
13 General Works

23

Here is an excerpt from an external table for geographic divisions. It is from Table
H5. Note that this is only an excerpt from the table. But it is this portion of the table
that we will apply as we look at the example that follows.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 10-23

Instructor Manual Session 10
Schedule H:
Social Sciences

Steps in applying an external table

for geographic divisions
1. Determine the appropriate class number in
the H Schedule
2. Go to the table as instructed by the caption
heading and identify the number or range of
numbers for the geographical area
3. Add the geographic number selected from
the table to the base number identified in the
schedule
4. If an additional internal subject subdivision
table is present, apply the provisions of that
table to the number identified

ANIMATION: click to bring in each number

Steps adapted from
Lois Mai Chan’s A Guide to the library of Congress Classification, 5th ed. p. 243.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 10-24

Instructor Manual Session 10
Schedule H:
Social Sciences

Applying an external table for

geographic divisions: example
Title:
The myth of market failure : employment and
the labor market in Mexico / Peter Gregory.

Publication data:
Baltimore : John Hopkins University Press,
c1986.

SUBJECT:
Labor supply--Mexico.
25

Fundamentals of LC Classification 10-25

Instructor Manual Session 10
Schedule H:
Social Sciences

1. Determine the appropriate class

number in the H Schedule

HD Industries. Land Use. Labor

Labor. Work. Working class
Labor market. Labor supply. Labor demand
By region or country
HD5730-5850.9 Other regions or countries (Table H5)
Add country number in table to HD5720
Under each:
Apply Table HD5730/1 for 4 number countries
Apply Table HD5730/2 for 1 number countries
Apply Table HD5730/2a for 4 number regions
Apply Table HD5730/3 for 1 number regions

Gregory, P. The myth of market failure, c1986.

Labor supply--Mexico.

Table H5 – Countries or regions either 4 or 1 number(s)

Ask class: What is the base number?
ANIMATION: arrow flies in to identify base number, followed by underline for
reinforcement
Note: Combination of external (Table H5) and internal Tables.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 10-26

Instructor Manual Session 10
Schedule H:
Social Sciences

2. Go to the table as instructed by the caption

heading and identify the number or range of
numbers for the geographical area

H5 Tables of Geographical Divisions

1 America. Western Hemisphere
North America
2 General Works
3-6 United States
7-10 Canada
10.25 Saint Pierre and Miquelon Islands
Latin American
10.5 General Works
Gregory, P. The myth of
11 Mexico
market failure, c1986.
Central America
Labor supply--Mexico.
13 General Works

Point out
Mexico is a one number country.
Canada is an example of a 4 number country.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 10-27

Instructor Manual Session 10
Schedule H:
Social Sciences

3. Add the geographic number selected from

the table to the base number identified in the
schedule

HD Industries. Land Use. Labor

Labor. Work. Working class
Labor market. Labor supply. Labor demand
By region or country
HD5730-5850.9 Other regions or countries (Table H5)
Add country number in table to HD5720
Under each: (Mexico = 11) +11

Apply Table HD5730/1 for 4 number countries

Apply Table HD5730/2 for 1 number countries
Apply Table HD5730/2a for 4 number regions
Gregory, P. The myth of Apply Table HD5730/3 for 1 number regions
market failure, c1986.
Labor supply--Mexico.

We add the number for Mexico from Table H5 to the base number in the schedule.
The number for Mexico on Table H5 is 11, and the base number in the schedule in
5720. Our number is now HD5731.
Now an additional internal table, Table HD5730/2 needs to be applied to the one
number country number we have identified.
Be sure to point out that Table HD5730/2 needs to be applied because of the “Under
each” instruction in the schedule (underlined above).

Fundamentals of LC Classification 10-28

Instructor Manual Session 10
Schedule H:
Social Sciences

4. If an additional internal subject subdivision table

is present, apply the provisions of that table to the
number identified

HD Industries. Land Use. Labor

Labor. Work. Working class
Labor market. Labor supply. Labor demand
By region or country
HD5730-5850.9 Other regions or countries (Table H5)
Add country number in table to HD5720
Under each:
Apply Table HD5730/2 for 1 number countries
Table for labor market, by country (1 number)
.A1-.A5 Periodicals. Societies. Serials
.A6 General works
Gregory, P. The myth of .A7-.Z Local, A-Z
market failure, c1986.
Labor supply--Mexico.

The item being classified is a general work on the labor supply in Mexico.
Table HD5730/2 indicates that general works for one number countries are identified
by the Cutter .A6.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 10-29

Instructor Manual Session 10
Schedule H:
Social Sciences

Gregory, P. The myth of market failure, c1986.

Labor supply--Mexico.

HD5720 Class number for labor supply

+11 For Mexico from Table H5.
Added to class number
HD5731.A6 For a general work from Table
HD5730/2
G74 Book number for main entry
Gregory, Peter
1986 Year of publication
-------------------------------
HD5731.A6 G74 1986 Completed call number
30

This slide shows the steps taken to classify the work:

1) Appropriate base number from the H Schedule: H5720
2) Appropriate number for Mexico from Table H5: 11
3) Addition of 5720 and 11= HD5731
4) Additional internal table HD5730/2 applied
5) Cutter A6 for General works

The last steps to complete the call number are considered the shelflisting elements,
that is, creating a unique call number that allows the item to be shelved in a
logical, prescribed location.

6) Second Cutter created for main entry Gregory

7) Date of publication added to complete call number

Fundamentals of LC Classification 10-30

Instructor Manual Session 10
Schedule H:
Social Sciences

External tables: subdivisions

for industries and trades
„ Applied to headings for Industries and
Trades
„ Tables represent both form and
geographic subdivisions
„ These tables often contain
subarrangements

31

Now that we have looked at an external table used in Class H for geographic division
and followed an example of using that external table, let’s now take a look at another
type of external table used in Class H: this one is for subdivisions for industries and
trades.
Although the subdivisions on this table are different from the geographic divisions on
the table in the previous example, this external table is actually applied in the same
manner.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 10-31

Instructor Manual Session 10
Schedule H:
Social Sciences

External tables: subdivisions for

industries and trades

H20 Table for industries and trades (1 no.)

.A1 Periodicals. Societies. Serials
.A2 General works
.A4-Z By region or country, A-Z
Subarrange each country as follows:
.x = Periodicals. Societies. Serials
.x2 = General works. History (Including
biography, A-Z)
.x3A-Z = Local, A-Z
.x4A-Z = Firms, etc., A-Z 32

This is Table H20 for Industries and Trades.

It should look very familiar. We already have used a similar internal table earlier in
the session to discuss the concept of .x, .x2, .x3A-Z, and .4A-Z.
[NOTE: in this table the notation used is slightly different (e.g., .x3A-Z here, .x3A-
.x3Z in the earlier example), but the interpretation of the notation is the same; the
preferred notation is of the type .x3A-.x3Z]

Fundamentals of LC Classification 10-32

Instructor Manual Session 10
Schedule H:
Social Sciences

Steps in applying an external table for

subdivisions for industries and trades

1. Determine the appropriate class number in

the H Schedule
2. Go to the table as instructed by the caption
heading and identify the number or range of
numbers for the industry or trade
3. Apply the provisions of the table to the
appropriate class number

33

ANIMATION: click to bring in each number

Steps adapted from
Lois Mai Chan’s A Guide to the library of Congress Classification, 5th ed. p. 243.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 10-33

Instructor Manual Session 10
Schedule H:
Social Sciences

Applying an external table for subdivisions of

industries and trades: example

Title:
Rising above the herd : an analysis of the
Western Australian beef & cattle industry /
[Andrew Quin, Ashley Manners].

Publication data:
South Perth : Agriculture Western Australia,
Meat Program (Economics)/New Industries
Program, c2000.

SUBJECT:
Beef industry--Australia--Western Australia. 34

Fundamentals of LC Classification 10-34

Instructor Manual Session 10
Schedule H:
Social Sciences

1. Determine the appropriate class number in

the H Schedule
HD INDUSTRIES. LAND USE. LABOR
Special industries and trades
Agricultural industries
Animal industry
HD9430 Camelids (Table H20)
Including alpacas, llamas, vicuñas, etc.
HD9433 Cattle. Beef. Veal. Oxen (Table H20)
HD9434 Horses. Mules, etc. (Table H20)
HD9435 Hogs. Pork. Bacon. Ham (Table H20)

Quin, Andrew. Rising above the herd, c2000.

Beef industry--Australia--Western Australia.

There is one number printed in the schedule for the cattle industry: HD9433. An
external table is indicated in the schedule.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 10-35

Instructor Manual Session 10
Schedule H:
Social Sciences

2. Go to the table as instructed by the caption

heading and identify the number or range of
numbers for the industry or trade

H20 Table for industries and trades (1 no.)

.A1 Periodicals. Societies. Serials
.A2 General works
.A4-Z By region or country, A-Z
Subarrange each country as follows:
.x = Periodicals. Societies. Serials
.x2 = General works. History (Including
biography, A-Z)
.x3A-Z = Local, A-Z
.x4A-Z = Firms, etc., A-Z

Quin, Andrew. Rising above the herd, c2000.

Beef industry--Australia--Western Australia.

Here is Table H20. Note that the geographical aspect of the work to be classified is
brought out through the application of a table of general application: the Regions and
Countries Table (G300). Remember that the caption “By region or country, A-Z”
indicates that the Regions and Countries Table needs to be applied.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 10-36

Instructor Manual Session 10
Schedule H:
Social Sciences

3. Apply the provisions of the table to the

appropriate class number
H20 Table for industries and trades (1 no.)
.A1 Periodicals. Societies. Serials
.A2 General works
.A4-Z By region or country, A-Z
Subarrange each country as follows:
.x = Periodicals. Societies. Serials
.x2 = General works. History (Including
biography, A-Z)
.x3A-Z = Local, A-Z
.x4A-Z = Firms, etc., A-Z

Quin, Andrew. Rising above the herd, c2000.

Beef industry--Australia--Western Australia.

The Region and Countries Table (G 300) will be applied to the base number to
identify a Cutter for Australia.
Because the item being classified is about Western Australia in particular, the .x3A-Z
= Local, A-Z portion of Table H20 will be applied. The Cutter for Australia will be
the first Cutter in the call number; the second Cutter will be based on the local
subdivision for Western Australia, but since we cannot have a third Cutter in a call
number, we will need to modify that second Cutter for Western Australia to identify
the main entry of the work.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 10-37

Instructor Manual Session 10
Schedule H:
Social Sciences

Quin, Andrew. Rising above the herd, c2000.

Beef industry--Australia--Western Australia.

HD9433 Class number for cattle industry

.A8 Cutter for Australia from
Regions and Countries Table
.A8 + 3 “3” added as instructed in Table
H20 to represent Local, A-Z
W46 Second Cutter for Western
Australia
W46 + 5 “5” added to second Cutter to
represent main entry for work
(Quin)
2000 Year of publication
-------------------------------------
HD9433.A83 W465 2000 Completed call number

This slide shows the steps taken to classify the work:

1) Appropriate base number from the H Schedule: HD9433
2) Appropriate Cutter for Australia from Regions and Countries Table: .A8
3) “3” appended to Cutter for Australia to indicate that what follows in Second Cutter
is a local geographic subdivision
4) W46 selected as Cutter for Western Austrialia. This Cutter is set up using the
Cutter Table (there is no table for local geographic subdivisions); as with the
Regions and Countries Table, the shelflist always takes precedence; note that the
Cutter W47 would be in strict accordance with the Cutter Table in this case

The last steps to complete the call number are considered the shelflisting elements,
that is, creating a unique call number that allows the item to be shelved in a
logical, prescribed location.
5) A digit needs to be appended to the Cutter for Western Australia to represent the
main entry of the item being classified
6) Date of publication added to complete the call number

Fundamentals of LC Classification 10-38

Instructor Manual Session 10
Schedule H:
Social Sciences

External tables:
economic history and conditions
„ Tables of subdivisions under regions or
countries (i.e. main numbers represent
geographic areas)
„ The tables provide form and topical
subdivisions
„ Used in subclass HC Economic history
and conditions

39

We have already looked at two external tables used in Class H: one for geographic
division, and one for industries and trades.
Now let’s look at one more external table used in Class H: a table of economic history
and conditions. This external table is actually applied in the same manner as the
previous two.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 10-39

Instructor Manual Session 10
Schedule H:
Social Sciences

External tables: economic history

and conditions
H17a Table for economic history and conditions, by region
(1 no.)

.A1 Periodicals. Societies. Serials.

.A5-.Z6 General works
.Z65 Natural resources
.Z9A-.Z9Z Specific topics (not elsewhere provided for), A-Z
For list of topics, see HC79.A-Z

40

Here is an example of an external table for economic history and conditions. This
particular table is Table H17a. We will apply this table in the example that follows.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 10-40

Instructor Manual Session 10
Schedule H:
Social Sciences

Steps in applying an external table for

economic history and conditions

1. Determine the appropriate class number in

the H Schedule
2. Go to the table as instructed by the caption
heading and identify the number or range of
numbers for the table
3. Apply the provisions of the table to the
appropriate class number

41

ANIMATION: click to bring in each number

Steps adapted from
Lois Mai Chan’s A Guide to the library of Congress Classification, 5th ed. p. 243.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 10-41

Instructor Manual Session 10
Schedule H:
Social Sciences

Applying an external table for economic

history and conditions: example

Title:
Environment under fire : imperialism and the
ecological crisis in Central America / Daniel
Faber.

Publication data:
New York : Monthly Review Press, 1993.

SUBJECTS:
Environmental policy--Central America.
Central America--Economic conditions--1979-
42

Fundamentals of LC Classification 10-42

Instructor Manual Session 10
Schedule H:
Social Sciences

1. Determine the appropriate class number in

the H Schedule

HC ECONOMIC HISTORY AND CONDITIONS

By region or country
American. Western Hemisphere
Latin America
HC131-140 Mexico (Table H15)
Central America
HC141 General (Table 17a)
HC142 Belize (Table H17)
HC143 Costa Rica (Table H17)
HC144 Guatemala (Table H17)

Faber, Daniel. Environment under fire, 1993.

Environmental policy--Central America.
Central America--Economic conditions--1979-

General works on economic history and conditions in Central America are classed in
HC141. But Table H17a needs to be applied to this number.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 10-43

Instructor Manual Session 10
Schedule H:
Social Sciences

2. Go to the table as instructed by the caption

heading and identify the number or range of
numbers for the table

H17a Table for economic history and conditions, by region

(1 no.)
.A1 Periodicals. Societies. Serials.
.A5-.Z6 General works
.Z65 Natural resources
.Z9A-.Z9Z Specific topics (not elsewhere provided for), A-Z
For list of topics, see HC79.A-Z

Faber, Daniel. Environment under fire, 1993.

Environmental policy--Central America.
Central America--Economic conditions--1979-

Note: HC79+ is an internal table for subarranging within the H Schedule

•adds consistency throughout schedule.
Table H17a is for one number only so there is no need to add numbers to the base
number identified in the schedule itself.
The first subject heading in the item being classified is Environmental policy--Central
America. We need to now check the list of topics listed at HC79.A-Z to see if there is
a more specific area in which to classify this work.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 10-44

Instructor Manual Session 10
Schedule H:
Social Sciences

3. Apply the provisions of the table to the

appropriate class number
HC ECONOMIC HISTORY AND CONDITIONS
--------
HC79.E44 Economic development projects
Cf. HD75.8+ Theory and methodology
Economic geography see HF1021+
HC79.E47 Education, Economic impact of
Cf. HD75.7 Economic growth
HC79.E5 Environmental policy and economic
development. Sustainable development
Including environmental economics
Cf. HC79.P55 Pollution
Cf. HD75.6 Theory and methodology
Cf. TD195.E25 Environmental technology
--------

The list at HC79.A-Z includes a Cutter .E5 for works on environmental policy and
economic development in general. We can apply this Cutter, according to the
instructions in Table H17a, to the item in hand being classed in HC141 for Central
America.
Note however that Table H17a instructs us to use as a first Cutter Z9, and then begin
the second Cutter with the topical Cutter at HC79.A-Z. This means that we will need
to expand upon that second Cutter to allow for the main entry of the work being
classified, since we cannot have more than two Cutters in a complete call number.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 10-45

Instructor Manual Session 10
Schedule H:
Social Sciences

Faber, Daniel. Environment under fire, 1993.

Environmental policy--Central America.
Central America--Economic conditions--1979-
HC141 Class number for Economic
history and conditions of Central
America
.Z9 Cutter for specific topics as
directed by Table H17a
E5 Cutter for Environmental policy
and economic development
from list of topics at HC79.A-Z
E5 + 4 “4” added to second Cutter to
represent main entry for work
(Faber)
1993 Year of publication
----------------------------------
HC141.Z9 E54 1993 Completed call number

This slide shows the steps taken to classify the work:

1) Appropriate base number from the H Schedule: HC141
2) Provisions of Table H17a applied; work being classified is specifically about
environmental policy in Central America and the list of topics in HC79.A-Z needs
to be consulted per the instruction in Table H17a
3) Table H17a indicates that the topical Cutter identified from the list at HC79.A-Z
needs to be the second Cutter in this case; first Cutter Z9 is used to indicate that
what follows are topical subdivisions

The last steps to complete the call number are considered the shelflisting elements,
that is, creating a unique call number that allows the item to be shelved in a
logical, prescribed location.

4) Because the topical Cutter is now represented on the second Cutter in the call
number, and we cannot add a third Cutter for main entry of the work being
classified, we need to append a digit to the second Cutter to indicate the main
entry of the work; the Cutter Table is used as a guide to identify an appropriate
number, but the alphabetical arrangement in the shelflist always takes precedence
5) Date of publication added to complete the call number

Fundamentals of LC Classification 10-46

Instructor Manual Session 10
Schedule H:
Social Sciences

Summary
„ When working in Schedule H,
remember that there are three types of
tables that may need to be consulted:
„ Tables of general application
„ Internal tables
„ External tables
„ Often more than one table will need to
be consulted when classing a work
47

This is a very brief summary, based on this presentation, of working with Schedule H.
Working in Schedule H requires an understanding of the three types of tables that
often are applied when determining class numbers.
Ask class: Where would you look to find examples of each type of table?

Fundamentals of LC Classification 10-47

Instructor Manual Session 10
Schedule H:
Social Sciences

Exercises

48

Now let’s do some more exercises using the H Schedule and its tables.
Attendees will need to have the LC Cutter Table out.

Go over the instructions with attendees. Point out that the main entry for each title is
in bold. You may want to point out that subject headings are given for all titles and
these should guide attendees as they complete the exercises (exercise 2 includes titles
in Portuguese, but no knowledge of that language is required).
It is wise to work through the first title in each exercise as a group, so that everyone is
clear on what they need to do. After that, instructors may wish to give attendees time
to complete the exercises on their own, or to continue working through as a group.

Answers are given in slides. Manuals also have answers printed in the appendix.
(Each line of the exercise answers flies in to the slide, finishing with the completed
call number in blue)

Fundamentals of LC Classification 10-48

Instructor Manual Session 10
Exercises
Schedule H: Exercise 1

LC Class # HC79.A-Z:

Portion of HC79.A-Z Special topics, A-Z:

LC Class # HC110.A-Z:

Supply the call numbers for the items below. The class numbers used will be HC79 or
HC110, and those classes are given to guide you. Select appropriate topical Cutters from
the excerpt of HC79.A-Z given above. Construct Cutters for main entries based on the
LC Cutter table (assume any new book number constructed from the table does not
conflict with a previously assigned number in the shelflist).

Fundamentals of LC Classification 1
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
FOR DOUBLE SIDED COPY
Instructor Manual Session 10
Exercises

Call Number Record. Main entry is in bold.

HC79 Green, Alex Edward Samuel, 1919- Defense conversion : a
critical East-West experiment / edited by Alex E.S. Green.
Hampton, Va. : A. Deepak Pub., 1995.
SUBJECTS:
Economic conversion.
Defense industries.

HC110 United States. Congressional Budget Office. Economic

conversion : what should be the government's role?
Washington, D.C. : Congress of the United States,
Congressional Budget Office, 1980.
SUBJECTS:
Economic conversion--United States--Congresses.
Trade adjustment assistance--United States--Congresses.

HC110 Economics and the wind / Bradley T. Ewing, Jerry S. Rawls,

and Jamie B. Kruse, editors. New York : Nova Science
Publishers, c2005.
SUBJECTS:
Natural disasters--Economic aspects--United States.
Windstorms--Economic aspects--United States.

HC110 United States. Bureau of the Census. Location of

manufacturing plants by industry, county, and employment size:
1958. [Washington, For sale by the Superintendent of
Documents, U. S. Govt. Print. Off., 1961]
SUBJECTS:
Industrial location--United States.

HC79 Proximity, distance, and diversity : issues on economic

interaction and local development / edited by Arnoud
Lagendijk and Paivi Oinas. Aldershot, Hants, England ;
Burlington, VT : Ashgate, c2005.
SUBJECTS:
Industrial districts--Case studies.
Regional economics--Case studies.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 2
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
FOR DOUBLE SIDED COPY
Instructor Manual Session 10
Exercises
Schedule H: Exercise 2

LC Class # HD9200:

Table H20:

Portion of SCM G 300: Regions and Countries Table:

Supply the call numbers for the items below. Apply the tables above, as necessary. All of
the items will class in HD9200, and that class is given to guide you. Construct Cutters
for main entries based on the LC Cutter table (assume any new book number constructed
from the table does not conflict with a previously assigned number in the shelflist) and on
any tables of general application used.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 3
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
FOR DOUBLE SIDED COPY
Instructor Manual Session 10
Exercises
Call Number Record. Main entry is in bold.
HD9200 Brazil. Comissão Executiva do Plano da Lavoura Cacaueira.
Assistencia de Economia. Boletim estatístico do cacau: exportacão
brasileira de cacau. Brasília : CEPLAC, COGEP, ASSEC.
SUBJECTS:
Cocoa trade--Brazil--Statistics--Periodicals.
Cacao--Brazil--Statistics--Periodicals.

HD9200 Cacau informe economico. Brasília : CEPLAC, Secretaria Geral,

Assessoria de Economia e Estatística.
SUBJECTS: Cocoa trade--Brazil--Periodicals.
Cocoa--Brazil--Periodicals.

HD9200 Study of cocoa production in Brazil. [London] : International

Cocoa Organization, [1989]
SUBJECT: Cocoa trade--Brazil.

HD9200 Garcez, Angelina Nobre Rolim. Joaquim Ignácio Tosta Filho :

biografia / Angelina Nobre Rolim Garcez. Salvador : Governo do
Estado da Bahia, Secretaria da Agricultura, Instituto de Cacau da
Bahia, 1986.
SUBJECTS:
Tosta Filho, Joaquim Ignácio, 1856-1919.
Cocoa trade--Brazil--Bahia (State)--Biography.

HD9200 Garcez, Angelina Nobre Rolim. Bahia cacaueira : um estudo de

história recente / Angelina Nobre Rolim Garcez, Antonio Fernando G.
de Freitas. [Salvador] : Universidade Federal da Bahia, Núcleo de
Publicacões do Centro Editorial e Didático, 1979.
SUBJECTS:
Cocoa trade--Brazil--Bahia (State)--History.
Cocoa trade--Government policy--Brazil--Bahia (State)--History.

HD9200 Cacau no norte do Mato Grosso. [Brasília] : Comissão Executiva

do Plano da Lavoura Cacaueira, Divisão de Comunicacão, 1978.
SUBJECT:
Cocoa trade--Brazil--Mato Grosso (State)

HD9200 Santos, Martinho. Making chocolate : the history of one of Brazil’s

most famous cocoa cooperatives, 2006.
SUBJECTS:
Cooperativa Central do Cacau (Ilhéus, Brazil)
Cocoa trade--Brazil--Bahia (State)--History.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 4
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
FOR DOUBLE SIDED COPY
Instructor Manual Session 11
Schedule N:
Fine Arts

Schedule N: Fine Arts

Session 11

Fundamentals of LC Classification 11-1

Instructor Manual Session 11
Schedule N:
Fine Arts

Schedule N: history
„ The first edition of the N schedule was
published in 1910

„ The latest edition was published in 1996

The schedule was influenced by the fine arts sections of both the Dewey Decimal
Classification and Cutter’s Expansive Classification. The Catalog of the library of the
Kunstwerke-Museum of Berlin was used for special features and the Library of the
Art Institute of Chicago recommended ideas derived from its modification of the
Dewey Decimal Classification. (From Lois Mai Chan. A guide to the Library of
Congress Classification. 5th ed. 1999.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 11-2

Instructor Manual Session 11
Schedule N:
Fine Arts

Subclasses of Class N: Fine arts

„ N Visual arts
„ NA Architecture
„ NB Sculpture
„ NC Drawing, Design, Illustration
„ ND Painting
„ NE Print media
„ NK Decorative arts
„ NX Arts in general
3

There are eight subclasses of Class N. Note that, as is often the case, N stands for both
Class N, Fine Arts, and Subclass N, Visual arts.

There may be confusion between the main class N (Fine arts), the subclass N (Visual
arts), and subclass NX (Arts in general).

The next slide shows scope notes from subclass N and subclass NX.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 11-3

Instructor Manual Session 11
Schedule N:
Fine Arts

Class N (The discipline): Fine arts represents visual arts AND arts.
Subclass N: covers architecture, decorative, and fine arts, but not arts. The note at the
beginning of subclass N reads: “Including architecture, decorative arts, drawing,
painting, prints, and sculpture.”
NX scope note: “Including works dealing with two or more of the fine arts media, i.e.
literature, performing arts (dance, motion pictures, music, opera, theater) or the visual
arts. Works on any one of these subjects are classified with the subject in classes GV,
M, N, P, TR.”
Be sure to mention that the scope for NX reads: “Including works dealing with TWO
OR MORE of the fine arts…”
A work on just one of these subjects removes the item from consideration for NX.
The next slide shows an example of a work that is appropriately classed in NX.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 11-4

Instructor Manual Session 11
Schedule N:
Fine Arts

NX example
NX512.H64 D86 2001
Geoffrey Holder : a life in theater, dance,
and art. c2001.

SUBJECTS:
Holder, Geoffrey, 1930-
Artists--United States--Biography.

Here is a biography for a person who was active in theater, dance, and in art in
general:
•if the person had been active only in theater, a biography would have been classed in
PN;
•if the person had been active only in dance, a biography would have classed in GV,
•and if the person had been active only in fine art, the item most likely would have
classed in subclass N.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 11-5

Instructor Manual Session 11
Schedule N:
Fine Arts

When to use Class N?

„ Works may fit into more than one category

„ A work on photoengraving could be classed

in subclass NE, Engraving or Subclass TR,
Photography

„ A work on aesthetics could be classed in N,

Visual arts, or NX, Arts in general, or BH,
Aesthetics
6

2nd bullet: in this case there is a reference under NE2570 referring the cataloger to
TR925-1050 for works on photoengraving.

3rd bullet: BH includes works on aesthetics in general. N includes works on the

aesthetics of the visual arts. NX has some obsolete numbers, (150)-(159), with a see
reference to Subclass BH, Aesthetics.

Remind the audience that we are applying some of the techniques for determining the
number initially presented in the Principles session.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 11-6

Instructor Manual Session 11
Schedule N:
Fine Arts

When to use Class N (2)

„ Follow instructions in the schedules if
given

„ Example: Where to classify a work on

alphabets?

These next few slides attempt to show some approaches for resolving the question of
where to class a work when more than one class seems possible.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 11-7

Instructor Manual Session 11
Schedule N:
Fine Arts

When to use Class N (3)

Instructions are given in the schedule for alternative numbers, both within the N
schedule and in other schedules, depending on the nature of the work being cataloged.

Classification in NK would be appropriate for works on alphabets from a decorative

arts point of view.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 11-8

Instructor Manual Session 11
Schedule N:
Fine Arts

When to use Class N (4)

Alternative call numbers may be suggested in 053 fields on subject authority records.
We have seen an example of the use of an 053 classification number in a subject
authority record in the Principles session. Now we are discussing Class N, so the
assumption is that we know we want to use a number in Class N. But note how the
authority record above contains five separate 053s; the numbers are scattered across
other schedules, with only one 053 in Class NK. This is a good example of a case
where the 053s in the authority record can help narrow the choice of class for a topic
that may be classed in more than one area.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 11-9

Instructor Manual Session 11
Schedule N:
Fine Arts

When to use Class N (5)

„ Search for similar works that have
already been cataloged

„ Searches could be done on keywords,

subject headings, etc.

10

Another possibility is to do an LC subject headings & LC classification number

correlations search in Classification Web, remembering that correlations are simply
based on what is in the catalog. Correlations may show obsolete subject headings and
class numbers if the headings have not been updated in the database or if the items
have not been reclassed.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 11-10

Instructor Manual Session 11
Schedule N:
Fine Arts

When to use Class N (6)

„ Class N includes an extensive index
„ The index does not refer to external
schedules, but can help resolve placement
problems within N
Flowers
Arts in general: NX650.F7
Etching and aquatint: NE2147
Flowers in art: N7680
Decoration or design: NK1560+
Drawing: NC815
Illumination: ND3340
Painting: ND1400+

This is an excerpt from the Class N Index.

The index for each class appears at the end of the print format of the LC Classification
schedules for that class; all the indexes are searchable by keyword in Classification
Web.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 11-11

Instructor Manual Session 11
Schedule N:
Fine Arts

Order of precedence
„ When art materials, especially
reproductions of works of art, can be
classed in several numbers, an order of
precedence is used

„ If the order of precedence is

contradicted by instructions in the
schedules, the instructions are followed
12

This information on the order of precedence is from Lois Mai Chan’s Guide to the
Library of Congress Classification, 5th ed., 1999.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 11-12

Instructor Manual Session 11
Schedule N:
Fine Arts

Order of precedence (2)

„ Individual artists under the country number

„ Genre by nationality or period (e.g., Italian

sculpture, Medieval caricature)

„ Genre (General) (e.g., Sculpture)

„ Special topics (e.g., Roses in art)

13

In Class N, the intent is to class works by or about an artist in the class that represents
the medium in which the artist is best known. We’ll look at examples of this in the
next set of slides. So the first decision to make when classing an item in Class N is: is
the item about a specific artist? If so, the item will class in the country number
representing the nationality or country of activity of the artist, and in the special
subarrangement for individual artists under that country number.

If no individual artist is represented in an item, genre classes are second and third on
the order of precedence. And if we can identify a particular nationality or period for a
genre, the item classes with that nationality or period; if no nationality or period is
identifiable, then the item classes with the genre in general.

This arrangement used in Class N is unique. Remember that under the general rules of
classification a topic is given precedence. In Class N, however, special topics are the
last choice on the order of precedence.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 11-13

Instructor Manual Session 11
Schedule N:
Fine Arts

Order of precedence (3)

„ Example: A collection of the paintings of
one artist all on the theme of roses is
classed with the individual artist.

„ Example: A collection of paintings by

Italian artists using roses as a theme is
classed with Italian painting.

14

Fundamentals of LC Classification 11-14

Instructor Manual Session 11
Schedule N:
Fine Arts

Individual artists
„ Works by or about an artist are classed
in the class of persons representing the
medium in which the artist is best
known

15

Lois Mai Chan notes the close relationships between Class N and the other two
classification schemes that influenced its development: Dewey Decimal Classification
and Cutter’s Expansive Classification. The influence of the two other schemes may be
observed in the use of the subclasses for different artistic forms or media (refer to
Slide 3). Because of this division, the pattern in the fine arts differs from the patterns
in literature and philosophy. Not all works by and about an individual artist are
classed in the same place. (Lois Mai Chan’s Guide to the Library of Congress
Classification, 5th ed., 1999)

The following slides discuss the treatment of individual artists in Class N.

Classifying works about an artist is easiest when the artist works in only one medium.
Let’s look at an example of that on the next slide.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 11-15

Instructor Manual Session 11
Schedule N:
Fine Arts

Individual artists (2)

Eero Saarinen : shaping the future …

SUBJECT:
Saarinen, Eero, 1910-1961--Exhibitions.

NA (Architecture)
737 (United States, Special artists, A-Z)
.S28 (Saarinen)
A4 (Exhibitions)
2006
16

Eero Saarinen is best known as an architect, so works by or about Saarinen will class
in NA (Architecture), under Architecture of Special Countries, United States.

Saarinen was a Finnish American whose family emigrated to the United States from
Finland when the architect was thirteen years old. Since his creative life was spent in
the United States, his works class with other American architects.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 11-16

Instructor Manual Session 11
Schedule N:
Fine Arts

Individual artists (3)

„ Often an artist works in more than one
medium!
„ So a work dealing with the artist’s
productions in one of those media is
classed with that medium
„ General works about the artist may be
classed in subclass N, under individual
artists by nationality
17

This is often a difficult concept to understand. The general principle in other classes
we’ve looked at is to keep all works by and about a person together. In class N, that
principle is not applied.
In the previous example for Saarinen, we identified an artist who worked primarily in
one medium– Architecture-- and so was best known for his works in that medium. Of
course, there probably are existing sketches or perhaps even a painting by Saarinen,
but he was best known as an architect, so works by and about him class in subclass
NA, Architecture.
But often an artist is active in more than one medium, and is well known for works in
more than one medium. Picasso is a good example of such an artist. The principle at
work here is: for an artist who works in more than one medium, a work dealing with
the artist’s creation in any one of those media classes with the specific medium. This
means, as we will see in the case of Picasso, that works about him are scattered across
the N Schedule, based on the medium described in the item.
But what happens if we have a general work about Picasso that covers not just one of
the media in which he was active, but instead covers details about more than one, or
perhaps even all, of those media? In this case, the item could class in subclass N, but
often a general item will be found in the subclass representing the medium in which
the artist is best known.
The background notes to memo G 330 (Artists) reads: “Works on individual artists
are classed according to the medium described in the work being cataloged. A single
artist may therefore be classed in several different numbers in the N schedule.
General biographies and criticism of artists who work in several media are classed in
N.” (Excerpt)
Fundamentals of LC Classification 11-17
The next slide shows a general work on Picasso
Instructor Manual Session 11
Schedule N:
Fine Arts

Individual artists (4)

Picasso / Henry Gidel.
SUBJECTS:
Picasso, Pablo, 1881-1973.
Artists--France--Biography.

N (Visual arts)
6853 (France, Artists, A-Z)
.P5 (Picasso)
G54 (Gidel)
2002 18

This is a general biography of Picasso. The work discusses the artist’s life and his
artistic production in general, covering most if not all of the media in which he was
active. According to G 330, we class the item in class N. It classes specifically in the
class of persons and nationality number for the artist.

The number 6853 and the Cutter number for Picasso were both derived using tables
that will be discussed later on in the session.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 11-18

Instructor Manual Session 11
Schedule N:
Fine Arts

Individual artists (5)

L’homme au mouton, Picasso...
SUBJECT:
Picasso, Pablo, 1881-1973. Man with a lamb--
Exhibitions.
NB (Sculpture)
553 (France, Special artists, A-Z)
.P45 (Picasso)
A68 (Man with a lamb)
1999
19

This slide shows a work about a sculpture by Picasso entitled Man with a lamb.

The second Cutter for Man with a lamb is A68 because it has to fit into the range
.xA6-xA79 according to Table 6.

No digit is added to the second Cutter to represent the main entry since the main entry
is represented by the first Cutter. When, as in Table N6, the instruction is to
subarrange by title and date, no expansion is allowed for main entry.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 11-19

Instructor Manual Session 11
Schedule N:
Fine Arts

Individual artists (6)

Le carnet de la Californie : dessins...
SUBJECT:
Picasso, Pablo, 1881-1973--Notebooks,
sketchbooks, etc.
NC (Drawing, Design, Illustration)
248 (France, Artists A-Z)
.P5 (Picasso)
A4 (Reproductions, by date)
1999
20

This slide shows a work about some of Picasso’s drawings.

The A4 Cutter number is from table N6.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 11-20

Instructor Manual Session 11
Schedule N:
Fine Arts

Individual artists (7)

Picasso’s brothel : les demoiselles d’Avignon /
Wayne Anderson.
SUBJECT:
Picasso, Pablo, 1881-1973. Demoiselles
d’Avignon.
ND (Painting)
553 (France, Artists, A-Z)
.P5 (Picasso)
A635 (Individual works, alphabetically and date)
2002 21

This slide shows a work about one of Picasso’s paintings

The A Cutter number fits into the range .xA6-.xA79.

No digit is added to the second Cutter to represent the main entry since the main entry
is represented by the first Cutter. When, as in Table N6, the instruction is to
subarrange by title and date, no expansion is allowed for main entry.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 11-21

Instructor Manual Session 11
Schedule N:
Fine Arts

Individual artists (8)

Picasso photographe... / Anne Baldassari.
SUBJECTS:
Photography, Artistic--Exhibitions.
Picasso, Pablo, 1881-1973--Exhibitions.
TR (Photography)
647 (Artistic photography, Photographer A-Z)
.P5 (Picasso)
1994
22

This slide shows a record for an exhibition catalog of photographs by Picasso.

Note that we are now in another schedule, Class T! Artistic photography classes in
TR640-688.

The instructions in the schedule at number 647 say to Cutter by the photographer and
by date of the exhibition.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 11-22

Instructor Manual Session 11
Schedule N:
Fine Arts

Working with tables

„ An important feature of Class N is its
tables

„ Tables N1-N7 and N9-N14 are at the

end of the schedule

„ Note that there is no Table N8

23

In the following slides, the use of tables in Class N will demonstrated using examples.
Examples will move from basic cases to more complex situations.

The use of the tables of general application will also be discussed.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 11-23

Instructor Manual Session 11
Schedule N:
Fine Arts

Working with tables (2)

„ In addition to the tables at the end of the
text, there are also tables embedded
within the text

„ The use of the tables of general

application differs somewhat in Class N

24

The biography table is not used in Class N. Instead there are two internal schedules
for subarranging artists.

There are some limits to the use of the translation table which will be shown in later
examples.

Class N uses its own tables for geographic arrangement but also uses the tables of
general application in some instances. More on this in the examples.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 11-24

Instructor Manual Session 11
Schedule N:
Fine Arts

Working with tables (3)

Example 1:
The anime encyclopedia : a guide to Japanese animation
since 1917 / Jonathan Clements, Helen McCarthy, 2001.

SUBJECT:
Animated films--Japan--Encyclopedias.

NC
1766
.J3
C53
2001

This first example will illustrate the use of a table embedded within the schedule. In
the examples not all subject headings are reproduced in the slides.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 11-25

Instructor Manual Session 11
Schedule N:
Fine Arts

Working with tables (4)

(NC) Animated films

1765 General works

1766.A-.Z By country, A-Z
Under each country
.x General works
.x2A-.x2Z Special artists A-Z
.x3A-.x3Z Special works. By title,
A-Z

The anime encyclopedia…

Animated films--Japan--Encyclopedias.

This slide shows the appropriate section from the subclass NC, Drawing, Design,
Illustrations.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 11-26

Instructor Manual Session 11
Schedule N:
Fine Arts

Working with tables (5)

We now have our base number:

NC The anime encyclopedia…

Animated films--Japan--Encyclopedias.
1766

Our next step is to determine the Cutter

number for Japan from the table of
Cutter numbers for countries, G 300.
27

We know that the first Cutter number will be for Japan since the schedule indicates By
country A-Z. Since the schedule does not refer the cataloger to a table within Class N,
we have to go to the tables of general application in the Subject Cataloging Manual:
Shelflisting. In this case we use G 300, the Regions and Countries Table.

Remind the audience that numbers in G 300 are not used if they conflict with the
shelflist. In such cases the number is adjusted to fit.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 11-27

Instructor Manual Session 11
Schedule N:
Fine Arts

Working with tables (6)

Regions and Countries Table G 300

Israel ..... I75

Italy ....... I8
Ivory Coast, see Côte d’Ivoire
Jamaica . J25
Japan ..... J3
Java see Indonesia
Jerusalem J4
28

This excerpt from the Regions and Countries Table indicates that the Cutter number
for Japan is J3.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 11-28

Instructor Manual Session 11
Schedule N:
Fine Arts

Working with tables (7)

We can now add the first Cutter number
for Japan:

NC
1766
.J3 The anime encyclopedia…
Animated films--Japan--Encyclopedias.

29

Fundamentals of LC Classification 11-29

Instructor Manual Session 11
Schedule N:
Fine Arts

Working with tables (8)

Our second Cutter number will be based on

the internal table under NC1766.

In this case we have a general work.

The anime encyclopedia…

Animated films--Japan--Encyclopedias.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 11-30

Instructor Manual Session 11
Schedule N:
Fine Arts

Working with tables (9)

The .x next to General works refers to the
Cutter number for Japan.

How would .x2A-.x2Z be applied?

The anime art of Hayao Miyazaki / by Dani Cavallaro, 2006.
SUBJECTS:
Miyazaki, Hayao--Criticism and interpretation.

NC1766.J32 M593 2006

In the internal tables, .x always refers to a Cutter number. In some cases you need to
expand the existing Cutter number before adding the second.
Let’s look at another example.
ANIMATION: click to bring in box with new citation
(Be sure to mention that the example illustrated in this slide is for a different work:
one for an individual artist. This example is to show the difference between the
application of .x for General and .x2A-.x2Z for an individual artist).
For example, in the case of a specific artist, we would add 2 to J3 for Japan before
adding the second Cutter for the name of the artist. We would then expand this second
Cutter for the main entry (Cavallaro) and add the date to complete the call number.
ANIMATION: click to bring in call number

Fundamentals of LC Classification 11-31

Instructor Manual Session 11
Schedule N:
Fine Arts

Working with tables (10)

Since we do not have to add anything to the
Cutter number for Japan, we can Cutter for
the Main entry, Clements, and add the date to
complete the call number:

NC
1766
.J3 The anime encyclopedia…
C53 Animated films--Japan--Encyclopedias.
2001 32

Now we are back to our original work, a general work on Anime. .x in the table at
NC1766 is for General works, so the topical portion of the call number is complete.
We now have to Cutter for main entry in order to supply a book number to distinguish
this work from other works on the same topic.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 11-32

Instructor Manual Session 11
Schedule N:
Fine Arts

Working with tables (11)

Example 2:

Paul Andreu, architect / Philip Jodidio, 2004.

SUBJECTS:
Andreu, Paul.
Architecture--France--20th century.

NA
1053
.A49
J64
2004

This example illustrates the use of Table N6 to subarrange individual artists when the
Cutter for the artist is the first Cutter.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 11-33

Instructor Manual Session 11
Schedule N:
Fine Arts

Working with tables (12)

NA Architecture

Europe—Special Countries—France
...
1053.A-.Z Special architects, A-Z
Subarrange by Table N6
Paul Andreu, architect.
Andreu, Paul.
Architecture--France--20th century.
34

This slide shows an excerpt of the NA Subclass with the base number for the Andreu
book.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 11-34

Instructor Manual Session 11
Schedule N:
Fine Arts

Working with tables (13)

We now have our base number. The next step
is to Cutter for the name of the architect,
Andreu. Paul Andreu, architect.
Andreu, Paul.
Architecture--France--20th century.
NA
1053 (Architects, A-Z)
.A49 (Andreu)

The next step is to subarrange using Table N6.

35

Fundamentals of LC Classification 11-35

Instructor Manual Session 11
Schedule N:
Fine Arts

Working with tables (14)

Table N6: Table of Cutters for Artists (First Cutter)

.xA2 Autobiography. By date

.xA3 Letters. By date
.xA35 Speeches, essays, interviews, etc.
by date
.xA4 Reproductions (Collections). By date
Including exhibition catalogs
.xA6-.xA79 Individual works of art. Alphabetically by
title of work of art and date
.xA8-.xZ Biography and criticism
36

This slide reproduces Table N6.

Does this table look familiar? In many ways, it is the same as the Biography Table,
one of the tables of general application. But Table N6 uses different form Cutters than
those on the Biography Table, and although the general principle of “works by the
person preceding works about the person” applies to both tables, the use of the tables
is slightly different. Note especially the form Cutter A4 on Table N6 for
Reproductions (Collections). By date
Including exhibition catalogs. There is not a similar Cutter on the Biography Table,
although there is a form Cutter A2 for Collected Works on the Biography Table. A
similar form Cutter would not necessarily be appropriate on Table N6.
Things to point out:
•By date means just a date is added. No further Cuttering is required.
•In the range .xA6-.xA79 the entire alphabet of possible titles has to fit into the range
A6-A79.
•In the range .xA8-.xZ, Cutters for words beginning with A must be greater than A8.
•The translation table may be applied to .xA8-.xZ. Do not use the translation table
with the subarrangements that are prescribed by date.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 11-36

Instructor Manual Session 11
Schedule N:
Fine Arts

Working with tables (15)

Our work belongs in the subarrangement for
biography and criticism .xA8-.xZ.

Paul Andreu, architect.

NA Andreu, Paul.
1053 Architecture--France--20th century.

.A49
J64 (Cutter for the main entry, Jodidio)
2004
37

The subarrangement .xA8-.xZ is by main entry.

The call number is now complete with the addition of the date of publication.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 11-37

Instructor Manual Session 11
Schedule N:
Fine Arts

Working with tables (16)

Example 3:
Painting a people : Maurycy Gottlieb and Jewish art /
Ezra Mendelsohn, 2002.

SUBJECTS:
Gottlieb, Maurycy, 1856-1879--Criticism and
interpretation.
Art, Jewish--Galicia (Poland and Ukraine)

ND
955
.P63
G6636
2002

This example illustrates the use of Table N7 for subarranging individual artists when
the Cutter for the artist is the second Cutter.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 11-38

Instructor Manual Session 11
Schedule N:
Fine Arts

Working with tables (17)

ND Painting
History—Special countries—Poland

955.P63 Special artists, A-Z

Subarrange by Table N7 at
the end of the schedule
Painting a people : Maurycy Gottlieb and Jewish art...
Gottlieb, Maurycy, 1856-1879--Criticism and interpretation.
Art, Jewish--Galicia (Poland and Ukraine)

39

In this case the Cutter number for Poland is printed in the schedule. Otherwise, one
would have to determine the Cutter number using Table N5 and another table within
Table N5. A later example will illustrate using tables at the end of the schedules for
determining Cutter numbers for countries.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 11-39

Instructor Manual Session 11
Schedule N:
Fine Arts

Working with tables (18)

We now have our base number and the first
Cutter number.
Painting a people : Maurycy Gottlieb and Jewish art...
ND Gottlieb, Maurycy, 1856-1879--Criticism and interpretation.
Art, Jewish--Galicia (Poland and Ukraine)
955
.P63 (Poland, special artists A-Z)

We next need to Cutter for the artist and use

table N7 to subarrange.
40

The Cutter for Poland is .P6-.P63. In this case, we did not refer to the Regions and
Countries Table to identify a Cutter for Poland, since it was printed in the schedule
itself. Table N15 is applied to the range ND955.P6-.P63, resulting in the .x3 portion of
the Cutter (.P63) indicating Special artists, A-Z. Table N15 also instructs us to
subarrange individual artists by Table N7.

It would also be possible in this case to Cutter for the region Galicia instead of for
Poland, since the extent of the region covers more than one political jurisdiction.
However, if Galicia were chosen as the Cutter, it would need to be proposed
editorially to be added to ND955.

There is no set rule on whether to prefer classification by Region or by Country in this

case, and shelflist precedence often may be a guiding factor.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 11-40

Instructor Manual Session 11
Schedule N:
Fine Arts

Working with tables (19)

Table N7: Table of Cutters for Artists (Second
Cutter)
x Autobiography, letters, speeches,
essays, interviews, etc. By date
x2 Reproductions. By date
Including collections, individual
works of art, exhibition catalogs
x3-x39 Biography and criticism.
Alphabetically by author
41

Things to point out about this table:

It is used to subarrange a second Cutter number so there is no dot before the x.

When subarranging for biography and criticism, the entire alphabet must fit in the
range 3-39.
The Translation Table may be applied to x3-x39, but not to x and x2 (both prescribed
by date)

Fundamentals of LC Classification 11-41

Instructor Manual Session 11
Schedule N:
Fine Arts

Working with tables (20)

We are now ready to supply the second Cutter and
complete the call number.

Painting a people : Maurycy Gottlieb and Jewish art / Ezra

Mendelsohn, 2002.
ND Gottlieb, Maurycy, 1856-1879--Criticism and interpretation.
Art, Jewish--Galicia (Poland and Ukraine)
955
.P63
G6636 (G66=Gottlieb, 36=expansion for Mendelsohn)
2002

42

After Cuttering for Gottlieb, we expand the Cutter for the main entry using the range
x3-x39 from Table N7. The cataloger chose 36 to represent Mendelsohn.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 11-42

Instructor Manual Session 11
Schedule N:
Fine Arts

Working with tables (21)

Example 4:
California pottery : from missions to Modernism / by Bill
Stern ; photographs by Peter Brenner, 2001.

SUBJECTS:
Pottery, American--California--Catalogs.
Pottery, American--California--20th century--Catalogs.

NK
4025
.C2
S74
2001

This example illustrates the use of Table N2, one of the tables of regions and
countries, as well as the table of general application, G 302 for American States and
Canadian Provinces.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 11-43

Instructor Manual Session 11
Schedule N:
Fine Arts

Working with tables (22)

NK Decorative Arts, Applied Arts, Decoration and
Ornament
...
4001-4185 Special countries
Subarrange by Table N2 at the
end of the text
Add country number in table to
NK4000

California pottery …
Pottery, American--California--Catalogs.
Pottery, American--California--20th century--Catalogs.

This slide shows the portion of Subclass NK with the range of numbers appropriate
for the work we are cataloging. We need to refer to Table N2 for the number
representing California and then to add that number to NK 4000 to form the base
number.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 11-44

Instructor Manual Session 11
Schedule N:
Fine Arts

Working with tables (23)

Table N2: Table of Regions and Countries (200 Numbers)
…
United States
05 General works
06 Colonial period; 18th (and early 19th) century
...
25.A-.W States, A-W
Each state may be subarranged:
.x General works
.x2A-.x2Z Local (other than
cities), A-Z
27.A-Z Cities, A-Z

This slide shows an excerpt from Table N2. Number 25 is the number for American
states. You may wonder why the Local breakdown under States at 25 prohibits cities
from being used under the local number for states. That is because there is a separate
number for cities at 27.A-Z.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 11-45

Instructor Manual Session 11
Schedule N:
Fine Arts

Working with tables (24)

We first need to construct the base number.
Since our book deals with pottery from
California we want the number 25 from
Table N2 for American states A-Z.
The instructions in the schedule say to add
this number to NK4000
California pottery …
Pottery, American--California--Catalogs.
Pottery, American--California--20th century--Catalogs.
46

Refer to the slide Tables (22) for the schedule excerpt on adding the number to
NK4000.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 11-46

Instructor Manual Session 11
Schedule N:
Fine Arts

Working with tables (25)

We now have our base number:

NK
4025

California pottery …
Pottery, American--California--Catalogs.
Pottery, American--California--20th century--Catalogs.
47

We arrived at this number by adding the number 25 from the table to 4000 as
instructed in the schedule (see Tables (22)-(23)).

Fundamentals of LC Classification 11-47

Instructor Manual Session 11
Schedule N:
Fine Arts

Working with tables (26)

The next step is to Cutter for the state,
California.
Since there is no provision for Cuttering for
states in the table, we need to consult the
table of general application, G 302.

California pottery …
Pottery, American--California--Catalogs.
Pottery, American--California--20th century--Catalogs.
48

Whenever it is appropriate to use tables within the schedule, instructions as to which

table to use are included within the text.

Remind the audience that numbers in G 302 are not used if they conflict with the
shelflist. In such cases the number is adjusted to fit.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 11-48

Instructor Manual Session 11
Schedule N:
Fine Arts

Working with tables (27)

G 302 American States and Canadian
Provinces

Alabama.................. A2
Alaska..................... A4
Arizona.................... A6
Arkansas................. A8
California................. C2
...
49

From this excerpt from G 302 we can see that the Cutter for California is C2.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 11-49

Instructor Manual Session 11
Schedule N:
Fine Arts

Working with tables (28)

We now have our first Cutter number:

NK
4025
.C2
California pottery …
Pottery, American--California--Catalogs.
Pottery, American--California--20th century--Catalogs.

50

Fundamentals of LC Classification 11-50

Instructor Manual Session 11
Schedule N:
Fine Arts

Working with tables (29)

We next need to subarrange according to
the table under the number 25 in Table
N2:

.x General works
.x2A-x2Z Local (other than cities), A-Z
California pottery …
Pottery, American--California--Catalogs.
Pottery, American--California--20th century--Catalogs.
51

The instructor may want to refer back to the slide Tables (23) to show where this table
was.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 11-51

Instructor Manual Session 11
Schedule N:
Fine Arts

Working with tables (30)

We have a general work, so we do not need to expand the
Cutter for California.

The second Cutter then is for the main entry, Stern.

NK
4025
.C2 (California, general works)
S74 (Stern)
2001 California pottery …
Pottery, American--California--Catalogs.
Pottery, American--California--20th century--Catalogs.
52

The first Cutter remains .C2 because general works are .x and .x in the table stands for
the Cutter for the State.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 11-52

Instructor Manual Session 11
Schedule N:
Fine Arts

Summary
„ Not all numbers in Class N are as difficult as
these examples
„ If you have to use multiple tables, just
proceed step-by-step according to
instructions
„ Don’t forget the tables of general application
„ Remember the order of precedence used in
Class N

53

3rd bullet: However, the biography table is not used in Class N. Tables N6 and N7 are
used instead.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 11-53

Instructor Manual Session 11
Schedule N:
Fine Arts

Exercises

54

Attendees will need to have the LC Cutter Table out.

Go over the instructions with attendees. Point out that the main entry for each title is
in bold.

It is wise to work through the first title in each exercise as a group, so that everyone is
clear on what they need to do. After that, instructors may wish to give attendees time
to complete the exercises on their own, or to continue working through as a group.

Answers are given in slides in a separate file. Manuals also have answers printed in
the appendix.
In answer slides, each of the lines in the exercise answers flies in to the slide, with the
completed call number in blue flying in at the end.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 11-54

Instructor Manual Session 11
Exercises
Schedule N: Exercise 1

LC Class # N6537.A-Z:

Table N6:

Complete the call numbers for the items below. Apply the table above, as necessary. The
subject of each of these entries is an American artist, and each item will class in N6537.
That number is given to guide you. Construct Cutters for main entries based on the LC
Cutter table (assume any new book number constructed from the table does not conflict
with a previously assigned number in the shelflist).

Call Number Record. Main entry is in bold.

N6537 Sea, earth, sky : the art of Walter Anderson : an exhibition

at the Mississippi State Historical Museum, Jackson,
Mississippi. [Jackson] : Mississippi Dept. of Archives and
History, c1980.

SUBJECT:
Anderson, Walter Inglis, 1903-1965--Exhibitions.

N6537 Maurer, Christopher. Fortune's favorite child : the uneasy life

of Walter Anderson / Christopher Maurer. Jackson : University
Press of Mississippi, c2003.

SUBJECTS:
Anderson, Walter Inglis, 1903-1965.
Artists--United States--Biography.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 1
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
FOR DOUBLE SIDED COPY
Instructor Manual Session 11
Exercises

N6537 Warhol, Andy, 1928-1987. Andy Warhol, conversation with

Eddy Devolder = Andy Warhol, conversation avec Eddy
Devolder. Gerpinnes, Belgique : Tandem, 1989.

SUBJECTS:
Warhol, Andy, 1928-1987--Interviews.
Artists--United States--Interviews.

N6537 Warhol, Andy, 1928-1987. Andy Warhol, work and play.

Burlington, Vt. : Robert Hull Fleming Museum, c2003.

SUBJECTS:
Warhol, Andy, 1928-1987--Exhibitions.
Warhol, Andy, 1928-1987--Interviews.
Artists--United States--Interviews.

N6537 Warhol, Andy, 1928-1987. Global Warhol / [catalogo a cura di

Mirella Panepinto]. Milano : Electa, c2003.

SUBJECT:
Warhol, Andy, 1928-1987--Exhibitions.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 2
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
FOR DOUBLE SIDED COPY
Instructor Manual Session 11
Exercises
Schedule N: Exercise 2

LC Class # NA701-1614:

Portion of Table N5:

Table N15:

Fundamentals of LC Classification 3
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
FOR DOUBLE SIDED COPY
Instructor Manual Session 11
Exercises

Table N7:

Complete the call numbers for the items below. Apply the tables above, as necessary.
Every item in this exercise will class in the same number; use the schedule at NA701-
1614 and Table N5 to determine the class. Construct Cutters for main entries based on
the LC Cutter table (assume any new book number constructed from the table does not
conflict with a previously assigned number in the shelflist).

Call Number Record. Main entry is in bold.

Kiel, Machiel. Ottoman architecture in Albania, 1385-1912 /

Machiel Kiel. Besiktas, Istanbul : Research Centre for Islamic
History, Art and Culture, 1990.

SUBJECTS:
Architecture, Ottoman--Albania.
Architecture, Islamic--Albania.

Mohorovicić, Andro. [Graditeljstvo u Hrvatskoj. English]

Architecture in Croatia : architecture and town planning / Andre
Mohorovicić ; [translated by Nedeljka Batinović]. Zagreb :
Croatian Academy of Sciences and Arts : Skolska knjiga, 1994.

SUBJECTS:
Architecture--Croatia.
City planning--Croatia.

Medine architektura Lietuvoje = Wooden architecture in

Lithuania / [sudarymas Alfredas Jomantas]. Vilnius : Vaga,
2002.

SUBJECTS:
Building, Wooden--Lithuania.
Vernacular architecture--Lithuania.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 4
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
FOR DOUBLE SIDED COPY
Instructor Manual Session 11
Exercises

Luksionyte-Tolvaisiene, Nijole, 1954- Istorizmas ir modernas

Vilniaus architekturoje / Nijole Luksionyte-Tolvaisiene. Vilnius
: Vilniaus Dailes akademija, 2000.

SUBJECTS:
Architecture--Lithuania--Vilnius--History.
Church architecture--Lithuania--Vilnius.

Levandauskas, Vytautas. Architektas Karolis Podcasinskis /

Vytautas Levandauskas. Vilnius : Vilniaus Dailes akademijos
leidykla, 1994.

SUBJECTS:
Podczaszyński, Karol, 1790-1860--Criticism and interpretation.
Architecture--Lithuania--19th century.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 5
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
FOR DOUBLE SIDED COPY
Instructor Manual Session 12
Local Policy Decisions

Local Policy Decisions

Session 12

Fundamentals of LC Classification 12-1

Instructor Manual Session 12
Local Policy Decisions

About local decisions

„ Consider user needs
„ Consider the benefits of following
standards rather than local practice
„ Local deviations from standard
practices cost time and money
„ Be sure to document your decisions!

In this session we will focus on local policy decisions. In contrast to the individual
classification decisions you make when you catalog a specific resource, these are
classification decisions that are intended to be applied under defined circumstances to
narrow or broad ranges of material that may be encountered in cataloging materials
collected by your library. These decisions are generally made by library management.
Some of you may be from small libraries where you are responsible for both
cataloging and management; in that case, you will need to make some of these
decisions. If so, you will need to keep in mind some of the points listed above.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 12-2

Instructor Manual Session 12
Local Policy Decisions

Libraries have options

(if they have the resources)
„ Choice of classification number
„ Classify or not?
„ LC classification vs. local number
„ Alternative LC class numbers
„ Shelflisting decisions
„ Work marks
„ Editing book numbers
„ Additions to call numbers
3

Local policy decisions for classification generally fall into two broad categories –
choice of classification number and shelflisting.
We’ll start by looking at the various choices libraries can make regarding the class
number.
The following slides provide additional detail and examples of these and other
examples of decisions that are sometimes made locally.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 12-3

Instructor Manual Session 12
Local Policy Decisions

Classification options
„ To classify or not to classify?
„ LC or local scheme?
„ Alternative call numbers – form or
subject?
„ Children’s materials
„ Series (serial or multipart) classed
separately or together?
„ Case-by-case deviations
4

ANIMATION: click to bring in each bullet

Local decisions relating to choice of class number.
Alternative numbers – classes Z and G

Fundamentals of LC Classification 12-4

Instructor Manual Session 12
Local Policy Decisions

To classify or not to classify

„ If a resource is not integrated with the print
collection, it may not be classified at all
„ Remote access electronic resources are often
given a generic call number such as “Online
Access” or “Internet”
„ Special formats are often shelved separately and
may be assigned accession numbers, e.g.
microforms, videos, CDs & CD-ROMs
„ Space planning is facilitated by use of sequential
numbering (e.g. microform, non-browsable print
collections)
5

Sometimes classification appears to be associated by library decision makers with the

print collection. Because classification is often associated with the physical
experience of browsing, special formats and collections that are not integrated with
the main print browsing area are often excluded from classification, on the grounds
that the patrons will associate a class number only with items in the main print
collection.
In turn, technical services may decide not to classify non-print formats because
cataloging copy for these categories of material often lacks call numbers.
For some types of material that tend to come in standard containers, sequential
numbers are more efficient than classification when storage space is limited and the
number of items is large, as is the case with microfilm and some special print
collections.
Taken as a whole, however, the bias against use of classification for non-print and
special formats may be, primarily, an unfortunate legacy from the card catalog and
early OPACs. As we’ve seen with the Endeca example in the first session, virtual
browsing can allow us to integrate all formats to enhance the user’s discovery
experience.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 12-5

Instructor Manual Session 12
Local Policy Decisions

Remote storage issues

„ Do materials being cataloged for storage
need to be classified?
„ Collections often not shelved by call number
„ Not browsable
„ Items in remote storage are included in
collection analyses, which may be done on
the basis of the class number
„ Collection analysis used in library accreditation

Offsite collections are a more recent instance where classification has become an issue
because of a lack of integration with the main print collection. Because items in
remote storage cannot be browsed physically, the need for classification is often
questioned.
The digitization of the catalog allows the kind of comprehensive collection analysis
that would benefit from the classification of offsite print and non-print collections.
Programs going up for accreditation are usually required to include library support in
their analyses, and materials in remote storage should also be considered.
Remote storage demonstrates that classification does not have to mean physical
location; remote storage items are often shelved by size and subarranged by barcode,
but records for the items can still be indexed separately by class number.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 12-6

Instructor Manual Session 12
Local Policy Decisions

LC classification or local
scheme?
„ Non-print or special print collections are
sometimes assigned local classification
numbers because
„ LC schedules do not provide classification, e.g.
newspapers, feature films, sound recordings
„ Specialized collections need to expand certain
areas of LC classification, e.g., computer science,
QA76.76.O63
„ Donors, faculty, university, community or other
special interests mandate use of local
arrangement
7

As an alternative to no classification at all, non-print and special print collections are

sometimes assigned local call numbers.
If the schedules do not classify certain formats or categories—feature films and
newspapers are two examples-- libraries may develop quasi-LC (LC-like) numbers to
integrate these resources with the rest of the collection. If the format or category is not
integrated with the main print collection, the library may simply provide a locally
developed classification scheme to address the number gap.
A variant of the local practice of filling a number gap with an “LC-like” number
occurs when specialized collections create extensions of previously existing LC
numbers usually to provide more detailed subarrangement. The LC class numbers
available for computer science are limited, so some specialized libraries have
expanded QA75.5-76.95. For example, QA76.76.O63 – a single number for all
operating systems may be inadequate for computer science collections that need to
group by type of OS (DOS, UNIX, Windows, Mac OS, etc.)
Finally, classification decisions can sometimes be purely “political.” Classification
can be determined by whomever controls the purse strings. A university library may
decide to create a quasi-LT number and class all of its theses to this number rather
than to the specific subject class.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 12-7

Instructor Manual Session 12
Local Policy Decisions

Example: botany of California

QK149 General works
<LC Classification>
QK149.2 Northern California
<LOCAL>
QK149.4 Southern California
<LOCAL>
QK149.6.A-Z By county or region, A-
<LOCAL> Z
8

In this example, a California science library has added local extensions to QK149,
botany of California, to bring out the major California regions and to allow for more
specificity for localities.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 12-8

Instructor Manual Session 12
Local Policy Decisions

Local extension of LCC

„ Wildflowers of Monterey County : a field
companion / photographs by David J.
Gubernick … Carmel, Calif. : Carmel
Pub. Co. … 2002
„ LC: QK149 .G83 2002

„ LOCAL: QK149.6.M8 G82 2002

Here’s an example of the local extension. The first number is from the LC record. The
second number allows the cataloger to differentiate the botany of Monterey County
from the general botany of California, and also to bring together or collocate all books
about Monterey County flowers.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 12-9

Instructor Manual Session 12
Local Policy Decisions

Examples: Local university

departmental classifications
„ Supernovae / Albert Petschek, editor. New York :
Springer-Verlag, 1990.
LC: QB843 S95 S967 1990
LOCAL: 56 QB843 S95 S967 1990

„ Hyperbolic geometry / James W. Anderson. London :

Springer, c1999.
LC: QA685 .A54 1999
LOCAL: Geom An23h

10

Here are two examples where university faculty departments use different local
classification schemes instead of or supplementary to LC classification.
In the first example, the LC call number assigned by the catalog department is ignored
and the books are shelved according to a numerical scheme devised by the astronomy
department and perhaps known only to them and the departmental secretary. The
departmental classification number is inserted above the LC classification number.
Perhaps the LC number is used for subarrangement under the broader departmental
classification, or perhaps the subarrangment is by title.
In the second example, the library of the mathematics faculty has a more intuitive
home grown classification with a kind of Cutter number that includes the author main
entry and the first letter of the title.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 12-10

Instructor Manual Session 12
Local Policy Decisions

Subject bibliographies: Z or ?
„ LC classes all bibliographies in Z with the
exception of law and music
„ LC includes an alternative class number
„ Bibliography of astronomy.
„ 050 00 $a Z5151 $b .S38 1982 $a QB43.2

„ Z5151 HIERARCHY: Subject bibliography –

Astronomy – General bibliography
„ QB43.2 HIERARCHY: Astronomy – General
works, treatises & advanced textbooks – 1970-
2000
11

ANIMATION: click to bring in each bullet

A decision any library that uses LC classification has to make – form or subject
classification for subject bibliographies?
As the example illustrates, LC provides an alternative class number, not an alternative
call number, so libraries that decide to use the alternative number will need to
construct the rest of the call number.
Some libraries that choose the alternative class number then add a local Cutter such as
Z9 to the end of the local call number to shelve all bibliographies at the end of each
subject class.
Some libraries designate only a selected range of the bibliographies for the alternative
classification treatment; everything above Z8000 for example.
Ask class about local policies?

Fundamentals of LC Classification 12-11

Instructor Manual Session 12
Local Policy Decisions

Z or ?
„ Considerations for making this decision include:
„ Physical separation of materials:

„ different browsing areas

„ different buildings
„ Will the materials circulate or not?
„ Additional shelflisting:
„ alternative numbers don’t include a Cutter number
„ libraries choosing subject over form commit
cataloging staff to add them
12

Physical location – library systems with separate departmental or subject-oriented

libraries or with multiple buildings should consider the ramifications of where the
materials will end up.
Institutions with separate science libraries based on LC class, for example, may find it
inconvenient to have the bibliographies in Z, because the bibliographies could be
separated from their subject materials. If atlases or bibliographies are automatically
considered reference materials and non-circulating, this may influence the choice of
class number, allowing libraries to class a “social science” item in a science reference
collection.
SCM: Classification, F150 discusses the use of alternative numbers for bibliography
and a chart of alternative numbers for special types of materials

Fundamentals of LC Classification 12-12

Instructor Manual Session 12
Local Policy Decisions

Subject atlases: G or ?
„ LC classes all atlases in G
„ Locally, should subject atlases be classed by form in
G, or with the subject they illustrate?
„ LC does not provide alternative numbers for atlases
„ Considerations for making this decision include:
„ Physical location of materials – will classing these
materials with their form cause an onerous physical
separation from subject materials?
„ Will the materials circulate or not?
„ Because atlases usually don’t have an alternate
number, libraries choosing subject over form commit
cataloging staff to provide call numbers 13

ANIMATION: click to bring in each sub-bullet

As with subject bibliographies, libraries should decide where these materials best
serve their patrons.

If classing subject atlases in G will place them in a science collection or separate

map/geography library, when the people who need them are historians, area specialists
or social scientists, will this be helpful to patrons?

Institutions with separate libraries based on LC class, for example, may find it
inconvenient to have all atlases in G because they could be separated from their
subject materials. If atlases or bibliographies are automatically considered reference
materials and non-circulating, this may influence the choice of class number, since
most users do not consider the physical separation of reference materials from the
main collection to be a burden.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 12-13

Instructor Manual Session 12
Local Policy Decisions

G or ? (Example 1)

„ Atlas of world art

„ LC call number: G1046.E1 O9 2004
„ HIERARCHY: Atlases – World atlases –
Atlases of the Earth – By subject – Other
subject atlases – Human & cultural geography.
Anthropogeography. Human ecology – General
„ Possible alternate: N5300 .A85 2004
„ HIERARCHY: Visual arts – History – General
works
14

As with bibliographies, alternative numbers for atlases often make use of General
works, or equivalent, numbers.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 12-14

Instructor Manual Session 12
Local Policy Decisions

G or ? (Example 2)
„ Atlas of the North American Indian
„ LC call number: G1106.E1 W3 2000

„ HIERARCHY: Atlases – By region or country –

America. Western Hemisphere – North America
– By subject – Human & cultural geography.
Anthropogeography. Human ecology – General
„ Possible alternate: E77 .W2 2000
„ HIERARCHY: America – Indians of North
America – General works – Comprehensive
works
15

Fundamentals of LC Classification 12-15

Instructor Manual Session 12
Local Policy Decisions

Children’s materials in PZ
„ For children’s materials, libraries may decide
to:
„ Class in Dewey: to familiarize students in teacher
education programs with the classification scheme
used in most school libraries
„ Reclassify to non-juvenile in order to collocate
juvenile and adult belle-lettres, e.g. Lemony
Snicket to Daniel Handler’s number

16

ANIMATION: click to bring in each sub-bullet

Another situation where a decision may be made to systematically deviate from an LC
classification decision occurs with juvenile resources.
For local use, children’s materials in PZ are sometimes reclassed, particularly if
children are not the primary user group. Since books about children’s authors are not
assigned PZ numbers, this collocates an author’s juvenile and non-juvenile works as
well as all books about the author’s works, juvenile and non-juvenile.
Lemony Snicket: PZ7.S6795
Daniel Handler (and books about Daniel Handler or Lemony Snicket): PS3558.A4636

Fundamentals of LC Classification 12-16

Instructor Manual Session 12
Local Policy Decisions

Local reclassification to PZ
„ The Underground Railroad for kids … /
Mary Kay Carson.
„ Primary Subject Heading:
„ Underground Railroad--Juvenile literature
„ LC: E450 .C45 2005
„ LOCAL: PZ9.C37 U5 2005
„ Classes all juvenile history materials together
„ BUT uses an obsolete number and extension
developed and used locally

17

On the other hand, because PZ is now restricted to juvenile belle-lettres, some

libraries may decide to apply local extensions of the PZ to pull juvenile materials out
of the adult collection and collocate them with juvenile belle lettres.
Using the subject schedules keeps all materials on antislavery movements together,
but shelves juvenile and adult materials together. This may serve a specialized
population quite well, but may not be acceptable in a general collection where adults
and children may prefer to find “their” books grouped together.
An alternative PZ number uses an obsolete LC number for juvenile history materials
and double cutters, first for author then for title. A disadvantage is that works of
history are arranged in no logical order.
Another alternative would be to use Dewey classification for all juvenile materials,
but this would require that catalogers learn two different classification schemes.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 12-17

Instructor Manual Session 12
Local Policy Decisions

Series: class together or

separately?
„ Libraries may also choose to classify series
together or separately
„ 050 00 $a QA3 $b .L28 no. 1835 $a QA243
Geometric methods in the algebraic theory of
quadratic forms …
SERIES: Lecture notes in mathematics (Springer-Verlag) ;
1835 [before LC policy change]
„ 050 00 $a QA913 $b .M385 2006
Mathematical foundation of turbulent viscous flows
…
SERIES: Lecture notes in mathematics (Springer-Verlag) ;
1871 [following LC policy change]
18

ANIMATION: click to bring in each sub-bullet

Another common local decision: does the library classify series together or
separately?
Until the 2006 policy change, the Library of Congress classed together many of the
titles in the Springer-Verlag “Lecture notes” series. In the first example, cataloged
around 2004, LC classed together Lecture notes in mathematics. In the 050 fields of
the records for the individual volumes in the series cataloged before the policy
change, the same call number QA3.L28 is assigned; the individual volumes are
distinguished by the series volume number, as we have seen in examples from the
earlier session. QA3= Mathematics--Collected works. LC would provide an
alternative number in a second 050 $a, in this case QA243, for libraries that preferred
to class the analytic volume separately. QA243=Mathematics--Algebra--Number
theory--Forms. (Including quadratic, bilinear forms)

The second example* reflects the 2006 policy change. LC now classes all series
separately, including Lecture notes in mathematics. PS: the LC policy change also
ended the practice of tracing series in LC cataloging, but the policy was not applied to
the 2006 record.

*QA913=Mathematics--Analytic mechanics--Mechanics of deformable bodies--Fluid

mechanics--Fluid dynamics. Hydrodynamics--Kinematics of fluids. Irrotational
motions.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 12-18

Instructor Manual Session 12
Local Policy Decisions

Series: class together or

separately? (2)
„ Considerations include:
„ Broad or narrow subject focus for the

entire series
„ Availability of cataloging copy

„ Are your catalogers comfortable with

specialized subject areas of the

series?
19

Although the recent LC policy change highlights the issue, the decision to class-
together or separately has always been a local decision.
Series can be monographic series (subset of serials – a series with no predetermined
conclusion) or multipart items. If the subject content of the volumes in a series is
diverse, classifying them together results in a loss of specificity in classification. On
the other hand, if the subject content of the volumes is similar, each volume could end
up with the same class number, resulting in a lot more unnecessary and labor-
intensive shelflisting (because each volume would require a unique book number).
Although national series authority records include a default classification decision, the
decision recorded in the authority record is not considered to be a national standard
that libraries are required or expected to follow. However, libraries will often follow
the path of least resistance and accept the default decision. If the library expects to use
cataloging by other libraries, accepting the default usually means fewer situations
where the call number included with the cataloging copy will require reclassification.
On the other hand, if the series is highly specialized, cataloging copy may not be
readily available. If the schedules require a significant amount of specialized
knowledge of the subject to apply, classing together could be a workaround.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 12-19

Instructor Manual Session 12
Local Policy Decisions

Series: class together or

separately? (3)
„ Additional considerations include:
„ Local usage has a role in the decision

„ Do users search by series?

„ Is the entire series collected?

„ Different policy for multipart items?

„ Complete works of Charles Dickens
[multipart] vs.
„ The Dickens bibliographies [series]

20

Local needs will play a part in the decision. Some of the Springer-Verlag Lecture
notes series number in the thousands. One science library will class a big Springer-
Verlag series together because the public services staff know that their users tend to
go to the shelves with a series and volume number citation, or because it was easier to
use the classed-together LC number. Another library collects only selected items in
the series and finds the classed-together number to be too broad, so the library classes
its series volumes separately.
Finally, series decisions can be affected by mode of issuance. A multipart set of an
author’s works may be a more likely candidate for classing together than a
monographic series where each volume has a different author and volumes in the
series are issued indefinitely. Here even reserving shelf space is a consideration.
(Multipart commentaries on each book of the Bible are often classed-together as
well.)

Fundamentals of LC Classification 12-20

Instructor Manual Session 12
Local Policy Decisions

Case-by-case deviations
„ Classing a serial special issue as an
individual monograph
„ Broad classification for materials receiving
minimal-level cataloging
„ Classing to place rather than specific topic
when the topic has no arrangement for place
„ E.g., Special collection in Southeast Asia classes
to Indonesia rather than to a more specific topic

21

Series classification decisions are somewhere on the borderline between local policy
and individual judgment. The department usually defines broad policy (often factoring
in inertia) but with room for individual judgment and special cases. Here are some
other instances when a department or sometimes the individual cataloger makes ad
hoc policy decisions to deviate from standard LCC practice.
The first example is probably quite familiar.
The second example will sometimes occur when there is no expertise in a particular
language but the cataloging unit is unwilling to class the materials as a collection.
Although one of the basic principles of LCC is to class using the specific number
available, lack of linguistic expertise will sometimes make it a safer decision to class
to the broader topic.
The third example is not technically a deviation, since an exception is allowed when
there is precedence in the shelflist. However, area special collections may choose to
class to place even though the shelflist as a whole gives precedence to topic.
Perhaps you can think of other situations?

Fundamentals of LC Classification 12-21

Instructor Manual Session 12
Local Policy Decisions

Shelflisting decisions
„ Copy cataloging decisions
„ Work marks & other additions to call
numbers
„ Supplements to serials
„ Serial title changes
„ Obsolete call numbers
„ Shared cataloging issues
22

This category covers a wide range of decisions related to shelf placement and
shelflisting, from adding work marks to whether or not to reclassify as class numbers
change.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 12-22

Instructor Manual Session 12
Local Policy Decisions

Copy cataloging decisions

„ Accept call number “as is” without
checking, or,
„ Verify that the call number fits the local
shelflist, sliding Cutter if necessary, or,
„ Accept call number “as is” but apply
local additions where appropriate

23

ANIMATION: click to bring in each bullet

Major consideration in this decision – how much time do you want your copy
catalogers to spend on call numbers?
No checking is fastest, but could cause duplication of call numbers and a loss of
collocation; depending on your situation this could be a problem – or not. You may
also be accepting other libraries’ local decisions which may or may not work for your
collection.
Checking the shelflist takes time but prevents duplication and may keep editions
together, as well as related items. But perhaps the cost of shelflisting outweighs the
cost of duplication, or perhaps your users prefer to have their books cataloged quickly
rather than have all books about AACR2 sitting together neatly on the shelf.
Often, copy cataloging will accept a number “as is” but still have to decide whether to
include local additions.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 12-23

Instructor Manual Session 12
Local Policy Decisions

Additions to call numbers

„ Adding an “x” to the Cutter number or date
„ Distinguishes call numbers assigned locally from
those assigned by LC or another library
„ Shelflisting of call numbers from LC copy can be
bypassed
„ Prevents duplicate call numbers
„ Downside: lack of collocation; split files
„ Editions not kept together
„ Works of and about authors and artists not kept
together
„ Difficulty inserting new numbers if there is no
consistent order 24

Use of a specially designated local work letter is a compromise many libraries employ
to avoid time spent shelflisting and resolving duplicate call numbers.
Many libraries add an “x” to locally-assigned call numbers; this creates a unique
number and prevents duplication in case LC later uses that call number for another
work. The practice is often extended to shelf ready commercial processing, since the
expense of vendor shelflisting may outweigh the economies of outsourcing.
The downside is that x numbers disrupt the order of the shelflist. For the user,
browsing is harder to do; for the cataloger, inserting new numbers may involve more
complex decisions.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 12-24

Instructor Manual Session 12
Local Policy Decisions

More additions to call

numbers
„ Oversize designations placing items on
special shelving nearby
„ Media labels to highlight the carrier (DVD,
CD, VHS)
„ Compensating for inadequacies in the OPAC
profile or software
„ Sub-collections not in the library’s OPAC

profile
„ Special circulation conditions (Non-

Circulating)
25

As with the x technique, these additions do not change the classification or call
number as such, but simply add more baggage at the beginning or end. Most of these
additions are made to facilitate shelving and retrieval.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 12-25

Instructor Manual Session 12
Local Policy Decisions

Additions to call numbers:

Examples (1)

26

Here is an example from the Yale University Library online catalog.

The first item listed (Bandits [videorecording]) has in its call number a media label
(DVD) added at the end of the call number. You see that the video shelves next to a
book about the movie. <This also demonstrates extension of an LC class number
beyond its original intent for local use. In the schedules, PN1997 is intended for film
scripts and books about the film.>
At this particular library, media items such as DVDs and sound recordings are
intershelved with books, so using a number that sits next to scripts and books about
the movie drives the decision to use an LC-like number.
The book about the movie (“Making of Bandits”) also has local additions.
An “X” is added after the book number to avoid shelflisting when the call number has
been provided in the LC cataloging copy.
Locally, a + sign and the text “Oversize” indicate the book is shelved with titles over
28 cm in height or over 20 cm in width.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 12-26

Instructor Manual Session 12
Local Policy Decisions

Additions to call numbers:

Examples (2)

27

This examples demonstrates use of local additions to compensate for limitations in the
library’s OPAC profile. For this library system, “folio” designates a height of 39 cm
or higher. The GEOLOGY collection has a sublocation that includes the folio
designation in the OPAC display. The KLINE and SML-Map Collections do not, so
the Folio designation is part of the call number.
Locally, call numbers in some classes have had “(LC)” added to the end of the
number to distinguish numbers using LC classification from a similar local
classification scheme shelved with the same collection.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 12-27

Instructor Manual Session 12
Local Policy Decisions

Serial supplements decisions

„ Include supplements as part of the
parent serial, adding “Suppl.” (or other
designation) to the volume numbering
„ Use the serial call number but “slide”
the Cutter, e.g., by adding a “2”
„ Completely separate the supplement
from the main title

28

Possible decisions for serial supplements.

The first scenario is generally followed when a supplement to a serial volume lacks a
distinctive title and carries the same numbering as the parent serial. But if a
supplement has a distinctive title it could either be added as a note to the serial record
or cataloged as a separate monograph. An ongoing supplement to a serial with its
own designation would be cataloged as a separate serial and would not be assigned the
same call number.
An ongoing supplement is more likely to be classed to shelve next to the serial it
supplements, usually by sliding the Cutter, but whether the supplement is separated
from or close to the parent serial is a local decision.
Ref. CONSER Cataloging Module 17.4

Fundamentals of LC Classification 12-28

Instructor Manual Session 12
Local Policy Decisions

Serial title change

„ Changes in coverage or classification may
require a new class number

„ TITLE: Report on the global HIV/AIDS

epidemic.
„ CALL NUMBER: RA644.A25 R47
NOTE: Ceased in 2002.
CONTINUED BY: Report on the global AIDS
epidemic.
29

Local decisions apply to the main serial titles as well as to supplements. Here is an
example involving a serial title change.
The number RA644.A25 was used for AIDS prior to 2000. Up to that time, AIDS was
simply another topical Cutter under Miscellaneous Communicable Diseases.
(Example is from OCLC)

Fundamentals of LC Classification 12-29

Instructor Manual Session 12
Local Policy Decisions

Serial title change (2)

In 2000, a new number range was created for AIDS that would shelve books about
AIDS ahead of the old number. There is now a specific number for periodicals about
AIDS, RA643.75.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 12-30

Instructor Manual Session 12
Local Policy Decisions

Serial title change (3)

„ Title change to: Report on the global AIDS epidemic
Use old or new class number for the new title?
„ Local decisions:
„ Class new title under the current number; old title
is not reclassed (old and new titles are separated
on the shelf)
„ Use the obsolete classification for the new title
(volumes are kept together under the obsolete
number on the shelf)
„ Class the new title under the current number &
reclass the old volumes
31

ANIMATION: click to bring in each sub-bullet

Although the call number is generally not changed for linear serial title changes, what
happens if the original classification becomes obsolete? The typical options are listed
on the slide.
But everything is contextual. Although the old and new numbers would be very close
in the schedules, a library with an extensive collection of resources on AIDS might
have a significant amount of physical separation between the old and new numbers.
What is the likelihood of users needing to consult the back issues? This might affect
the decision to reclassify the older volumes. What if the check-in staff didn’t catch the
title change and added and labeled the new title using the call number of the old title?
Sometimes local decisions are made by inertia.
Let’s now consider the issue of obsolete numbers more generally.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 12-31

Instructor Manual Session 12
Local Policy Decisions

Obsolete class numbers

„ Revisions to the class schedules may mean
later editions end up with a different call
number
„ Libraries may choose to collect earlier editions
and reclass them in the new number
„ Staff and resources dictate whether this is feasible
„ Revisions to the class schedules may result
in obsolete call numbers
„ Reclass materials or not?
„ Available resources are key to the decision
„ Accept obsolete numbers in copy or update them?
32

Revisions to the class schedules require decisions for new cataloging and
retrospectively, for resources cataloged under the now obsolete numbers. Most
libraries follow the precept that the future is longer than the past and try to use the
current classification for their new cataloging. But if the local policy is not to reclass
the older materials to the current classification, and the new item is a reprint edition
with many editions classed under the old number? Is there much benefit in separating
the one reprint edition from all the other editions?
For major revisions to the schedules, such as JX to JZ/KZ, reclassifying older
materials to the current numbers probably cuts down on the assignment of obsolete
numbers in new cataloging, but also commits the copy cataloging units to identify and
correct all records using the obsolete classification for titles received after the
reclassification project. Even if the older materials are not reclassified, the library will
still need to decide whether obsolete numbers on new materials need to be updated to
the current class numbers.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 12-32

Instructor Manual Session 12
Local Policy Decisions

Shared cataloging: consortia

„ Consortial rules may require all member
libraries to use the same call number
„ Member libraries have unique user
populations, which may require different
classification decisions (e.g., classing
bibliographies in Z vs. the subject)
„ Standardization facilitates processing and
inventory control

33

Consortial libraries need to consider all the member libraries when considering local
decisions in both choice of class number and shelflisting.
As card catalogs have been digitized, many libraries have ceased to maintain card
shelflists, using the database as the catalog and shelflist of record. With an electronic
“virtual” union shelflist, there are processing advantages to minimizing local
modifications, especially when centralized cataloging is used. Consortia exist to save
money and to facilitate cooperative sharing of resources,* and many libraries have
given up some of their local practices to take advantage of these savings.
*In my library system, most circulation searching is by call number, so using a
standardized form for all copies makes their work more efficient. I’m not sure if this is
a very local perspective. Speculatively: if a standardized call number is used,
replacement copies can be transferred anywhere.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 12-33

Instructor Manual Session 12
Local Policy Decisions

Shared cataloging: OCLC

„ OCLC members are expected to follow
national standards when applying LC
classification
„ Local modifications issues:
„ Double entry (QK149 on OCLC; QK149.6
in local system)
„ Confusion about what is local vs. what is
national (local extensions added in error to
national records; series classification)
34

Scaling up a little, we can see similar tensions between local decisions and the
national bibliographic utility, OCLC.
OCLC members are expected to follow national standards when classifying according
to a national/international classification scheme.
This means that OCLC members are expected either to make local modifications and
extensions to LC classification only at the local level and not in records contributed to
the national database, or to clearly tag modified LC class numbers as local if the
numbers are included in the OCLC record.
In practice, local modifications to LC classification are sometimes tagged as standard
classification practice, or are tagged as local but are mistaken for standard practice
when the record is re-used in copy cataloging. It is also the case that what is a national
standard and what is not may not be widely understood or agreed upon, as may be the
case with the classification decisions recorded on series authority records. On the
other hand, are you failing to follow national standards if you use a valid number but
systematically ignore one of the LC principles of classification in order to benefit your
users? (Classing to geographic area rather than to topic for an area collection.)

Fundamentals of LC Classification 12-34

Instructor Manual Session 12
Local Policy Decisions

Local policy decisions:

Summary
„ Balance differing, contending, and changing
user needs and user populations
„ Balance user needs and workflow efficiency
„ Consider the cost/benefit of local
modifications
„ Political issues: decisions that are out of your
hands
„ Document your decisions!

35

Local modifications are expensive. They slow down workflow for your staff if they
have to make more locally tailored decisions. They may require a higher level of staff
to make the changes properly. Your staff may have to do double data entry to
accommodate local decisions with the national standards and your staff may begin to
confuse local with national standards. Adding a lot of small incremental changes to
the workflow can eventually slow it down to the point that the negative effects on
users as a whole outweigh any benefits of local customization. Deciding what is best
for your users can also take time, especially if you want your decisions to be
evidence-based rather than influenced by the “squeaky wheels.” With local
modifications, sometimes you don’t have any choice. Powers outside the library can
influence what the library can do. Remember that it took the Library of Congress over
a hundred years before it could work up the steam to replace the classification scheme
of its major donor, Thomas Jefferson! Whatever local decisions you make, be sure
they are documented. Good luck to you and may you make the best decisions for your
collection!

Fundamentals of LC Classification 12-35

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
FOR DOUBLE SIDED COPY
Instructor Manual Session 13
SACO:
Subject Authority Cooperative Program

SACO:
Subject Authority Cooperative
Program

Session 13

Fundamentals of LC Classification 13-1

Instructor Manual Session 13
SACO:
Subject Authority Cooperative Program

What is SACO?
„ A component of the Program for Cooperative
Cataloging (PCC)
„ A means for libraries to propose:
„ new Library of Congress Subject Headings
„ new Library of Congress Classification numbers
„ changes to existing Library of Congress Subject
Headings
„ changes to existing Library of Congress
Classification numbers

[ASK ATTENDEES: How many have had the experience of cataloging a

work and not finding an appropriately specific class in LC Classification to
assign to the work?]

Fundamentals of LC Classification 13-2

Instructor Manual Session 13
SACO:
Subject Authority Cooperative Program

SACO membership
„ Institutions that participate in other PCC
programs are automatically considered
SACO members
„ Non-PCC libraries and NACO Funnel
participants can submit SACO
membership applications

Intro.: SACO has differed from other components of the PCC in some
important respects. When SACO began, catalogers at any institution who
wished to prepare and submit LC Classification proposals or LC subject
heading proposals were free to do so. In 2004, SACO became an institution-
based program.
1st bullet: When SACO became an institution-based program in 2004, PCC
participants in the NACO (Name Authority Cooperative Program) were
“grandfathered” into the SACO program.
2nd bullet: Institutions that do not participate in other PCC programs need to
submit an application for SACO-only membership. Also, institutions
participating in a NACO (Name Authority Cooperative Program) Funnel must
submit an application for SACO membership. Participation in a NACO Funnel
does not automatically imply SACO program membership.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 13-3

Instructor Manual Session 13
SACO:
Subject Authority Cooperative Program

SACO membership
„ No formal training is required
„ Participants do not gain “independent”
status; all proposals are reviewed at LC
(and may be approved or not)

1st bullet: This fact often comes as a surprise to SACO participants. Although
there are many opportunities to enroll in training classes that address SACO-
related issues, there is no formal training required to participate in the SACO
program. SACO training has been provided by LC staff and by qualified PCC
members during conferences of the American Library Association and other
organizations, but it is not required. SACO participants hone their SACO skills
through experience and through mentoring in the program.
2nd bullet: Unlike other component programs of the PCC, SACO member
institutions never are granted “independent” status. All subject heading
proposals and LC Classification proposals undergo internal review at LC and
are either approved, modified, or rejected, based on the results of the internal
review process.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 13-4

Instructor Manual Session 13
SACO:
Subject Authority Cooperative Program

Overview of SACO process

for LC Classification proposals
„ Cataloger recognizes need for new LC
Classification number and prepares the
proposal
„ Cataloger submits the proposal online
to Classification Web

1st bullet: This includes searching LC Classification schedules, either in print

copy, or via Classification Web, to determine that an appropriate class is
not already contained in the schedules.
2nd bullet: When it is determined that an appropriate class does not exist, a
proposal may be made. There are two ways to make the proposal:
1) Electronically (the preferred mode);
2) by completing a paper form and faxing that form to the Library of
Congress.
The electronic mode for submitting LC Classification proposals was
implemented in November 2006, and this is the required mode of
submission for institutions that have Classification Web accounts. When
making an LC Classification proposal using the electronic mode, the
proposal is made directly in Classification Web and added to a copy of the
online schedules.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 13-5

Instructor Manual Session 13
SACO:
Subject Authority Cooperative Program

Overview of SACO process

for LC Classification proposals
„ Cataloger notifies LC’s Cooperative
Cataloging Team that a proposal has been
submitted and is ready for review
„ Proposal is further reviewed by the
Cataloging Policy and Support Office (CPSO)
and placed on a Tentative Weekly List:

http://www.loc.gov/catdir/pcc/saco/
ClassTentative/twlc.html
6

1st bullet: The Cooperative Cataloging Team at LC is notified that a proposal

has been added, and the initial review of the proposal begins. The Coop Team
member reviewing the proposal will notify the submitting library if there are
any major problems or missing elements in a proposal so that the proposal can
be modified. The Coop reviewer also notifies the submitting library if the
proposal is not viable because it does not follow current rules and policies.
We will follow the steps in proposing a new LC Classification number
electronically later in this session.
For those libraries that do not have Classification Web accounts, the proposal
may be completed by hand and faxed to the Cooperative Cataloging Team to
undergo the same review described above. However, this mode of submission
is only available to those libraries that do not have Classification Web
accounts.
2nd bullet: After initial review on the Cooperative Cataloging Team, the
proposal is forwarded to the Cataloging Policy and Support Office (CPSO) for
assignment to an LC Classification Tentative Weekly List. These lists are
made available for review by LC catalogers and classification policy
specialists. The tentative weekly lists also may be accessed via the SACO
webpage (http://www.loc.gov/catdir/pcc/saco/ClassTentative/twlc.html)

Fundamentals of LC Classification 13-6

Instructor Manual Session 13
SACO:
Subject Authority Cooperative Program

Overview of SACO process

for LC Classification proposals

Here is an excerpt from an LC Classification Tentative Weekly List. This

excerpt shows an LC Classification proposal made by a SACO member. Note
that the proposal is annotated with a parenthesized “C” to indicate that it was
proposed by a SACO Cooperative Library member. Since this is a only a
tentative list, the proposal is still in the review stage.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 13-7

Instructor Manual Session 13
SACO:
Subject Authority Cooperative Program

Overview of SACO process

for LC Classification proposals
Proposal undergoes final review at the
CPSO Weekly Editorial Meeting

An LC Classification proposal appearing on a Tentative Weekly List will be

discussed and undergo final review at the Cataloging Policy and Support
Office’s (CPSO) weekly editorial meeting. But anyone reviewing the
Tentative Weekly List may comment on the proposal in advance of the
editorial meeting.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 13-8

Instructor Manual Session 13
SACO:
Subject Authority Cooperative Program

Overview of SACO process

for LC Classification proposals
„ Approved LC Classification proposals
are:
„ Posted to the Weekly Lists of new and
changed LC Classification numbers on the
LC/ABA web page:
http://www.loc.gov/aba/cataloging/classification/
weeklylists/
„ Included in the printed LC Classification
schedules and in Classification Web

Once an LC Classification proposal is approved at the weekly editorial

meeting, it appears on another list: The Approved LC Classification Weekly
List. These approved lists are posted to the CPSO webpage. There also is a
link to the Approved LC Classification Weekly Lists on the SACO webpage.
(The URL given is new– aba in the address represents “Acquisitions and
Bibliographic Access,” the new name for the former Cataloging Directorate).
The approved LC Classification number is added to the print version of the LC
Classification schedules, and it is added electronically to Classification Web.
Since the printed version of the schedules is not updated as regularly as
Classification Web, Classification Web is the preferred mode of access to the
LC Classification schedules.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 13-9

Instructor Manual Session 13
SACO:
Subject Authority Cooperative Program

Requirements for participation

„ Familiarity with the principles of LC
Classification
„ Knowledge of the procedures and
guidelines in SCM : F (Classification)
„ Access to LC Classification schedules
„ In print copy
„ Via Classification Web

10

What background and what type of access must a SACO participant have prior
to submitting an LC Classification proposal?
1) A familiarity with the principles of LC Classification is necessary. These
principles were covered earlier in this workshop.
2) Knowledge of and familiarity with SCM : F (Classification). You have been
introduced to this document as well in this workshop.
3) Access to LC Classification schedules. Remember, Classification Web is
the preferred mode of access.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 13-10

Instructor Manual Session 13
SACO:
Subject Authority Cooperative Program

Resources
„ SACO home page:
http://www.loc.gov/catdir/pcc/saco/saco.html
„ Guidelines for completing the LC
Classification form
„ Tentative and Approved Weekly Lists of LC
Classification proposals
„ Summary of Decisions from the Weekly
Editorial Meeting

11

The SACO webpage is a wonderful resource. Here you will find: guidelines to
lead you through the LC Classification proposal process, the tentative and
approved weekly lists of LC Classification proposals, and the Summaries of
Decisions from the Weekly Editorial Meeting. A Summary of Decisions from
the Weekly Editorial Meeting list is written by the policy specialists after each
weekly editorial meeting. If a special decision was made regarding any
proposed LC Classification number, often the policy specialist’s comments on
that proposal will appear on this list.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 13-11

Instructor Manual Session 13
SACO:
Subject Authority Cooperative Program

Resources
„ SACO Participants’ Manual, 2nd ed.
„ Available on Cataloger’s Desktop, and
„ As a PDF file on the SACO home page
„ SCM F 50 Classification Proposals

12

The SACO Participants’ Manual, 2nd ed. contains helpful information on LC

Classification and gives many good examples of LC Classification proposals.
The SACO Participants’ Manual is accessible via the SACO webpage.
SCM F 50, a memo in the Subject Cataloging Manual : Classification, also
gives very helpful guidance on how to submit an LC Classification proposal
(N.b.: SCM F 50 (1992 ed.) describes the outdated paper submission method;
although this is helpful to a library that does not have a Classification Web
account and is using the faxing option, it is not helpful to Class Web users.
However, the guidelines in SCM F 50 on formulating captions and numbers
and recording other data (the Work cat., “Better” notes, etc.) are relevant to the
new online electronic method of proposal submission. Subject Cataloging
Manual : Classification is currently under revision to update the proposal
procedures.)

Fundamentals of LC Classification 13-12

Instructor Manual Session 13
SACO:
Subject Authority Cooperative Program

Why submit an LC
Classification proposal?
„ LC Classification was developed for
LC’s collections
„ The world of knowledge keeps growing!
„ Other libraries’ collections and
acquisition policies may differ from LC’s

13

LC Classification was developed for LC’s collections. New disciplines and

subdisciplines are constantly being developed and other libraries have very
different collection development policies than LC’s.
In a library using LC Classification, if the topic of a bibliographic resource
does not have an explicit number in the classification schedules, the resource
will likely be classified in a broader number, which goes against the general
principle of LC Classification outlined in SCM F 10: “Use the most specific
number available. Use a broader number only if no specific number is
available and it is not feasible to establish one.”

Fundamentals of LC Classification 13-13

Instructor Manual Session 13
SACO:
Subject Authority Cooperative Program

Why submit an LC
Classification proposal?
„ Cooperative cataloging efforts are
expanding
„ Terminology within a discipline changes
over time

14

Fundamentals of LC Classification 13-14

Instructor Manual Session 13
SACO:
Subject Authority Cooperative Program

When to submit an LC
Classification proposal
„ For a new classification number
„ When the rules of specificity in
classification may not be applied by using
a broader number
„ To change an existing number
„ When terminology or a name change calls
for classification modifications

15

1st bullet: This is probably the most common case. The rules of specificity in
LC Classification are very succinct in SCM F 10. It is incorrect to assign a
broader class to an item when a more subject specific class would be
appropriate.

2nd bullet: Often subject terminology changes. This type of change may
prompt a corresponding change in the LC Classification schedules. For
example, a cataloger finds an existing caption Biological chemistry under
Z688.B54. The heading Biological chemistry was once a valid LCSH
heading, but terminology has changed and the current authorized heading is
Biochemistry. Although the subject heading has been changed, the previous
term Biological chemistry was left unchanged as a caption in the Z
Classification schedule. An LC Classification proposal may be submitted to
change the old terminology in the caption at Z688.B54 to the current
terminology.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 13-15

Instructor Manual Session 13
SACO:
Subject Authority Cooperative Program

Examples: LC Classification numbers

proposed by SACO participants
„ B738.H3
Philosophy (General)--Medieval (430-1450)--
Special topics--Other special topics, A-Z--
Happiness

„ PR739.D42
English literature--History of English
literature--Drama--By period--20th century--
Special topics, A-Z--Death
16

The following slides show examples of LC Classification proposals submitted

by SACO participants. All of these proposals were approved and are now a
part of the LC Classification schedules. Some of these proposals are relatively
straightforward, while others are more complex. The complete hierarchies are
included on each slide, with the proposed class number and caption in blue.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 13-16

Instructor Manual Session 13
SACO:
Subject Authority Cooperative Program

Examples: LC Classification numbers

proposed by SACO participants
„ GV1469.62.A24
Recreation. Leisure--Games and
amusements--Indoor games and
amusements--Fantasy games--
Individual games, A-Z--Aberrant (Game)

17

Fundamentals of LC Classification 13-17

Instructor Manual Session 13
SACO:
Subject Authority Cooperative Program

Examples: LC Classification numbers

proposed by SACO participants
„ PL8598.O32-.O3295
Languages of Eastern Asia, Africa,
Oceania--African languages and literature-
-Special languages (alphabetically)--O-Oz

PL8598.O32-.O3295 Ogba Table P-PZ16

18

Fundamentals of LC Classification 13-18

Instructor Manual Session 13
SACO:
Subject Authority Cooperative Program

Examples: LC Classification numbers

proposed by SACO participants
„ P96.R46-.R462
Philology. Linguistics--Communication. Mass
media--Special aspects--Other, A-Z--
Reproductive health

P96.R46 General works

P96.R462A-.R462Z By region or
country, A-Z

19

Fundamentals of LC Classification 13-19

Instructor Manual Session 13
SACO:
Subject Authority Cooperative Program

Sample LC Classification
proposal

Work being cataloged:

Portraiture now
2006

20

Let’s look at the steps to follow in proposing a new LC Classification number.

A cataloger has this work in hand. It is the first item in an exhibition series.
In this first item of the series, we have contemporary portraits by American
artists.
The example we are using here was actually contributed by a SACO
participant. We will follow the steps the cataloger took in proposing the
number, and look at the entire workflow from proposal to approval. However,
if you look at Classification Web, you’ll see this number and caption already
printed!

Fundamentals of LC Classification 13-20

Instructor Manual Session 13
SACO:
Subject Authority Cooperative Program

Sample LC Classification
proposal
Description

Portraiture now is an exhibition catalog of the first

installation in the National Portrait Gallery’s new
exhibition series called “Portraiture Now,” held July
1, 2006-January 7, 2007

SUBJECT: Portraits, American--21st century--Exhibitions.

21

The cataloger has assigned the subject heading:

Portraits, American--21st century--Exhibitions
to the bibliographic record for the catalog.

(Remember the order of precedence described in the Class N section, and note
that this item is a genre by nationality or period (both, in this case); in other
words, this is the second choice on the order of precedence (Slide 11 of Class
N module))

Fundamentals of LC Classification 13-21

Instructor Manual Session 13
SACO:
Subject Authority Cooperative Program

Sample LC Classification
proposal

Visual arts--Special subjects of art--Portraits--

General works

N7575 General works

N7580-7591 Ancient
N7592-7615.9 Medieval and modern

Searching Classification Web, the cataloger identifies a General works class

for this item at N7575. Not however that there is a further breakdown in this
section of the schedule for Ancient works and for Medieval and modern
works. Since the portraits in the exhibition catalog are by modern artists, the
cataloger selects the caption Medieval and modern and the schedule reveals
more hierarchy.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 13-22

Instructor Manual Session 13
SACO:
Subject Authority Cooperative Program

Sample LC Classification
proposal
Visual arts--Special subjects of art--Portraits
--Medieval and modern--General works

N7592 General works

N7592.2-.6 By period
N7592.8-7615.9 By country

Now the cataloger is in the Medieval and modern subdivision (note the
hierarchy). Under Medieval and modern there is another hierarchy revealed for
General works, By period, and By country. Because the item in hand is
American portraiture, the cataloger selects the caption By country to show the
complete span at N7592.8-7615.9.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 13-23

Instructor Manual Session 13
SACO:
Subject Authority Cooperative Program

Sample LC Classification
proposal
Visual arts--Special subjects of art--Portraits
--Medieval and modern--By country--America
--United States

N7593-7593.9 United States

Searching further into the schedule at N7592.8-7615.9 By country, the

cataloger sees that there is a separate span of numbers for the United States.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 13-24

Instructor Manual Session 13
SACO:
Subject Authority Cooperative Program

Sample LC Classification proposal

Visual arts--Special subjects of art--

Portraits--Medieval and modern--By
country--America--United States
United States
N7593 General works
N7593.1 17th-18th centuries
N7593.2 19th century
N7593.3 20th century
N7593.5 New England
N7596.6 South

Under the United States, further subdivisions are revealed:

General works, and under that caption:
Chronological periods
Local subdivisions
The item in hand deals specifically with the 21st century, but there is no
caption in the schedule for 21st century American portraiture in the United
States. The cataloger would like to class the item in hand in a specific number
for the 21st century at this point in the schedule (SCM F 10 General
Principles), so an LC Classification proposal is prepared.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 13-25

Instructor Manual Session 13
SACO:
Subject Authority Cooperative Program

Sample LC Classification
proposal

The cataloger remembers that the SACO website gives helpful information on
LC Classification, and starts the proposal process by rereading the guidelines
on the SACO webpage on proposing new LC Classification numbers.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 13-26

Instructor Manual Session 13
SACO:
Subject Authority Cooperative Program

Sample LC Classification
proposal

On the SACO webpage, there is a link to a PDF document that gives step-by-
step instructions on proposing a new LC Classification number using the new
online proposal system implemented in November 2006.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 13-27

Instructor Manual Session 13
SACO:
Subject Authority Cooperative Program

Sample LC Classification
proposal

http://classificationweb.net/Menu
/proposal.html

28

Having read the step-by-step instructions, the cataloger now accesses the
online proposal system at the URL
http://classificationweb.net/Menu/proposal.html. In order to access the online
system, the cataloger’s institution must have a ClassWeb account. This is
because the proposal will actually be made directly in Classification Web, in a
copy of the LC Classification schedules.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 13-28

Instructor Manual Session 13
SACO:
Subject Authority Cooperative Program

Sample LC Classification
proposal

Here is the proposal menu. The cataloger selects Create, Edit and Browse
Classification Proposals.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 13-29

Instructor Manual Session 13
SACO:
Subject Authority Cooperative Program

Sample LC Classification
proposal

In the search box, the cataloger keys in a classification number for a caption in
the same level of hierarchy as the proposed number. In this case, the cataloger
wishes to propose a number for the 21st century, so the class number N7593.3,
representing the 20th century, is selected. Using the 20th century number,
N7593.3, as a pattern, the cataloger then clicks on the “P” at the end of that
caption to bring up a proposal form. (A red arrow flies in to the “P” after the
caption 20th century).

Fundamentals of LC Classification 13-30

Instructor Manual Session 13
SACO:
Subject Authority Cooperative Program

Sample LC Classification
proposal

This the top half of the proposal form that appears after clicking on “P” as
described in the previous slide. Note that this form is based on the existing
class N7593.3 and the caption 20th century. The cataloger will annotate this
form to represent the new number and caption being proposed. Since the
existing number N7593.3 is at the same level of hierarchy as the number and
caption being proposed, very little modification is needed to this form.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 13-31

Instructor Manual Session 13
SACO:
Subject Authority Cooperative Program

Sample LC Classification
proposal

Here is the bottom half of the proposal form. We’ll look at each part of the
form now.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 13-32

Instructor Manual Session 13
SACO:
Subject Authority Cooperative Program

Sample LC Classification
proposal

Since the proposal is being made by a PCC institution, the default message
“Proposal Generated: Coop” will appear at the top of the form.
In the proposed class # box, the cataloger keys in an appropriate number for
the caption being proposed. In this case, the number N7593.4 is available to
represent the caption 21st century. The cataloger keys in that number.
Because the hierarchy of this proposal and the hierarchy of the number used to
generate the proposal are the same, nothing needs to be added to the Hierarchy
box.
In the Caption box, the existing caption 20th century is changed to 21st century.
Because there is no table used for this proposed class, the Table box is left
blank.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 13-33

Instructor Manual Session 13
SACO:
Subject Authority Cooperative Program

Sample LC Classification
proposal

If the cataloger wanted to add a “Class here” note or a Cf. (confer) note to the
proposal, that information would be keyed in the Note box. In this case, no
notes are added to the proposal.
The work generating the proposal and a publication date needs to be keyed in
the Work cat. box.
Any additional comments may be entered in the Cataloger’s comments box.
It is a good idea to cite a pattern that justifies the proposal. The pattern
N7593.3 for the 20th century is an example of a pattern, but a true analogous
pattern would be an instance of 21st century as an approved caption in another
area of Class N.
The Better box is used only by the Coop Team and should be left blank.
It is very important to include an email address so that the cataloger can track
the progress of the proposal. Some emails to the cataloger are automatically
generated; others may come directly from a reviewer on the Coop Team.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 13-34

Instructor Manual Session 13
SACO:
Subject Authority Cooperative Program

Sample LC Classification
proposal

Once the form is completed, the cataloger clicks on the Save button.
ANIMATION: click to bring in red arrow

Fundamentals of LC Classification 13-35

Instructor Manual Session 13
SACO:
Subject Authority Cooperative Program

Sample LC Classification
proposal

A prompt box should appear indicating that the proposal has been saved. The
cataloger then clicks on OK.
ANIMATION: click to bring in red arrow

Fundamentals of LC Classification 13-36

Instructor Manual Session 13
SACO:
Subject Authority Cooperative Program

Sample LC Classification
proposal

The Classification Proposal System reappears. But note that the proposed
number and caption N7593.4 21st century are not visible. The cataloger must
click on the Refresh button of the Classification Proposal System (not the
browser’s refresh button).
ANIMATION: click to bring in red arrow

Fundamentals of LC Classification 13-37

Instructor Manual Session 13
SACO:
Subject Authority Cooperative Program

Sample LC Classification
proposal

Now the proposed number and caption are integrated into the schedule. The
proposed number and caption will appear in green font, indicating that this is a
new proposal. Only the cataloger who proposed the number will be able to
edit it, although it will appear to all users of the Classification Web Proposal
System.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 13-38

Instructor Manual Session 13
SACO:
Subject Authority Cooperative Program

Sample LC Classification
proposal

The cataloger must notify the Coop Team that a proposal has been submitted.
Email is the preferred method of communication.
The proposal will undergo initial review on the Coop Team, and then it will be
posted to an LC Classification Tentative Weekly List. If the Coop Team
member processing the proposal has questions or needs more information from
the cataloger, an email message will be sent directly to the cataloger with the
requests. Often there will be an exchange of email messages at this stage of
the process, before the proposal is forwarded to LC’s Cataloging Policy and
Support Office (CPSO) for further review and assignment to a tentative
weekly list.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 13-39

Instructor Manual Session 13
SACO:
Subject Authority Cooperative Program

Sample LC Classification
proposal

This is the page of the Library of Congress Tentative Weekly List on which
the proposal appears. The proposal is added to a tentative weekly list once
review on the Cooperative Cataloging Team is completed and the proposal is
forwarded to CPSO. A Library of Congress Tentative Weekly List includes
both proposals contributed by Library of Congress catalogers, and proposals
contributed by PCC members. Note that the proposals from PCC members are
annotated with the parenthesized letter (C). All the classification proposals on
this list will be discussed at the weekly editorial meeting, held on Wednesday
mornings in the Cataloging Policy and Support Office at the Library of
Congress.
Since the cataloger included an email address on the proposal form, an email
message will be sent to the cataloger at the time the proposal is posted to a
weekly list.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 13-40

Instructor Manual Session 13
SACO:
Subject Authority Cooperative Program

Sample LC Classification
proposal

Once the proposal is approved, it will appear on an approved Library of

Congress Classification Weekly List. Note that the “C” indicating that this
proposal was generated by a PCC cooperative partner is not printed on the
approved list.
The cataloger will receive another email message to document this. If the
proposal was modified in any way by the LC Classification specialists in
CPSO, the modifications would also be documented in the message.
The classification number may then be assigned to the work that generated the
proposal, and the complete classification number will appear in ClassWeb
after the next scheduled update.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 13-41

Instructor Manual Session 13
SACO:
Subject Authority Cooperative Program

Sample LC Classification
proposal

The approved proposal is added to ClassWeb.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 13-42

Instructor Manual Session 13
SACO:
Subject Authority Cooperative Program

Exercise

This exercise will imitate the workflow we just discussed. In the exercise, you
will make a proposal for a topical Cutter. Since it is not possible to complete
the exercise online, most of the work for this exercise will be done on paper.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 13-43

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
FOR DOUBLE SIDED COPY
Instructor Manual Session 13
Exercise
SACO: Exercise 1

With this item described below “in hand,” follow the steps to propose a new topical
Cutter to be printed in the LC Classification schedules. This new topical Cutter should be
at the appropriate level of specificity for the item in hand.

(In many ways, this exercise is more of a walk-through of the LC Classification proposal
workflow, but there are parts of the exercise that require your input.)

War Elephants / John M. Kistler ; foreword by Richard Lair – Westport, Conn. : Praeger,
2006. xv, 333 p. ; 25 cm.

Book Description given on Amazon.com

Elephants have fought in human armies for more than three thousand years. Asian
powers boasted of their pachyderm power, while the Romans fielded elephants alongside
their legendary legions but were, perhaps, too proud to admit that mere animals
contributed to victory. Elephants have gored, stomped, and sliced their way through
infantry and cavalry with great success. They have also been cut, speared, bombed, and
napalmed for their efforts. This is the story of their largely forgotten role in the history of
warfare. Generals throughout recorded history have used elephants as tanks, bulldozers,
and cargo trucks long before such vehicles existed. Until gunpowder began to reduce the
utility of elephants in battle during the 17th Century, these beasts built roads, swung
swords, or simply terrified opposing forces. Although some believe that elephants were
mere gimmicks of warfare, Kistler discredits that notion. His book hopes to give
elephants the credit they deserve for the sacrifices they have endured. Elephants have
long fought for and served human masters, but it is now the elephants themselves that
must be protected.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 1
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
FOR DOUBLE SIDED COPY
Instructor Manual Session 13
Exercise
Searching LCSH and comparing similar works on the topic of using animals in the
military and in warfare, an appropriate LCSH authority record containing a span of LC
Classification numbers in an 053 field is identified:

Using Classification Web or the printed LC Classification schedules, a search of the class
number UH87 gives the following results:

Fundamentals of LC Classification 2
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
FOR DOUBLE SIDED COPY
Instructor Manual Session 13
Exercise

Under the caption Use of animals in military service, topical Cutters for two specific
animals have been separately established, Bats and Bottlenose dolphins. Considering the
specificity of the item in hand, establish a new topical Cutter at UH100.5 for Elephants.

New number here? New caption here?

The topical Cutter would need to fit alphabetically in the list of Other, A-Z animals.
Using the Cutter table as a guide, determine an appropriate alpha numeric Cutter for
Elephants.

Then follow the steps below to propose the Cutter and the caption you have come up
with.

Access the Classification Proposal System at the URL

http://classificationweb.net/Menu/proposal.html

and log in to the system using your institution’s Classification Web username and
password.

Search class UH87.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 3
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
FOR DOUBLE SIDED COPY
Instructor Manual Session 13
Exercise

Select another caption in this area at the same level of hierarchy to use as a guide and
template for the new proposal. Bottlenose dolphins is at the same level of hierarchy.
Click on the P following the caption Bottlenose dolphins to bring up a copy of that record
that can be modified for the proposed caption Elephants.

Below is the copy of the record for Bottlenose dolphins, and below that is the same
record with all the data removed. This is the template to use for the new proposal.

Fill in that form and observe the red arrows. Those arrows indicate areas that need to be
completed.

Fundamentals of LC Classification 4
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
FOR DOUBLE SIDED COPY
Instructor Manual Session 13
Exercise

Fundamentals of LC Classification 5
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
FOR DOUBLE SIDED COPY
Instructor Manual Session 13
Exercise

Fundamentals of LC Classification 6
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
FOR DOUBLE SIDED COPY
Instructor Manual Session 13
Exercise

Fundamentals of LC Classification 7
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
FOR DOUBLE SIDED COPY
Instructor Manual Session 13
Exercise
At this point, your proposed number and caption have been added to Classification Web.
But remember the proposal is still in an unapproved state. What are the next steps in the
process?

1) You notify the Coop Team that you have submitted an LC Classification
proposal;

2) If the Coop Team reviewer needs to consult with you, that person will email you
before the proposal appears on a Classification Tentative Weekly List;

3) The proposal will be posted to a Classification Tentative Weekly List;

4) The proposal will be discussed at the weekly Subject Editorial Meeting in the
Cataloging Policy and Support Office at the Library of Congress

5) After the meeting, you will receive another email notification that the proposal
was either approved, modified, or not approved;

6) If approved (or approved with modification), the proposal will be posted to an

Approved Library of Congress Classification Weekly List;

7) All proposals appearing on an Approved Library of Congress Classification

Weekly List will be added to the master copy of Classification Web

Fundamentals of LC Classification 8
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
FOR DOUBLE SIDED COPY
Instructor Manual Exercise Answers

Answers to Exercises

Fundamentals of LC Classification Exercise Answers 1

Instructor Manual Exercise Answers

Outline of LCC Exercises:

Answers

Session 3

Fundamentals of LC Classification Exercise Answers 2

Instructor Manual Exercise Answers

Exercise 1: QH540+ Ecology

Where would you class:

1. dictionary of ecology QH540.4

2. collection of speeches on ecology QH541.145

QH540.83
3. history of ecology in the U.S.
By country: U__

4. ecology of Costa Rica QH101+

Attendees have QH540-QH541.264 in the Appendix – they need to have that

out to complete this exercise.
They are asked to select the class number from the schedules for the topics
listed in the exercise.
Be aware that for #3, the appropriate class number has the caption “By region
or country, A-Z” and for #7, the appropriate class number has the caption “By
region or state, A-Z.” In this session, this was covered at a very general level,
but we’ve not yet gone over G 300, G 302, or the process for providing a
geographic Cutter. The intent here is to focus on selecting the appropriate
class number and also the geographic region that you would Cutter for.
Attendees need only supply the letter used to begin the geographic Cutter.

Instructors may wish to go through the exercises with the entire group, or to
give attendees time on their own to complete them and then go over the
answers together. In any case, it is wise to go through the first one as a group
to be sure everyone understands what to do.

ANIMATION: click to bring in each answer

Answers are also provided in the Appendix.

Fundamentals of LC Classification Exercise Answers 3

Instructor Manual Exercise Answers

Exercise 1: QH540+ Ecology (2)

Where would you class:

5. textbook on ecology QH541

QH541.2
6. book on teaching ecology

ANIMATION: click to bring in each answer

Fundamentals of LC Classification Exercise Answers 4

Instructor Manual Exercise Answers

Exercise 2: RA576+

Where would you class a book on the impact of

air pollution on public health in:

1. the United States RA576.5

2. Virginia RA576.6 by state: V___

3. Richmond, Virginia RA576.6 by state: V__

Attendees have a portion of the class schedule at RA576+ (Public aspects of

medicine—Public health. Hygiene. Preventive medicine—Environmental
health—Air—Air pollution (General))

They are asked to select the class number for this topic in various geographic
areas. Most of these involve Cuttering by region or state A-Z, or by region or
country A-Z. Again, they need only supply the letter used to begin the
geographic Cutter.

ANIMATION: click to bring in each answer

Fundamentals of LC Classification Exercise Answers 5

Instructor Manual Exercise Answers

Exercise 2: RA576+ (2)

Impact of air pollution on public health in:

4. France RA576.7 by country: F__

5. Central America RA576.7 by region: C_

6. Paris, France RA576.7 by country: F_

ANIMATION: click to bring in each answer

Fundamentals of LC Classification Exercise Answers 6

Instructor Manual Exercise Answers

Elements of LC Call Numbers

Exercises: Answers

Session 5

Fundamentals of LC Classification Exercise Answers 7

Instructor Manual Exercise Answers

Exercise 1

Wycliff W93 Anderson A53

Shrimp S57 Quality Q35

Blades some options: B595, B62, B625…

Dwyer some options: D897, D94, D95, D96…

ANIMATION: click to bring in each answer

Wycliff, Anderson, Shrimp, and Quality are formulated directly from the
Cutter table, so there is one correct answer for each of these.
Attendees also have a space on their written exercise to formulate a Cutter for
their own name.

The second part is more complex.

Blades and Dwyer cannot be formulated directly from the Cutter table (the
second letter is not in the table); there is no one correct answer.
Applying the “move left and add 8” practice used at LC, Blades would be
Cuttered as B58 and Dwyer would be Cuttered D88; however, this practice is
not appropriate in this case because of the existing shelflist arrangement:
Blades must file after B59 (already in shelflist for Bizness) and before B63
(Board of…)
Dwyer must file after D89 (for Duzhnikov) and before D98 (for Dzurko)

Fundamentals of LC Classification Exercise Answers 8

Instructor Manual Exercise Answers

Exercise 2: Identify the coding errors

TS191.8 $b Z34 1990

TS191.8 $b .Z34 1990
T55.3 $b H3C353 1991
T55.3.H3 $b C353 1991
QP34.5. $b H625 1989
QP34.5 $b .H625 1989
B3279.H49 B696 2000
B3279.H49 $b B696 2000

ANIMATION:
click to bring in the problem
click again to bring in the answer
repeat!

Fundamentals of LC Classification Exercise Answers 9

Instructor Manual Exercise Answers

Exercise 2: Identify the coding errors (2)

B 8313 $b F35 2000

B8313 $b .F35 2000
TR646 .G32 $b W653 1999
TR646.G32 $b W653 1999
HE558 $b .G48 $b G56 2003
HE558.G48 $b G56 2003
TX716.M4 $b .K44 1989
TX716.M4 $b K44 1989

ANIMATION:
click to bring in the problem
click again to bring in the answer
repeat!

Fundamentals of LC Classification Exercise Answers 10

Instructor Manual Exercise Answers

Principles of LC Classification &

Assigning Numbers:
Answers

Session 6

Fundamentals of LC Classification Exercise Answers 11

Instructor Manual Exercise Answers

Exercise 1
1. Nature’s economy : a history of ecological
ideas
QH540.8

2. Dictionary of the environment

QH540.4
3. Economy of nature : a textbook in basic
ecology
QH541

4. Ecological research strategy

QH541.2
12

ANIMATION: click to bring in each answer

Fundamentals of LC Classification Exercise Answers 12

Instructor Manual Exercise Answers

Exercise 1

5. Performing ecological risk

assessments
QH541.15.R57
6. Philosophy of ecology : from science
to synthesis
QH540.5
7. Survey methods for ecosystem
management
QH541.15.S95
13

ANIMATION: click to bring in each answer

Fundamentals of LC Classification Exercise Answers 13

Instructor Manual Exercise Answers

Tables:
Answers

Session 7

14

Fundamentals of LC Classification Exercise Answers 14

Instructor Manual Exercise Answers

Exercise 1

Goodall, Jane, 1934- . Through a window : my thirty

years with the chimpanzees of Gombe. 1990.
QL31.G58 A3 1990
G58 for Goodall; A3 for autobiography, by date
Goodall, Jane, 1934- . Africa in my blood : an
autobiography in letters : the early years. 2000.
QL31.G58 A4 2000
G58 for Goodall; A4 for Letters, by date

15

ANIMATION: click to bring in each answer & explanation

Fundamentals of LC Classification Exercise Answers 15

Instructor Manual Exercise Answers

Exercise 1

Goodall, Jane, 1934-. Beyond innocence : an

autobiography in letters : the later years. 2001.
QL31.G58 A4 2001
G58 for Goodall; A4 for Letters, by date
Greene, Meg. Jane Goodall : a biography. 2005.
QL31.G58 G74 2005
G58 for Goodall; .xA6-Z for biography, by main
entry (Greene); add date

16

ANIMATION: click to bring in each answer & explanation

Fundamentals of LC Classification Exercise Answers 16

Instructor Manual Exercise Answers

Exercise 1

Koebner, Linda. Tickled by a gorilla, kissed by

a whale : career paths of women who work to
save wildlife. 1997

QL26 .K64 1997

Collective biography, classed under QL26
Do not use Biography table
Cutter for main entry (Koebner)

17

ANIMATION: click to bring in each answer & explanation

Fundamentals of LC Classification Exercise Answers 17

Instructor Manual Exercise Answers

Schedule P Language Exercises:

Answers

Session 8

Fundamentals of LC Classification Exercise Answers 18

Instructor Manual Exercise Answers

Hervey/Thinking German translation/2005

PF3498.H47 2005
PF3000 Base number
P-PZ1b Translating 498-499
498 General works 498
PF3498 Class number
.H47 Book number (Hervey)
2005 Publication date
19

Fundamentals of LC Classification Exercise Answers 19

Instructor Manual Exercise Answers

The German language and the real

world/1995
PF3087.G47 1995
PF3000 Base number
P-PZ1b History of the lang. 75-88
87 20th century 87
PF3087 Class number
.G47 Book number (German)
1995 Publication date

20

P-PZ1b 75-88 range:

P-PZ1b 85 19th century

P-PZ1b 87 20th century
P-PZ1b 88 21st century

Fundamentals of LC Classification Exercise Answers 20

Instructor Manual Exercise Answers

Coggle/Improve your German (Teach

yourself books)/2004

PF3112.5 .C64 2004

PF3000 Base number
112.5 P-PZ1b Self instructors
112.5
PF3112.5 Class number
.C64 Book number (Coggle)
2004 Publication date
21

P-PZ1b 108-123

P-PZ1b 112 1950-

P-PZ1b 112.5 Self-instructors
P-PZ1b 112.5 Audio-visual instructors

Fundamentals of LC Classification Exercise Answers 21

Instructor Manual Exercise Answers

Easy German phrase book/c1994

PF3121.E27 1994
PF3000 Base number
121 P-PZ1b Conversation. Phrase
books. 121
PF3121 Class number
.E27 Book number (Easy)
1994 Publication date
22

P-PZ1b 108-123

P-PZ1b 121 Conversation. Phrase books

P-PZ1b 123 Plays for acting in schools and colleges.
Idioms, errors, etc. see P-PZ1b 460

Fundamentals of LC Classification Exercise Answers 22

Instructor Manual Exercise Answers

Schedule P Literature Exercises:

Answers

Session 8

Fundamentals of LC Classification Exercise Answers 23

Instructor Manual Exercise Answers

V.S. Pritchett P-PZ40 (1)

[Essays] Complete collected essays. 1991.

PR6031.R7 1991
Collected works in any genre subarranged by
date only

[Short stories] Complete collected stories. 1992.

PR6031.R7 1992
Collected works in any genre subarranged by
date only
24

ANIMATION: click to bring in each line

Note that with the revision of the P-PZ40 table in 2005, separate form numbers for
collected prose, poetry, etc, are no longer assigned. Collected works in any form or
for all forms are only subarranged by date. Also following the 2005 revision of the P-
PZ40 table, complete collected works (for all forms) are no longer assigned a Cutter
for the editor. Subarrangement is by date only.

Fundamentals of LC Classification Exercise Answers 24

Instructor Manual Exercise Answers

V.S. Pritchett P-PZ40 (2)

The other side of a frontier : a V.S. Pritchett reader. 1984.
PR6031.R7 A6 1984
Selections in any genre subarranged by A6 and date

A man of letters : selected essays. c1985.

PR6031.R7 A6 1985
Selections in any genre subarranged by A6 and date

[Short stories. Selections] Essential stories. 1985.

PR6031.R7 A6 1985b
Selections in any genre subarranged by A6 and date
and work letter
25

ANIMATION: click to bring in each line

Collections of selected works are assigned the form Cutter A6 but are not
differentiated by the form of work. Selected stories or selections in various genres are
all assigned A6. Although not used in the exercises, note that the translation table is
not used for selections or collected works in translation: there are form numbers
reserved for selected and collected translations, depending on the language.

Fundamentals of LC Classification Exercise Answers 25

Instructor Manual Exercise Answers

V.S. Pritchett P-PZ40 (3)

Blind love, and other stories. 1969.

PR6031.R7 B55 1969
Separate work; note distinction between a
collection, a selection, and a collection of
stories treated as a separate work

A cab at the door : a memoir. 1968.

PR6031.R7 Z46 1968
Autobiography Z46

26

ANIMATION: click to bring in each line

A collection is complete collection of all works or of a genre, such as short stories,
and is not assigned a form Cutter. Selections are assigned A6 (unless the selections are
in translation).
However, if the author makes a selection of his or her works that have previously been
published only in periodicals, the collection is Cuttered as a separate work. Per F 633:
separate works include “collections consisting of works, such as poems, stories, etc.,
that are being published for the first time while the author is still living (disregarding
previous publication in journals or periodicals).”
Autobiographies, like selections, are always assigned .Z46. If the author writes more
than one, the different works are distinguished by date only.

Fundamentals of LC Classification Exercise Answers 26

Instructor Manual Exercise Answers

V.S. Pritchett P-PZ40 (4)

PR6031.R7 Z59 1987 Baldwin … 1987.

PR6031.R7 Z65 2006 Bloom … 2006.
PR6031.R7 Z78 1992 Stinson … c1992.
PR6031.R7 Z897 2004 Treglown … 2004.

Biography-criticism uses range Z5-

Z999; digits determined by filing order
of main entry; actual range in this
context is Z59x-Z896x
27

Slide opens with call numbers for Baldwin and Treglown.

You have now displayed previously established book numbers that limit even more
the range you can apply to your two items.
There is no published table that provides guidance for inserting new numbers in this
range, but you want to have Bloom closer to the beginning of the range near Baldwin,
Click one: brings in Bloom call number
and you want to have Stinson close to the end of the range near Treglown.
Click two: brings in Stinson call number
Click three: brings in explanation

Fundamentals of LC Classification Exercise Answers 27

Instructor Manual Exercise Answers

Special Types of Material Exercises:

Answers

Session 9

Fundamentals of LC Classification Exercise Answers 28

Instructor Manual Exercise Answers

Exercise 1 (1)
Channing. All about organic chemistry. 1st
ed.1968.
QD251 .C38 <already in the shelflist>
Advanced textbooks--Through 1970.
No dates were added before 1982.

Channing. All about organic chemistry. 2nd ed.

1975.
QD251.2 .C43 1975
QD251.2 Advanced textbooks--1971-2000.
New class number; book number is re-Cuttered.
Date added for works cataloged after 1982.
29

Slide opens with previously shelflisted work and its notes, also citation for first
exercise.
Click 1: Answer
Click 2: Schedule caption, Cutter, and date

Fundamentals of LC Classification Exercise Answers 29

Instructor Manual Exercise Answers

Exercise 1 (2)
Channing. Basic organic chemistry. 3rd ed. Macmillan,
1984.
QD251.2 .C43 1984
QD251.2 Advanced textbooks--1971-2000
Title change does not affect Cutter

Channing. Essential organic chemistry. 3rd ed. Pearson

Prentice-Hall, 1984.
QD251.2 .C43 1984b
Title change does not affect Cutter
Work letter to distinguish editions published in
the same year; assigned to the 2nd item
cataloged 30

Slide opens with citations for both exercises.

Click 1 Answer
Click 2 Notes
Click 3 Answer
Click 4 Notes

Fundamentals of LC Classification Exercise Answers 30

Instructor Manual Exercise Answers

Exercise 1 (3)
Channing. Basic organic chemistry. 3rd ed.
Hutchinson, 1984.
QD251.2 .C43 1984c
Work letter assigned for the third manifestation
published in 1984.

Harrington. Essentials of organic chemistry. 4th ed.

2000.
QD251.2 .C43 2000
QD251.2 Advanced textbooks. 1971-2000
Main entry & title have changed but original Cutter
is retained as long as the same class number is
used
31

Slide opens with citations for both exercises.

Click 1 Answer
Click 2 Work letter
Click 3 Answer
Click 4 Schedule caption:Cutter for earlier main entry used as long as class number
remains the same. Title has also changed slightly

Fundamentals of LC Classification Exercise Answers 31

Instructor Manual Exercise Answers

Exercise 1 (4)
Harrington. Channing’s Essentials of organic chemistry.
5th ed. 2004.

QD251.3 .H37 2004

QD251.3 Advanced textbooks. 2001-
New class number; book number is re-Cuttered

32

Slide opens with citation.

Click 1. Answer
Click 2: Schedule caption; new class number because of imprint; re-Cutter because of
class number change

Fundamentals of LC Classification Exercise Answers 32

Instructor Manual Exercise Answers

Exercise 2 (1)
International Conference on AIDS (1990)
RC607.A26 I56 1990

International Conference on AIDS (1991)

RC606.53 .I58 1991
Use the new class number; re-Cutter

International Conference on AIDS (1994)

RC606.53 .I58 1994

Same Cutter used for the later conference; use date

from qualifier even though the publication date is 1995

33

Slide opens with the previously shelflisted work and two citations.
Click 1 Answer
Click 2 Ordinarily conferences with the same subject content are collocated, but if the
class number becomes obsolete between conferences, the new number should be used.
Since a new number is assigned, there is no reason to use the earlier Cutter, since
collocation is not possible

Click 3 Answer.
Click 4 Same subject matter, so same class number is used. In that case, the same
Cutter is used under the class number to collocate all of the conferences. Note that the
date is for the date of the conference, not the date of publication of the conference
papers.

Fundamentals of LC Classification Exercise Answers 33

Instructor Manual Exercise Answers

Exercise 2 (2)

International Conference on AIDS (1994)

RC606.53 .I58 1994a
Same call number used for a different set of
conference papers published in the same
year
Work letter is assigned to differentiate; if the
main entry is corporate/conference, the
first work letter begins with “a” rather than
“b”

34

Slide opens with citation.

Click 1 Answer
Click 2 Same call number used for different set of conference papers; Work letter

Fundamentals of LC Classification Exercise Answers 34

Instructor Manual Exercise Answers

Exercise 3 (1)
Hartford studies in literature.
PN2 .H37 OK
PN 2 Literature (General)--Periodicals--American
and English
Studies in literature.
PN2 .S78 should be PN2 .H37
Linear title change (Continues Hartford studies in
literature)
University studies in literature.
PN2 .U56 should be PN2 .H37
Linear title change (Continues Studies in literature)
35

Click 1 Answer.
Click 2 From schedule: PN2 Literature (General)--Periodicals--American and
English.
Click 3 Answer.
Click 4. When a serial title changes from title A to title B (a linear title change), and
the subject coverage of the later title is the same, the standard practice is to use the
same call number on the later title that was assigned to the earlier title. (Local
practices may differ)
Click 5 Answer.
Click 6. See the notes. The first note (Continues:Studies in literature) indicates that
the title University studies in literature represents a linear title change. Again, the
same call number is used for the later title that was assigned to the earlier title.
However, note that the second note indicates that at a later date University studies in
literature had another title change, and this time the change was non-linear; the title
change involved a merger with a separate serial.

Fundamentals of LC Classification Exercise Answers 35

Instructor Manual Exercise Answers

Exercise 3 (2)
Connecticut studies in literature.
PN2 .C66 OK
PN 2 Literature (General)--Periodicals--American
and English

Connecticut literature yearbook.

PN12 .C66 should be PN2 .Cxx
All yearbook numbers are obsolete.
Merger of 2 titles & class number does not change;
re-Cutter for the new title

36

Click 1 Answer
Click 2 Because the content coverage is the same, Connecticut studies in literature has
the same class number as Hartford studies and University studies, but it is a separate
serial. It has no earlier title, so the Cutter reflects the current title.
Click 3 Answer
Click 4 Yearbook numbers are now all obsolete, even though they are not in
parentheses in the schedules. The appropriate periodical number is to be used instead;
PN2 is again the appropriate number. Because this title represents a non-linear title
change, a merger of two distinct titles, the standard practice is to re-Cutter for the new
title.

Fundamentals of LC Classification Exercise Answers 36

Instructor Manual Exercise Answers

Schedule H Exercises:
Answers
Session 10

Fundamentals of LC Classification Exercise Answers 37

Instructor Manual Exercise Answers

Exercise 1: Defense conversion … 1995

HC79 Economic history and

conditions--Special
topics, A-Z
D4 Defense and disarmament,
Economic impact of
G74 Green (main entry)
1995 Date of publication
HC79.D4 G74 1995

HC79.D4 G74 1995

(HC79 Economic history and conditions—Special topics, A-Z)
(D4 = Defense and disarmament, Economic impact of)
(G74 = Cutter for Green)
(1995 = date of publication)

Fundamentals of LC Classification Exercise Answers 38

Instructor Manual Exercise Answers

Exercise 1: Economic conversion … 1980

HC110 Economic history and

conditions--United States--
Special topics, A-Z
D4 Defense and disarmament,
Economic impact of
U55 United States (main entry)
1980 Date of publication
HC110.D4 U55 1980

HC79.D4 G74 1995

(HC110 Economic history and conditions—United States--Special topics, A-Z)
(D4 = Defense and disarmament, Economic impact of)
(U55 = Cutter for United States)
(1980 = date of publication)

Fundamentals of LC Classification Exercise Answers 39

Instructor Manual Exercise Answers

Exercise 1: Economics and the wind … c2005

HC110 Economic history and

conditions--United States--
Special topics, A-Z
D45 Disasters, Economic impact
of
E36 Economic … (main entry)
2005 Date of publication
HC110.D45 E36 2005

HC110.D45 E36 2005

(HC110 Economic history and conditions—United States--Special topics, A-Z)
(D45 = Disasters, Economic impact of )
(E36 = Cutter for Economic (main entry))
(2005 = date of publication)

Fundamentals of LC Classification Exercise Answers 40

Instructor Manual Exercise Answers

Exercise 1: Location of manufacturing plants

… 1961
HC110 Economic history and
conditions--United States--
Special topics, A-Z
D5 Distribution of industry.
Industrial location
U55 United States (main entry)
1961 Date of publication
HC110.D5 U55 1961

HC110.D5 U55 1961

(HC110 Economic history and conditions—United States--Special topics, A-Z)
(D5 = Distribution of industry. Industrial location)
(U55 = Cutter for United … (main entry))
(1961 = date of publication)

Fundamentals of LC Classification Exercise Answers 41

Instructor Manual Exercise Answers

Exercise 1: Proximity, distance, and diversity

… 2005
HC79 Economic history and
conditions--Special
topics, A-Z
D5 Distribution of industry.
Industrial location
P76 Proximity … (main entry)
2005 Date of publication
HC79.D5 P76 2005

HC79.D5 P76 2005

(HC79 Economic history and conditions—Special topics, A-Z)
(D5 = Distribution of industry. Industrial location)
(P76 = Cutter for Proximity … (main entry))
(2005 = date of publication)

Fundamentals of LC Classification Exercise Answers 42

Instructor Manual Exercise Answers

Exercise 2: Boletim estatístico do cacau …

HD9200 Cocoa. Chocolate
.A4-.Z By region or country, A-Z (Table H20)
B6 Brazil (Regions and Countries
Table)
.x Periodicals (Table H20)
B73 Brazil … (main entry)
a Work letter needed (this is a
periodical with a corporate main entry)
No date of publication added!
HD9200.B6 B73a

HD9200.B6 B73a
(HD9200 = Cocoa. Chocolate industry)
(.A4-.Z = By region or country, A-Z: follow shelflist precedent, or refer to Regions
and Countries Table)
(B6 = Brazil (from Regions and Countries Table))
(.x = Periodicals)
(B73 = Brazil … (main entry of work: it is a corporate body))
(a = work letter added to main entry Cutter because this is a periodical with a
corporate main entry)
(no date of publication added because this is a periodical!)

Fundamentals of LC Classification Exercise Answers 43

Instructor Manual Exercise Answers

Exercise 2: Cacau informe economico …

HD9200 Cocoa. Chocolate

.A4-.Z By region or country, A-Z
(Table H20)
B6 Brazil (Regions and Countries
Table)
.x Periodicals (Table H20)
C33 Cacau … (main entry)
No date of publication added!
HD9200.B6 C33

HD9200.B6 C33
(HD9200 = Cocoa. Chocolate industry)
(.A4-.Z = By region or country, A-Z: follow shelflist precedent, or refer to Regions
and Countries Table)
(B6 = Brazil (from Regions and Countries Table))
(.x = Periodicals)
(C33 = Cacau … (main entry)
(no date of publication added because this is a periodical!)

Fundamentals of LC Classification Exercise Answers 44

Instructor Manual Exercise Answers

Exercise 2: Study of cocoa production in Brazil …

[1989]

HD9200 Cocoa. Chocolate

.A4-.Z By region or country, A-Z (Table H20)
B6 Brazil (Regions and Countries
Table)
.x2 General works. History (including
biography, A-Z) (Table H20)
.B62 Brazil, General works
S78 Study … (main entry)
1989 Date of publication

HD9200.B62 S78 1989

HD9200.B6 S78 1989

(HD9200 = Cocoa. Chocolate industry)
(.A4-.Z = By region or country, A-Z: follow shelflist precedent, or refer to Regions
and Countries Table)
(B6 = Brazil (from Regions and Countries Table))
(.x2 = General works. History (including biography, A-Z))
(S78 = Study … (main entry)
(1989 = date of publication)

Fundamentals of LC Classification Exercise Answers 45

Instructor Manual Exercise Answers

Exercise 2: Joaquim Ignácio Tosta Filho … 1986

HD9200 Cocoa. Chocolate
.A4-.Z By region or country, A-Z (Table H20)
B6 Brazil (Regions and Countries
Table)
.x2 General works. History (including
biography, A-Z) (Table H20)
.B62 Brazil, Biography
T67 Tosta (subject of biography)
+4 Garcez (digit for main entry)
1986 Date of publication
HD9200.B62 T674 1986

HD9200.B62 T674 1986

(HD9200 = Cocoa. Chocolate industry)
(.A4-.Z = By region or country, A-Z: follow shelflist precedent, or refer to Regions
and Countries Table)
(B6 = Brazil (from Regions and Countries Table))
(.x2 = General works. History (including biography, A-Z))
(T67 = Tosta (biographee))
4 = Garcez (main entry (a digit is added to represent the main entry since the
biographee is on the second Cutter– if this were an autobiography, the digit would
represent the “autobiographee,” the same person represented by the beginning of the
second Cutter!)
(1986 = date of publication)

Fundamentals of LC Classification Exercise Answers 46

Instructor Manual Exercise Answers

Exercise 2: Bahia cacaueira … 1979

HD9200 Cocoa. Chocolate
.A4-.Z By region or country, A-Z (Table H20)
B6 Brazil (Regions and Countries
Table)
.x3A-Z Local, A-Z (Table H20)
.B63A-Z Brazil, Local, A-Z
B34 Bahia (local subdivision in Brazil)
+4 Garcez (digit for main entry)
1979 Date of publication

HD9200.B63 B344 1979

HD9200.B63 B344 1979

(HD9200 = Cocoa. Chocolate industry)
(.A4-.Z = By region or country, A-Z: follow shelflist precedent, or refer to Regions
and Countries Table)
(B6 = Brazil (from Regions and Countries Table))
(.x3 = Local, A-Z)
(B34 = Bahia (local subdivision in Brazil) use Cutter already assigned in shelflist, or,
if no Cutter is already in this class, use the Cutter Table to create one)
(4 = Garcez (main entry (a digit is added to represent the main entry since the local
subdivision is on the second Cutter))
(1979 = date of publication)

Fundamentals of LC Classification Exercise Answers 47

Instructor Manual Exercise Answers

Exercise 2: Cacau no norte … 1978

HD9200 Cocoa. Chocolate
.A4-.Z By region or country, A-Z (Table H20)
B6 Brazil (Regions and Countries
Table)
.x3A-Z Local, A-Z (Table H20)
.B63A-Z Brazil, Local, A-Z
M38 Mato Grosso (local subdivision in Brazil)
+3 Cacau … (digit for main entry)
1978 Date of publication
HD9200.B63 M383 1978

HD9200.B63 M383 1978

(HD9200 = Cocoa. Chocolate industry)
(.A4-.Z = By region or country, A-Z: follow shelflist precedent, or refer to Regions
and Countries Table)
(B6 = Brazil (from Regions and Countries Table))
(.x3 = Local, A-Z)
(M38 = Mato Grosso (local subdivision in Brazil) use Cutter already assigned in
shelflist, or, if no Cutter is already in this class, use the Cutter Table to create one)
(3 = Cacau (main entry (a digit is added to represent the main entry since the local
subdivision is on the second Cutter)
(1978 = date of publication)

Fundamentals of LC Classification Exercise Answers 48

Instructor Manual Exercise Answers

Exercise 2: Making chocolate … 2006

HD9200 Cocoa. Chocolate
.A4-.Z By region or country, A-Z (Table H20)
B6 Brazil (Regions and Countries
Table)
.x4A-Z Firms, etc., A-Z (Table H20)
.B64A-Z Brazil, Firms, etc., A-Z
C66 Cooperativa (the firm)
+7 Santos … (digit for main entry)
2006 Date of publication
HD9200.B64 C667 2006

HD9200.B64 C667 2006

(HD9200 = Cocoa. Chocolate industry)
(.A4-.Z = By region or country, A-Z: follow shelflist precedent, or refer to Regions
and Countries Table)
(B6 = Brazil (from Regions and Countries Table))
(.x4 = Firms, etc., A-Z)
(C66 = Cooperativa (the firm’s name))
(7 = Santos (main entry (a digit is added to represent the main entry since the firm’s
name is on the second Cutter)
(2006 = date of publication added)

Fundamentals of LC Classification Exercise Answers 49

Instructor Manual Exercise Answers

Schedule N Exercises:
Answers

Session 11

(Each of the lines in the exercise answers flies in to the slide, with the
completed call number in blue flying in at the end)

Fundamentals of LC Classification Exercise Answers 50

Instructor Manual Exercise Answers

Exercise 1: Sea, earth, sky … c1980

N6537 Base number

A53 Anderson
A4 Table N6, Reproductions
(Collections). By date
1980 Publication date

N6537.A53 A4 1980

51

N6537.A53 A4 1980
(.A53 = Anderson)
(A4 from Table N6, “Reproductions (Collections). By date”)
(1980 = Date of publication)

Fundamentals of LC Classification Exercise Answers 51

Instructor Manual Exercise Answers

Exercise 1: Fortune’s favorite child …

c2003

N6537 Base number

A53 Anderson
M38 Table N6, .xA8-.xZ, Biography
and criticism (Cutter for
Maurer = M38 (main entry))
2003 Publication date
N6537.A53 M38 2003

52

N6537.A53 M38 2003

(.A53 = Anderson)
(M38 = main entry, to fit in the span .xA8-.xZ from Table N6, “Biography and
criticism”)
(2003 = Date of publication)

Fundamentals of LC Classification Exercise Answers 52

Instructor Manual Exercise Answers

Exercise 1: Andy Warhol, conversation …

1989

N6537 Base number

W37 Warhol
A35 Table N6, .A35, Speeches,
essays, interviews, etc. of the
artist. By date
1989 Publication date
N6537.W37 A35 1989

53

N6537.W37 A35 1989

(.W37 = Warhol)
(A35 from Table N6, “Speeches, essays, interviews, etc. of the artist”)
(1989 = Date of publication)

Fundamentals of LC Classification Exercise Answers 53

Instructor Manual Exercise Answers

Exercise 1: Andy Warhol, work and play

… c2003

N6537 Base number

W37 Warhol
A4 Table N6, Reproductions
(Collections). By date
2003 Publication date

N6537.W37 A4 2003

54

N6537.W37 A4 2003
(.W37 = Warhol)
(A4 from Table N6, “Reproductions (Collections). By date”)
(2003 = Date of publication)

Fundamentals of LC Classification Exercise Answers 54

Instructor Manual Exercise Answers

Exercise 1: Global Warhol … c2003

N6537 Base number

W37 Warhol
A4 Table N6, Reproductions
(Collections). By date
2003 Publication date
a Work letter necessary because
of the previous entry (also
published in 2003!)
N6537.W37 A4 2003a
55

N6537.W37 A4 2003a
(.W37 = Warhol)
(A4 from Table N6, “Reproductions (Collections). By date”)
(2003a = Date of publication) (“By date” in Table N6 allows work letter “a” to be
assigned, even though this is not a photocopy or a facsimile)
The previous work was published in the same year and classes in the same area of the
schedule, so a work letter is added to the date in this work’s call number to make the
number unique.

Fundamentals of LC Classification Exercise Answers 55

Instructor Manual Exercise Answers

Exercise 2: Ottoman architecture in

Albania, 1385-1912 … 1990
NA700 Base number from schedule
+755 Country number for Albania from
Table N5
NA1455 Addition of NA700 and 755
A4 Table N15 applied to span .A4-
.A43 from Table N5 (General work)
K54 Kiel (main entry)
1990 Publication date
NA1455.A4 K54 1990

NA1455.A4 K54 1990

(NA1455.A4 = Albania, General works (Table N15))
(K54 = main entry, Kiel)
(1990 = Date of publication)

Fundamentals of LC Classification Exercise Answers 56

Instructor Manual Exercise Answers

Exercise 2: [Graditeljstvo u Hrvatskoj.

English] … 1994
NA700 Base number from schedule
+755 Country number for Croatia from
Table N5
NA1455 Addition of NA700 and 755
C76 Table N15 applied to span .C76-
.C763 from Table N5 (General work)
M64 Mohorovicić (main entry)
+13 Addition for English translation
1994 Date of publication
NA1455.C76 M6413 1994

NA1455.C76 M6413 1994

(NA1455.C76 = Croatia, General works (Table N15))
(M64 = main entry, Mohorovicic)
(+13 = English translation from Translation Table!)
(1994 = Date of publication)

Fundamentals of LC Classification Exercise Answers 57

Instructor Manual Exercise Answers

Exercise 2: Medine architektura Lietuvoje

… 2002
NA700 Base number from schedule
+755 Country number for Lithuania from
Table N5
NA1455 Addition of NA700 and 755
L57 Table N15 applied to span .L57-
.L573 from Table N5 (General work)
M43 Medine … (main entry)
2002 Date of publication

NA1455.L57 M43 2002

NA1455.L57 M43 2002

(NA1455.L57 = Lithuania, General works (Table N15))
(M43 = main entry, Medine …)
(2002 = Date of publication)

Important to note that the Translation table cannot be applied here because there is no
uniform title, only a title in Lithuanian and a title in English.

Fundamentals of LC Classification Exercise Answers 58

Instructor Manual Exercise Answers

Exercise 2: Istorizmas ir modernas Vilniaus

… 2000
NA700 Base number from schedule
+755 Country number for Lithuania from
Table N5
NA1455 Addition of NA700 and 755
L572 Table N15 applied to span .L57-
.L573 from Table N5 (Local, A-Z)
V55 Vilnius
+5 Luksionyte-Tolvaisiene (main entry)
2000 Date of publication
NA1455.L572 V555 2000

NA1455.L572 V555 2000

(NA1455.L572 = Lithuania, Local, A-Z (Table N15))
(V55 = Vilnius)
(+5 = main entry, L = 5)
(2000 = Date of publication)

Vilnius is the capital of Lithuania.

Fundamentals of LC Classification Exercise Answers 59

Instructor Manual Exercise Answers

Exercise 2: Architektas Karolis Podcasinskis

… 1994

NA700 Base number from schedule

+755 Country number for Lithuania from
Table N5
NA1455 Addition of NA700 and 755
L573 Table N15 applied to span .L57-
.L573 from Table N5 (Special
artists, A-Z)

See next slide as well–

NA1455.L573 P6335 1994
(NA1455.L573 = Lithuania, Special artists, A-Z (Table N15))
(P63 = Podczaszynski)
(+3 = .x3-.x39 from Table N7 for Biography and criticism)
(+5 = author, L = 5 (note subarrangement prescribed by Table N7 is by author, but
interpret this to mean main entry)
(1994 = Date of publication)

Fundamentals of LC Classification Exercise Answers 60

Instructor Manual Exercise Answers

Exercise 2: Architektas Karolis Podcasinskis

… 1994 (cont’d)

P63 Podczaszyński
+3 Table N7: .x3-.x39 (Biography and
criticism)
+5 Levandauskas (main entry)
1994 Date of publication

NA1455.L573 P6335 1994

NA1455.L573 P6335 1994

(NA1455.L573 = Lithuania, Special artists, A-Z (Table N15))
(P63 = Podczaszynski)
(+3 = .x3-.x39 from Table N7 for Biography and criticism)
(+5 = author, L = 5 (note subarrangement prescribed by Table N7 is by author, but
interpret this to mean main entry)
(1994 = Date of publication)

Fundamentals of LC Classification Exercise Answers 61

Instructor Manual Exercise Answers

SACO Exercise: Answers

Session 13

Fundamentals of LC Classification Exercise Answers 62

Instructor Manual Exercise Answers

SACO exercise: War elephants

UH100.5.E44

Elephants

Note to instructor:
This SACO exercise answer presentation starts with the blank template on p. 6 of the
trainees’ exercise handout. It might be a good idea to review the preliminary steps
leading up to this point in the process before proceeding with this presentation, but
since those steps are outlined in the trainees’ handouts, any review here is
reinforcement.

Animation: the slide shows the top half of the proposal form. Be sure to mention that
this is not the complete form. 1) On the first click, a red arrow flies in to highlight the
Single # radio button;
2) On the second click, a red arrow flies in to the Proposed class # box;
3) On the third click, the proposed class number UH100.5.E44 appears in the box;
4) On the fourth click, a red arrow flies in to the Caption box;
5) On the fifth click, the caption Elephants appears in the box
The bottom half of the form is on the next slide.

Fundamentals of LC Classification Exercise Answers 63

Instructor Manual Exercise Answers

SACO exercise: War elephants

Kistler, J.M. War elephants, 2006.

UH100.5.B67

[email protected]

64

This is the bottom half of the form.

Animation:
1) On the first click, a red arrow flies in to highlight the Work cat. box;
2) On the second click, the Work cat. citation appears in the box;
3) On the third click, a red arrow flies in to the Pattern box;
4) On the fourth click, the pattern UH100.5.B67 appears in the box. Remind
attendees that there could be other appropriate patterns cited here instead. This is
not the only pattern, although since it was the existing number that was used to
generate the form for this proposal, it is a very good pattern;
5) On the fifth click, a red arrow flies in to highlight the Email address box;
6) On the sixth click, a generic email address appears in the box.
7) On the seventh click, a red arrow flies in to highlight the Save box.

Fundamentals of LC Classification Exercise Answers 64

Instructor Manual Exercise Answers

SACO exercise: War elephants

65

Animation:
1) On the first click, a red arrow flies in to highlight the “OK” box;
2) On the second click, the Classification proposal System text box appears;
3) On the third click, a read arrow flies in to highlight the Refresh button on the
Proposal System text box.

Fundamentals of LC Classification Exercise Answers 65

Instructor Manual Exercise Answers

SACO exercise: War elephants

66

Animation:
1) On the first click, a read arrow flies in to highlight the proposed number and
caption. Remember to point out that the proposed number and caption will be in green
font.

Fundamentals of LC Classification Exercise Answers 66

Instructor Manual Exercise Answers

SACO exercise: War elephants

[email protected]

[email protected]

LC Classification proposal UH100.5.E44 submitted

Hello Coop!

I have just submitted an LC Classification proposal for new class

UH100.5.E44.

Thanks!

Your name

Animation:
1) On the first click, the generic email address appears in the From: box;
2) On the second click, the email address [email protected] appears in the To: box;
3) On the third click, the subject line “LC Classification proposal UH100.5.E44
submitted” appears in the Subject: box;
4) On the fourth click, the text of the message appears. Remind attendees that there is
no set format required for the message– it is simply to convey to the Coop Team that a
proposal has been made.

Fundamentals of LC Classification Exercise Answers 67

Instructor Manual Exercise Answers

SACO exercise: War elephants

Other services
Use of animals in military service
Other, A-Z
UH100.5.E44 (C) Elephants

68

No animation on this slide.

This is the Tentative Weekly List that shows the proposed number and caption and its
hierarchy. The (C) indicates that this is a PCC generated (i.e. SACO) proposal.

Fundamentals of LC Classification Exercise Answers 68

Instructor Manual Exercise Answers

SACO exercise: War elephants

Other services
Use of animals in military service
Other, A-Z
UH100.5.E44 Elephants

69

No animation on this slide.

Background information: The proposal has been discussed at the weekly editorial
meeting. Since this proposal was on Weekly List 50, it was discussed the meeting on
Wednesday, December 13, 2006 (N.b.: the proposal did not actually appear on this
Weekly List– it appeared on a Weekly List earlier in 2006 before the implementation
of the new online proposal system-- Weekly List 50 is used here since it was one of
the first lists issued under the new proposal guidelines and workflow).
This slide shows the Approved Weekly List and the proposed number and caption and
its hierarchy. Note that there is no (C) on this list. The proposal was approved at the
editorial meeting; if it had not been approved for some reason, or if it had been
modified in any way before being approved, the person making the proposal would
have received email notification of the rejection, or of any modifications. However,
the email message would only be sent if the person making the proposal had included
an email address on the form!

Fundamentals of LC Classification Exercise Answers 69

Instructor Manual Exercise Answers

SACO exercise: War elephants

Thank you!

You have successfully contributed a

new number and caption to the LC
Classification schedules!

70

Once the proposal is approved and posted to an Approved Weekly List, the number
and caption are added to the master version of Classification Web.
Suggestion: search the number UH100.5.E44 in Classification Web to show attendees
the approved number and caption.

Fundamentals of LC Classification Exercise Answers 70

Instructor Manual Appendix A

Appendix A:
Excerpt from QH540 Ecology

Fundamentals of LC Classification A-1

Instructor Manual Appendix A

Fundamentals of LC Classification A-2

Instructor Manual Appendix B

Appendix B1:
Cutter Table (G 63)

Fundamentals of LC Classification B-1

Instructor Manual Appendix B

Appendix B2:
Dates Table (G 140)

Fundamentals of LC Classification B-2

Instructor Manual Appendix B

Appendix B3:
Translation Table (G 150)

Fundamentals of LC Classification B-3

Instructor Manual Appendix B

Appendix B4:
Biography Table (G 320, F 275)

The Translation Table can be applied to the .xA6-Z area of the Biography Table. Do not
use the Translation Table with the .xA2-.xA5 area of the Biography Table.

Fundamentals of LC Classification B-4

Instructor Manual Appendix C

Appendix C1:
Table P-PZ40

Note on P-PZ40 .xZ5-.xZ999:

As a guide for assigning book numbers in the range .xZ5-.xZ999 of Table P-PZ40,
Library of Congress shelflisters use a table that divides the alphabet into five units, based
on the number range 5-999+:

.xZ5-.xZ599 A-F
.xZ6-.xZ699 G-L
.xZ7-.xZ799 M-R
.xZ8-.xZ899 S-U
.xZ9-.xZ999 V-Z

However, this is only a guide, and any existing alphabetical arrangement in the shelflist
takes precedence over this table.

P-PZ40 examples from Yale University Library:

http://www.library.yale.edu/cataloging/Orbis2Manual/PPZ40example.htm

Fundamentals of LC Classification C-1

Instructor Manual Appendix C

Appendix C2:
Tables N6 and N7

Table N6

Table N7

Fundamentals of LC Classification C-2

Instructor Manual Appendix D

Appendix D:
Additional Exercises

These two exercises are provided to give you more practice using the literary author
tables. The tables needed to complete the exercises and the answer sheets are in this
appendix.

Exercise 1. P-PZ39. Emily Dickinson

Emily Dickinson's author number is PS1541, subarranged by table P-PZ39. Use the table
to complete the call numbers. Use the LC Cutter table where applicable; assume no
conflict. Titles in the Title column in brackets are uniform titles.

Call Number Main Entry Title Imprint

PS1541 Dickinson, Emily, [Poems] The poems Cambridge, Mass. :
1830-1886. of Emily Dickinson Belknap Press,
/ edited by R.W. 1999.
Franklin.
PS1541 Dickinson, Emily, [Selections. Mérida, Venezuela :
1830-1886. Spanish. 2002] Los Ediciones El Otro,
sótanos del alma : El Mismo : 2002.
Emily Dickinson
PS1541 Dickinson, Emily, [Poems. Selections] New York : Modern
1830-1886. The selected poems Library, 2000.
of Emily Dickinson.
PS1541 The Emily Niwot, Colo. :
Dickinson journal. University Press of
SUBJECT: Colorado, c1992-
Dickinson, Emily,
1830-1886--
Periodicals.
PS1541 MacKenzie, Cynthia Concordance to the Boulder : University
J., 1948- letters of Emily Press of Colorado,
Dickinson. c2000.
PS1541 Dickinson, Emily, [Correspondence. Mineola, N.Y. :
1830-1886. Selections] Letters Dover Publications,
of Emily Dickinson. 2003.
PS1541 Allen, Rupert C. Solitary prowess : San Francisco : Saru
the transcendentalist Press, 2005.
poetry of Emily
Dickinson.

Fundamentals of LC Classification D-1

Instructor Manual Appendix D

Exercise 2. P-PZ33 (9 numbers), P-PZ43 (Jane Austen)

Jane Austen has the number range PR4030-4038, subarranged by table P-PZ33. Use the
table to complete the call numbers. Numbers in bold/underlined are already in the
shelflist. Otherwise, assume no conflict. Use the LC Cutter table where applicable. In the
Title column, titles in brackets are uniform titles.

Call Number Main Entry Title Imprint

Austen, Jane, [Novels] The complete New York :
1775-1817. novels / Jane Austen ; Penguin
introduction by Karen Joy Books, 2006.
Fowler.
Austen, Jane, Bite-size Jane Austen : New York :
1775-1817. sense and sensibility from Thomas Dunne
one of England's greatest Books, 1999.
writers / compiled by Karin
Baji and John P. Holms.
Austen, Jane, [Novels. French] Oeuvres [Paris] :
1775-1817. romanesques complètes. Gallimard,
[Translator not given] c2000-
PR4034 .E5 2003 Austen, Jane, Emma / Jane Austen ; edited London ; New
1775-1817. with an introduction and York : Penguin
notes by Fiona Stafford. Books, c2003.
Austen, Jane, [Emma. Italian] Emma / Jane [Milano] :
1775-1817. Austen ; a cura di Mario Ultra, [1945]
Casalino.
Jane Austen's Emma : a New York :
casebook / edited by Fiona Oxford
Stafford. University
Press, 2006.
Persuasions (Victoria, B.C.) [Victoria, B.C.]
Persuasions. : Jane Austen
SUBJECT: Austen, Jane, Society of
1775-1817--Periodicals. North America,
[1980-?
Poplawski, A Jane Austen encyclopedia. Westport,
Paul. Conn. :
Greenwood
Press, c1998.
Tuite, Clara, Romantic Austen : sexual Cambridge,
1964- politics and the literary UK :
canon. Cambridge
SUBJECT: Austen, Jane, University
1775-1817--Criticism and Press, 2002.
interpretation--History.

Fundamentals of LC Classification D-2

Instructor Manual Appendix D

Excerpt from Table P-PZ32

Fundamentals of LC Classification D-3

Instructor Manual Appendix D

Excerpt from Table P-PZ32 (2)

Fundamentals of LC Classification D-4

Instructor Manual Appendix D

Excerpt from Table P-PZ32 (3)

Fundamentals of LC Classification D-5

Instructor Manual Appendix D

Excerpt from Table P-PZ32 (4)

Fundamentals of LC Classification D-6

Instructor Manual Appendix D

Excerpt from Table P-PZ32 (5)

Fundamentals of LC Classification D-7

Instructor Manual Appendix D

Table P-PZ33

Fundamentals of LC Classification D-8

Instructor Manual Appendix D

Table P-PZ39

Table P-PZ43

Fundamentals of LC Classification D-9

Instructor Manual Appendix D

Exercise 1. P-PZ39. Emily Dickinson. ANSWERS

Call Number Main Entry Title Imprint

PS1541 .A1 1999 Dickinson, Emily, [Poems] The poems Cambridge, Mass. :
<.A1: collected 1830-1886. of Emily Dickinson Belknap Press,
works subarranged / edited by R.W. 1999.
by date; editor is no Franklin.
longer used to
subarrange>

PS1541 .A57 2002 Dickinson, Emily, [Selections. Mérida, Venezuela :

<.A57: translations, 1830-1886. Spanish. 2002] Los Ediciones El Otro,
collected or sótanos del alma : El Mismo : 2002.
selected, Other Emily Dickinson
languages, .A5-
.A59; subarranged
by date>

PS1541 .A6 2000 Dickinson, Emily, [Poems. Selections] New York : Modern
<.A6: selections, 1830-1886. The selected poems Library, 2000.
subarranged by of Emily Dickinson.
date>

PS1541 .Z485 The Emily Niwot, Colo. :

Dickinson journal. University Press of
<.Z485: despite the SUBJECT: Colorado, c1992-
title, it's not ED's Dickinson, Emily,
journal, which 1830-1886--
would be .Z5A3, it's Periodicals.
a periodical, .Z481-
.Z489>

PS1541 .Z49 2000 MacKenzie, Cynthia Concordance to the Boulder : University

<.Z49: dictionaries, J., 1948- letters of Emily Press of Colorado,
indexes; If the table caption is Dickinson. c2000.
subarranged by "By date," book Cutter
subarrangement is not
date.> used. The LC record
incorrectly subarranges
by main entry>
PS1541.Z5 A4 2003 Dickinson, Emily, [Correspondence. Mineola, N.Y. :
<.Z5A4; letters 1830-1886. Selections] Letters Dover Publications,
subarranged by <Although this book of Emily Dickinson. 2003.
date> does not have an editor,
if it did, you would not
subarrange by cuttering
to the editor>

Fundamentals of LC Classification D-10

Instructor Manual Appendix D

PS1541.Z5 A59 Allen, Rupert C. Solitary prowess : San Francisco : Saru

2005 the transcendentalist Press, 2005.
<.Z5A5-.Z5Z: poetry of Emily
general works; Dickinson.
second Cutter is to
the main entry>

Exercise 2. P-PZ33 (9 numbers), P-PZ43 (Jane Austen)

Call Number Main Entry Title Imprint

PR4030 2006 Austen, Jane, [Novels] The complete New York :
1775-1817. novels / Jane Austen ; Penguin
<Collected works by introduction by Karen Joy Books, 2006.
date; note that Fowler Fowler.
is not the editor>
PR4032 .B35 1999 Austen, Jane, Bite-size Jane Austen : New York :
1775-1817. sense and sensibility from Thomas Dunne
<Selections, 2, one of England's greatest Books, 1999.
subarranged by editor, writers / compiled by Karin
Baji> Baji and John P. Holms.
PR4033 .F7 2000 Austen, Jane, [Novels. French] Oeuvres [Paris] :
1775-1817. romanesques complètes. Gallimard,
<translations 3, by [Translator not given] c2000-
language; no editor
Cutter>
PR4034 .E5 2003 Austen, Jane, Emma / Jane Austen ; edited London ; New
1775-1817. with an introduction and York : Penguin
<Separate works, 4; notes by Fiona Stafford. Books, c2003.
already in shelflist>
PR4034.E5 I8 1945 Austen, Jane, [Emma. Italian] Emma / Jane [Milano] :
1775-1817. Austen ; a cura di Mario Ultra, [1945]
<Table P-PZ43; Casalino.
subarranged by
language; Cutter for
Italian>
PR4034.E53 J36 2005 Jane Austen's Emma : a New York :
casebook / edited by Fiona Oxford
<Table P-Z43; 3 Stafford. University
added to work Cutter Press, 2006.
[E5] for criticism;
book Cutter from main
entry>

Fundamentals of LC Classification D-11

Instructor Manual Appendix D

PR4036 .A15 Persuasions (Victoria, B.C.) [Victoria, B.C.]

Persuasions. : Jane Austen
<periodical, 6; Cutter SUBJECT: Austen, Jane, Society of
assigned between .A1- 1775-1817--Periodicals. North America,
.A19> [1980-?
PR4036 .A28 1998 Poplawski, A Jane Austen encyclopedia. Westport,
Paul. Conn. :
<Dictionaries, Greenwood
indexes, etc. 6, Cutter Press, c1998.
range .A2-.A3>
PR4037 .T85 2002 Tuite, Clara, Romantic Austen : sexual Cambridge,
1964- politics and the literary UK :
<Criticism. General canon. Cambridge
works, 7; book number SUBJECT: Austen, Jane, University
from main entry> 1775-1817--Criticism and Press, 2002.
interpretation--History.

CAUTION: The last exercise (Tuite. Romantic Austen) is a work of general criticism. If
the book focuses on a specific theme or topic in Austen, you should use PR4038, with a
first Cutter to the topic from the list under the table P-PZ32 17. For example:

Collins, Irene. Jane Austen and the clergy. London : Hambledon Press, 1993.
SUBJECT: Austen, Jane. 1775-1817--Characters--Clergy.

PR4038 Base number PR4030 + 8 <Special, A-Z>

.C53 Clergy <From table P-PZ32 17>
C64 Collins <main entry>
1993 Date of publication

Here is a section from P-PZ32 17:

Fundamentals of LC Classification D-12

 Instructor Manual Appendix E

Appendix E1:
Library of Congress Classification
Bibliography
Work Tools: Print Sources

Cataloging Service Bulletin. Washington, D.C.: Library of Congress, 1978- Quarterly. ISSN
0160-8029

Dersham, Larry D. Cataloging Made Easy: A Concise Edition of Library of Congress

Classification and Subject Headings. Buffalo, N.Y.: William S. Hein, 2004.

Dick, Gerald K. LC Author Numbers. Castle Rock, Colo.: H. Willow Research and Publishing,
1992.

Library of Congress. Cataloging Policy and Support Office. LC Classification Outline. 7th ed.
Washington, D.C.: Cataloging Distribution Service, 2003.

Library of Congress Classification Schedules. Washington, D.C.: Cataloging Distribution

Service, 1996-2006. [Schedules issued in separate volumes for individual classes or
subclasses.]

Library of Congress. Geography and Map Division. Map Cataloging Manual. Washington, D.C.:
Cataloging Distribution Service, 1991- Looseleaf; also available on Cataloger’s Desktop.

Library of Congress. Library of Congress Classification. K Tables. Form Division Tables for
Law. 2005 ed. Washington, D.C.: Cataloging Distribution Service, 2005.

Library of Congress. Subject Cataloging Division. LC Classification, Additions and Changes.

Washington, D.C.: Cataloging Distribution Service, 1941-2001.

MARC 21 Concise Formats. 2006 ed. Washington, D.C.: Cataloging Distribution Service, 2006.

MARC 21 Format for Bibliographic Data. 1999 ed. Washington, D.C.: Cataloging Distribution
Service, 1999. 2 v. (loose-leaf); [1999 ed. with Updates 1-3 interfiled; Updates 4-7
(2003-2006) available separately].

MARC 21 Format for Classification Data: Including Guidelines for Content Designation.
Washington, D.C.: Cataloging Distribution Service, 2000. Looseleaf; includes Updates 1-
4 (through 2003) interfiled; Updates 5-7 (2004-2006) available separately. Also available
on Cataloger’s Desktop.

SACO Participants’ Manual. Washington, D.C.: Cataloging Distribution Service, 2001. Prepared
by Adam L. Schiff for the Program on Cooperative Cataloging. [2nd ed. forthcoming
2007]

Fundamentals of LC Classification E-1

 Instructor Manual Appendix E

Scott, Mona L. Conversion Tables. 3rd ed. Westport, Conn.: Libraries Unlimited, 2006. [LC to
Dewey/Dewey to LC]
Subject Cataloging Manual. Classification. 2nd ed. Washington, D.C.: Cataloging Distribution
Service, 1995. [also available on Cataloger’s Desktop]

Subject Cataloging Manual. Shelflisting. 2nd ed. Washington, D.C.: Cataloging Distribution
Service, 1995. [out of print; a new edition combining Shelflisting and Classification is
forthcoming; current ed. available on Cataloger’s Desktop]

Super LCCS: Gale’s Library of Congress Classification Schedules Combined with Additions and
Changes. 2007 ed. Detroit: Gale Research, 2007.

Online Resources

Cataloger’s Desktop. Available by subscription. See http://www.loc.gov/cds/desktop/

Classification Web. Available by subscription. See http://classweb.loc.gov

Geographic Cutter Numbers (Tables G1548-G9804). Available as a PDF file from

http://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/gcutter.html

Library of Congress Classification (LCC) Weekly Lists. 2002-

http://www.loc.gov/aba/cataloging/classification/weeklylists/
Supersedes print version, LC Classification, Additions and Changes.

Marc Distribution Service (MDS) Classification http://www.loc.gov/cds/mds.html#lccr

Web Sites

Columbia University Libraries Digital Program. Columbia HILCC: A Hierarchical Interface to

LC Classification. Accessed 3/12/07
http://www.columbia.edu/cu/libraries/inside/projects/metadata/classify/

Cyberstacks Homepage. Accessed 3/12/07

http://www.public.iastate.edu/~CYBERSTACKS/homepage.html

ENDECA at the NCSU Libraries. Accessed 3/12/07

http://www.lib.ncsu.edu/endeca/
The catalog: http://www.lib.ncsu.edu/catalog/

Frequently Asked Questions about LC Classification Numbers in BIBCO Records. Accessed

3/12/07
http://www.loc.gov/catdir/pcc/bibco/classfaq.html

Fundamentals of LC Classification E-2

 Instructor Manual Appendix E

Library of Congress. Cataloging and Support Office. Classification Web: Quick Start Tutorial
(Dec. 16, 2004). Accessed 3/12/07
http://classificationweb.net/tutorial/
Library of Congress Classification Outline. Accessed 3/12/07
http://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/lcco/

Library of Congress Online Catalog. http://catalog.loc.gov Accessed 3/12/07

Vizine-Goetz, Diane. “Using Library of Congress Classification Schemes for Internet

Resources.” (OCLC Internet Cataloging Project Colloquium Position Paper). “Last edited
11/23/99.” Accessed 3/12/07 http://staff.oclc.org/%7Evizine/Intercat/vizine-goetz.htm

Books and Articles: General Literature Related to LC Classification

Chan, Lois Mai. A Guide to the Library of Congress Classification. 5th ed. Englewood, Colo.:
Libraries Unlimited, 1999.

________. “Exploiting LCSH, LCC, and DDC to Retrieve Networked Resources : Issues and
Challenges.” In Proceedings of the Bicentennial Conference on Bibliographic Control for
the New Millennium, ed. Ann M. Sandberg-Fox, 159-78. Washington, D.C.: Cataloging
Distribution Service, 2001.

Chandler, Adam and Jim LeBlanc. “Exploring the Potential of a Virtual Undergraduate Library
Collection Based on the Hierarchical Interface to LC Classification.” Library Resources
and Technical Services 50 (July 2006): 157-65.

Cole, John Y., ed. The Library of Congress in Perspective: A Volume Based on the Reports of
the 1976 Librarian’s Task Force and Advisory Groups. New York: R.R. Bowker, 1978.

Davis, Stephen Paul. “HILCC: A Hierarchical Interface to Library of Congress Classification.”

In High-Level Subject Access Tools and Techniques in Internet Cataloging, ed. Judith R.
Ahronheim, 19-48. Binghamton, N.Y.: Haworth Information Press, 2002. Co-published
simultaneously as Journal of Internet Cataloging 5 (2002).

Dittmann, Helena and Jane Hardy. Learn Library of Congress Classification. Library Basics
Series, no. 1. Lanham, Md.: Scarecrow Press, 2000.

Ferris, Anna M. “If They Buy It, Will They Use It: A Case Study on the Use of Classification
Web.” Library Resources and Technical Services 50 (April 2006): 129-37.

Frank, Eibe and Gordon W. Paynter. “Predicting Library of Congress Classifications from
Library of Congress Subject Headings.” Journal of the American Society for Information
Science and Technology 55 (Feb. 1, 2004): 214-27.

Furrie, Betty. Understanding MARC Bibliographic: Machine-Readable Cataloging. 7th ed.

Washington, D.C.: Cataloging Distribution Service, 2003.

Fundamentals of LC Classification E-3

 Instructor Manual Appendix E

Goldberg, Jolande E. “Library of Congress Classification: Shelving Device for Collections or

Organization of Knowledge Fields?” In Knowledge Organization and Change:
Proceedings of the Fourth International ISKO Conference, 15-18 July 1996, Washington,
DC, USA, ed. Rebecca Green, 33-42. Frankfurt/Main: Indeks Verlag, 1996.

Guenther, Rebecca S. “Bringing the Library of Congress Classification into the Computer Age.”
In Knowledge Organization and Change: Proceedings of the Fourth International ISKO
Conference, 15-18 July 1996, Washington, DC, USA, ed. Rebecca Green, 26-32.
Frankfurt/Main: Indeks Verlag, 1996.

Huestis, Jeffrey C. “Clustering LC Classification Numbers in an Online Catalog for Improved

Browsability.” Information Technology and Libraries 7 (Dec. 1988): 381-93.

Immroth, John Phillip. “Library of Congress Classification.” In Encyclopedia of Library and

Information Science, [1968-c2002]. v. 15, p. 93-200.

________. Analysis of Vocabulary Control in Library of Congress Classification and Subject

Headings. Littleton, Colo.: Libraries Unlimited, 1971.

Joy, Albert H. and Rick Lugg. “The Books Are Shelf-Ready—Are You? Accepting LC
Classification Call Numbers from OCLC Cataloging Copy.” Library Acquisitions:
Practice and Theory 22 (Spring 1998): 71-89.

LaMontagne, Leo E. American Library Classification with Special Reference to the Library of
Congress. Hamden, CT: Shoe String Press, 1961.

Kwasnik, Barbara H. and Victoria L. Rubin. “Stretching Conceptual Structures in Classifications

across Languages and Cultures.” Cataloging & Classification Quarterly 37 (2003): 33-
47.

Larson, Ray R. “Experiments in Automatic Library of Congress Classification.” Journal of the

American Society for Information Science 43 (Mar. 1992): 130-48.

LeBlanc, Jim. “Classification and Shelflisting as Value Added: Some Remarks on the Relative
Worth and Price of Predictability, Serendipity, and Depth of Access.” Library Resources
and Technical Services 39 (1995): 294-302.

Lonergan, D. “Fooling LC: Michael Crichton and Eaters of the Dead.” Behavioral and Social
Sciences Librarian 16, no.2 (1998): 63-72.

Mann, Thomas. Library Research Models: A Guide to Classification, Cataloging, and

Computers. New York: Oxford University Press, 1993.

Fundamentals of LC Classification E-4

 Instructor Manual Appendix E

________. “General Browsing, Focused Browsing, and Use of Classified Bookstacks.” In The
Oxford Guide to Library Research, 46-64. 3rd ed. New York: Oxford University Press,
2005.

Massey, Susan A. and Michael Malinconico. “Cutting Cataloging Costs: Accepting LC

Classification Call Numbers from OCLC Cataloging Copy.” Library Resources and
Technical Services 41 (1997): 29-38.

Miksa, Francis L. The Development of Classification at the Library of Congress. Occasional

Papers, University of Illinois Graduate School of Library and Information Science, no.
164. [Champaign, Ill.]: University of Illinois, Graduate School of Library and
Information Science, 1984.

Petroski, Henry. The Book on the Bookshelf. New York: A. Knopf, 1999.

Schimmelpfeng, Richard H. and C. Donald Cook. The Use of the Library of Congress
Classification: Proceedings of the Institute on the Use of the Library of Congress
Classification: New York City, July 7-9, 1966. Chicago: American Library Association,
1968.

Shorten, Jay, Michele Seikel, and Janet H. Ahrberg. “Why Do You Still Use Dewey? Academic
Libraries that Continue with Dewey Decimal Classification.” Library Resources and
Technical Services 49 (April 2005): 123-36.

Stevenson, Gordon. Andreas Schleiermacher’s Bibliographic Classification and Its Relationship

to the Dewey Decimal and Library of Congress Classifications. Occasional Papers,
University of Illinois Graduate School of Library Science, no. 136. Champaign, Ill.:
University of Illinois, Graduate School of Library Science, 1978.

Stump, Cheryl and Rick Torgerson. “The Basics of LC and Dewey.” Mississippi Libraries 68,
no. 2 (Summer 2004): 43-45.

Subrahmanyam, Bhagirathi. “Library of Congress Classification Numbers: Issues of Consistency

and Their Implications for Union Catalogs.” Library Resources and Technical Services
50 (April 2006): 110-119.

Taylor, Arlene G. “Chapter 11. Systems of Categorization.” In The Organization of Information.

2nd ed. Westport, Conn.: Libraries Unlimited, 2004.

Vizine-Goetz, Diane. “Online Classification Implications for Classifying and Document{-like

object} Retrieval. In Knowledge Organization and Change: Proceedings of the Fourth
International ISKO Conference, 15-18 July 1996, Washington, DC, USA, ed. Rebecca
Green, 249-53. Frankfurt/Main: Indeks Verlag, 1996.

Fundamentals of LC Classification E-5

 Instructor Manual Appendix E

Williamson, Nancy. The Library of Congress Classification: A Content Analysis of the Schedules
in Preparation for their Conversion into Machine Readable Form. Washington, D.C.:
Library of Congress, Cataloging Distribution Service, 1995.

Zhao, Lisa. “Save Space for Newcomers—Analyzing Problems in Book Number Assignments
under the LCC System.” Cataloging & Classification Quarterly 38 (2004): 105-119.

Books and Articles: Special Subjects and Formats

Algier, Aimee. “The Dynamic Caribbean: A Challenge for the Library of Congress.” Cataloging
& Classification Quarterly 32 (2002): 29-38.

Campbell, D. Grant. “Global Abstractions: “The Classification of International Economic Data

for Bibliographic and Statistical Purposes.” Cataloging & Classification Quarterly 37
(2003): 221-34.

Caster, Lillie D. The Classifier’s Guide to LC Class H: Subdivision Techniques for the Social
Sciences. New York: Neal-Schuman, 1986.

Clack, Doris H. Black Literature Resources: Analysis and Organization. Books in Library and
Information Science, 18. New York: M. Dekker, 1978.

Dailey, Gail M. “Reference Work in a Classified Collection: Is LC Class K Successful?” Legal

References Quarterly 13 (1993): 91-104.

Dilevko, Juris and Keren Dali. “Improving Collection Development and Reference Services for
Interdisciplinary Fields through Analysis of Citation Patterns: An Example Using
Tourism Studies.” College & Research Libraries 65 (May 2004): 216-41 [Using LCC for
collection analysis]

Elrod, J. McRee. “Classification of Internet Resources: An AUTOCAT Discussion.” Cataloging

& Classification Quarterly 29 (2000): 19-38.

Ensor, Pat L. “Web Organization: Use of the Library of Congress Classification.” Technicalities
16 (Mar. 1996): 11-12.

Goldberg, Jolande E. “Development of a Universal Law Classification: a Retrospective on

Library of Congress Class K.” Cataloging & Classification Quarterly 35 (2003): 355-
436.

________. Library of Congress Classes JZ and KZ : Historical Notes and Introduction to

Application. Washington, D.C.: Library of Congress, Cataloging Distribution Service,
1997.

Fundamentals of LC Classification E-6

 Instructor Manual Appendix E

Guides to Library of Congress Subject Headings and Classification on Peace and International
Conflict Resolution. Washington, D.C.: U.S. Institute of Peace, 1990.

Guthrie, Lawrence Simpson. “Monastic Cataloging and Classification and the Beginnings of
“Class B” at the Library of Congress.” Cataloging & Classification Quarterly 35 (2003):
447-65.

Hickey, David and Shelley Arlen. “Falling through the Cracks: Just How Much ‘History’ is
History?” Library Collections, Acquisitions, and Technical Services 26 (Summer 2002):
97-106. [Use of LC classification for collection analysis]

Inter, Sheila S. and Elizabeth Futas. “The Role and Impact of Library of Congress Classification
on the Assessment of Women’s Studies Collections.” Library Acquisitions 20 (Fall
1996): 267-79.

Johnston, George F. “The Literature of Classical Antiquity and the PA Schedule.” Cataloging &
Classification Quarterly 17 (1993): 69-85.

Laer, Coen J. P. van. “A Comparative Lawyer’s Review of the LC Classification System.” Law
Library Journal 91 (Spring 1999): 305-11.

Martínez Arellano, Felipe and Roberto Abell Bennet. Manejo y aplicación de las tablas para el
derecho latinoamericano en el sistema de clasificación L.C. México, D.F.: Universidad
Nacional Autónoma de México, 2002.

McKnight, Mark. Music Classification Systems. Music Library Association Basic Manual Series,
no. 1. Lanham, Md.: Scarecrow Press, 2002.

Moore, S. M. “Navigating the G Schedule.” Cataloging & Classification Quarterly 27 (1999):

375-84.

Music Cataloging Bulletin. Ann Arbor, Mich.: Music Library Association, 1970-2003. Monthly.
ISSN 0027-4283. [currently available online by subscription, 2003- ;
http://www.musiclibraryassoc.org/publications/mcb.shtml]

Music OCLC Users Group. Newsletter. Greeley, Colo.: Music OCLC Users Group, 1977-
Irregular. ISSN 0161-1704.

Nero, Lorraine M. “Classifying the Popular Music of Trinidad and Tobago.” Cataloging &
Classification Quarterly 42 (2006): 119-33.

Ogbonyomi, Andrew Leo. “The Treatment of African Documents by the Library of Congress
Classification Scheme.” African Journal of Library, Archives & Information Science 4
(Oct. 1994): 117-25.

Fundamentals of LC Classification E-7

 Instructor Manual Appendix E

Ruderman, Ella. “Library of Congress Classification for Judaica: Recent Changes (1995-1996).”
Judaica Librarianship 10 (Spring 1999/Winter 2000): 31-40.

Schaefer, Barbara Kirsch. Classification of the Literature of Mathematics: A Comparative

Analysis of the American Mathematical Society and the Library of Congress Schemes.
Pittsburgh, Pa.: Schaefer, 1973.

Shelton, Judith M. “Library of Congress’ Class L: Education, Table L7—An Expansion for
Local Use.” Cataloging & Classification Quarterly 32 (2001): 31-42.

Sitas, Anestis. “The Classification of Byzantine Literature in the Library of Congress

Classification.” Knowledge Organization 28 (2001): 85-94.

________. “Greek Folk Literature, Poetry, Folk Songs and the Library of Congress PA
(Supplement) Schedule.” Cataloging & Classification Quarterly 28 (1999): 53-68.

Smiraglia, Richard P. Shelflisting Music: Guidelines for Use with the Library of Congress
Classification, M. MLA Technical Reports, no. 9. Philadelphia: Music Library
Association, 1981.

________. Music Cataloging: The Bibliographic Control of Printed and Recorded Music in
Music Libraries. Englewood, Colo.: Libraries Unlimited, 1989.

Studwell, William E. “What’s the Number: An Unabashed Guide to the Library of Congress
Classification for the Social Sciences.” Behavioral and Social Sciences Librarian 13
(1994): 39-48.

Weitz, Jay. Music Coding and Tagging: MARC 21 Content Designation for Scores and Sound
Recordings. 2nd ed. Belle Plaine, Minn.: Soldier Creek Press, 2001.

Zhou Jian-Zhong. “A New Subclass for Library of Congress, QF: Computer Science.”
Cataloging & Classification Quarterly 26 (1998): 37-44.

Fundamentals of LC Classification E-8

Instructor Manual Appendix E

Appendix E2:
Other Classification Schemes

Dewey Decimal Classification (DDC)

http://www.oclc.org/dewey/
• Basic classes organized by disciplines or fields of study
• Ten main classes
o Each main class has ten divisions
o Each division has ten sections
• Arabic numerals: 3-digit number plus decimals
• Decimals are used to make a number more specific
o The longer the number, the more specific the subject
• Numbers can be “built” using standard subdivisions and notations from auxilliary
tables

Main classes:

000 Computers, information & general reference

100 Philosophy & psychology
200 Religion
300 Social sciences
400 Language
500 Science
600 Technology
700 Arts & recreation
800 Literature
900 History & geography

Example: 613.712083
(For a work on exercise for weight loss in children)

Superintendent of Documents (SuDocs)

http://www.gpo.gov/su_docs/fdlp/pubs/explain.html
• Developed in the Library of the Government Printing Office between 1895 and
1903
• Designed to group together publications by the same government author
• Within an agency, publications are grouped according to the subordinate
organization

Example: PREX 1.2:AR 2

(For a work on the architecture of the West Wing of the White House, from the
Executive Office of the President, code PREX)

National Library of Medicine (NLM)

Fundamentals of LC Classification E-9

Instructor Manual Appendix E

http://www.nlm.nih.gov/pubs/factsheets/nlmclassif.html
• Covers the field of medicine and related sciences only
• Uses classes QS-QZ and W-WZ, classes permanently excluded from the LC
Classification schedules
• Follow the principles of LC Classification

Example: WC 503 M629 2004

(For a work on midlife and older adults with HIV; WC—Communicable diseases;
503—AIDS, HIV infections)

Universal Decimal Classification (UDC)

http://www.udcc.org/
• Developed in Belgium by Paul Otlet and Henri La Fontaine; first published in
1904
• Based on DDC, expanded to include more detailed subdivisions, typographical
symbols, and the use of facets
• A work dealing with two or more subjects can be classed by two or more UDC
notations, linked by a colon

Example: 362.1 : 658.3 : 681.31

(For a work on the use of computers in the management of hospital personnel;
Hospitals : Personnel management : Computers)

Colon Classification (CC)

http://www.iskoi.org/doc/colon.htm
• Developed by S.R. Ranganathan in 1933
• Uses 42 main classes which represent the fields of knowledge
• Each class is broken down into its basic elements, grouped by common attributes,
called facets
• Five main facets of a subjects: personality, matter, energy, space, time
• Notations (numbers and letters) are used to represent the facets
• Punctuation marks are used to indicate the nature and type of the following facet

Example: J , 381 ; 4 : 5 . 42 ‘ N70

(for a work on eradication of virus in rice plants in Japan, published in 1971:
Agriculture , rice plant ; virus disease : eradication . Japan ‘ 1970s)

Fundamentals of LC Classification E-10

Instructor Manual Appendix E

Appendix E3:
Historical Data
Order of publication of LCC schedules

1901 E-F History: America

(Western Hemisphere)
1902 Z Bibliography. Library science
1904 M Music
1905 Q Science
1910 B-BJ Philosophy. Psychology
G Geography. Anthropology. Recreation
H Social sciences
J Political sciences
N Fine arts
R Medicine
T Technology
U Military science
V Naval science
1911 A General works
L Education
S Agriculture
1915 C Auxiliary sciences of history
PN, PR General literature. English and American literature
PS, PZ Fiction in English. Juvenile literature
1916 D History: General and “Old World”
(Eastern Hemisphere)
1927 BL-BX Religion
1928 P-PA General philology and linguistics.
Classical languages and literature
1933 PB-PH Modern European languages
1935 PJ-PM Languages and literatures of Asia,
Africa, Oceania. American Indian
languages. Artificial languages
1936 P-PM suppl. Index to languages and dialects
PQ (pt. 1) French literature
1937 PQ (pt. 2) Italian, Spanish, and Portuguese
literatures
1938 PT (pt. 1) German literature
1942 PA suppl. Byzantine and modern Greek literature.
Medieval and modern Latin literature
PT (pt. 2) Dutch and Scandinavian literatures
1948 PG Russian literature
1969 KF Law of the United States
1973 KD Law of the United Kingdom and Ireland
1976 KE Law of Canada

Fundamentals of LC Classification E-11

Instructor Manual Appendix E

1977 K Law (General)

1982 KK-KKC Law of Germany
1984 KDZ,KG-KH Law of the Americas, Latin America, West Indies
1985 KJV-KJW Law of France
1989 KJ-KKZ Law of Europe
1993 KL-KWZ Law of Asia and Eurasia, Africa, Pacific Area, etc.
1997 JZ International relations
1998 KZ Law of nations
2000 KBR-KBU Canon law. Law of the Roman Catholic Church.
Holy See
2003 KBP,KBM Islamic law. Jewish law
2005 KB Religious law in general. Comparative religious law

Although it often is assumed that the Library of Congress Classification schedules were
developed and published in a comprehensive and logical order, that actually is not the
case. With very few exceptions, the individual schedules were published “when they
were done.” The development and the publication of the schedules were not dictated by
an overarching plan. The schedules were developed and published when time allowed,
and when the appropriate subject specialist staff members were able to complete the
work. There were general guidelines for the development of the schedules, but because
the materials being classed varied, the schedules were not necessarily uniform. Some
schedules, like BL-BX, were published “after application to some 105,000 volumes over
a 10-year period.” This was to ensure that the classification scheme “worked” before it
was published!

Each of the individual schedules was drafted by LC subject specialists who consulted
bibliographies, treatises, comprehensive histories, and existing classification schemes in
initially determining the scope and content of an individual class and its subclasses.
Charles Martel was the overall supervisor for the development of Library of Congress
Classification.

Class Z (Bibliography and Library Science) was chosen to be the first schedule to be
developed because it covered the bibliographical works necessary for the reclassification
project. The next schedules, E-F (American history and geography), were developed
because of their particular subject relevance. (E-F were actually published first, in 1901,
followed by Z in 1902).

Subclass KF (Law of the United States) was published in 1969. This was the first step
towards the development of a universal law classification system. Other subclasses in
Class K were published as they were completed. Development in Class K continues, with
subclass KB (Religious law in general. Comparative religious law. Jurisprudence)
published in 2005.

American Indian law is currently under development.

Fundamentals of LC Classification E-12

Instructor Manual Appendix E

(For more information, see Jolande Goldberg’s article on the development of a universal
law classification (listed in the bibliography, Appendix E)).

When looking at the chronology of the development of the individual LC Classification

schedules, the role and impact of historical events cannot be ignored. For example, the
impact of the events of World War I (1914-1918) are apparent when looking at Class D
(History: General and Old World), which was first published in 1916. By the end of the
war, the concepts of world history and the balance of power that were understood at the
time of the development of Class D had altered to a considerable extent. Although a
supplement for the war was printed in 1921, the legacy of pre-war concepts can be found
in the schedule even today.

It also is interesting to note that Class H (Social Sciences) was first published in 1910,
with a second edition in 1920, and a third in 1949. The first edition preceded the events
of World War I, while the second edition followed those events, and the third edition
appeared at the end of World War II. A Second World War supplement came out in 1947.
One can imagine many of the changes in each edition, and in the supplement, as a
reflection of world events.

Another interesting pre-World War II perspective is noted still today in Class D:

in Class DT History of Africa, where the arrangement of the African

regions and countries is based on the former colonizers-- British East
Africa, German East Africa, British West Africa, French West Africa,
Portuguese-speaking West Africa, etc. (the captions still include the
colonizers, but they follow the regional name in most cases)
in Class DB History of Austria (which now has note "Including Austro-
Hungarian Empire"-- Austro-Hungarian Empire used to be the caption),
where the parenthesized numbers that once applied to the empire are now
closed-- this is especially noticeable under Local history and description,
where Czechoslovakia, Bukowina, Liechtenstein, Transylvania, etc.,
formerly parts of the empire, are all now classed elsewhere. But those
historical links to the Austro Hungarian Empire are still in the schedules.

Fundamentals of LC Classification E-13

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
FOR DOUBLE SIDED COPY
Instructor Manual Appendix F

Answers to Exercises

Outline of LCC Exercises:

Answers

Session 3

Fundamentals of LC Classification F-1

Instructor Manual Appendix F

Exercise 1: QH540+ Ecology

Where would you class:

1. dictionary of ecology QH540.4

2. collection of speeches on ecology QH541.145

QH540.83
3. history of ecology in the U.S.
By country: U__

4. ecology of Costa Rica QH101+

Exercise 1: QH540+ Ecology (2)

Where would you class:

5. textbook on ecology QH541

QH541.2
6. book on teaching ecology

Fundamentals of LC Classification F-2

Instructor Manual Appendix F

Exercise 2: RA576+

Where would you class a book on the impact of

air pollution on public health in:

1. the United States RA576.5

2. Virginia RA576.6 by state: V___

3. Richmond, Virginia RA576.6 by state: V__

Exercise 2: RA576+ (2)

Impact of air pollution on public health in:

4. France RA576.7 by country: F__

5. Central America RA576.7 by region: C_

6. Paris, France RA576.7 by country: F_

Fundamentals of LC Classification F-3

Instructor Manual Appendix F

Elements of LC Call Numbers

Exercises: Answers

Session 5

Exercise 1

Wycliff W93 Anderson A53

Shrimp S57 Quality Q35

Blades some options: B595, B62, B625…

Dwyer some options: D897, D94, D95, D96…

Fundamentals of LC Classification F-4

Instructor Manual Appendix F

Exercise 2: Identify the coding errors

TS191.8 $b Z34 1990

TS191.8 $b .Z34 1990
T55.3 $b H3C353 1991
T55.3.H3 $b C353 1991
QP34.5. $b H625 1989
QP34.5 $b .H625 1989
B3279.H49 B696 2000
B3279.H49 $b B696 2000

Exercise 2: Identify the coding errors (2)

B 8313 $b F35 2000

B8313 $b .F35 2000
TR646 .G32 $b W653 1999
TR646.G32 $b W653 1999
HE558 $b .G48 $b G56 2003
HE558.G48 $b G56 2003
TX716.M4 $b .K44 1989
TX716.M4 $b K44 1989

Fundamentals of LC Classification F-5

Instructor Manual Appendix F

Principles of LC Classification &

Assigning Numbers:
Answers

Session 6

Exercise 1
1. Nature’s economy : a history of ecological
ideas
QH540.8

2. Dictionary of the environment

QH540.4
3. Economy of nature : a textbook in basic
ecology
QH541

4. Ecological research strategy

QH541.2
12

Fundamentals of LC Classification F-6

Instructor Manual Appendix F

Exercise 1

5. Performing ecological risk

assessments
QH541.15.R57
6. Philosophy of ecology : from science
to synthesis
QH540.5
7. Survey methods for ecosystem
management
QH541.15.S95
13

Tables:
Answers

Session 7

14

Fundamentals of LC Classification F-7

Instructor Manual Appendix F

Exercise 1

Goodall, Jane, 1934- . Through a window : my thirty

years with the chimpanzees of Gombe. 1990.
QL31.G58 A3 1990
G58 for Goodall; A3 for autobiography, by date
Goodall, Jane, 1934- . Africa in my blood : an
autobiography in letters : the early years. 2000.
QL31.G58 A4 2000
G58 for Goodall; A4 for Letters, by date

15

Exercise 1

Goodall, Jane, 1934-. Beyond innocence : an

autobiography in letters : the later years. 2001.
QL31.G58 A4 2001
G58 for Goodall; A4 for Letters, by date
Greene, Meg. Jane Goodall : a biography. 2005.
QL31.G58 G74 2005
G58 for Goodall; .xA6-Z for biography, by main
entry (Greene); add date

16

Fundamentals of LC Classification F-8

Instructor Manual Appendix F

Exercise 1

Koebner, Linda. Tickled by a gorilla, kissed by

a whale : career paths of women who work to
save wildlife. 1997

QL26 .K64 1997

Collective biography, classed under QL26
Do not use Biography table
Cutter for main entry (Koebner)

17

Schedule P Language Exercises:

Answers

Session 8

Fundamentals of LC Classification F-9

Instructor Manual Appendix F

Hervey/Thinking German translation/2005

PF3498.H47 2005
PF3000 Base number
P-PZ1b Translating 498-499
498 General works 498
PF3498 Class number
.H47 Book number (Hervey)
2005 Publication date
19

The German language and the real

world/1995
PF3087.G47 1995
PF3000 Base number
P-PZ1b History of the lang. 75-88
87 20th century 87
PF3087 Class number
.G47 Book number (German)
1995 Publication date

20

Fundamentals of LC Classification F-10

Instructor Manual Appendix F

Coggle/Improve your German (Teach

yourself books)/2004

PF3112.5 .C64 2004

PF3000 Base number
112.5 P-PZ1b Self instructors
112.5
PF3112.5 Class number
.C64 Book number (Coggle)
2004 Publication date
21

Easy German phrase book/c1994

PF3121.E27 1994
PF3000 Base number
121 P-PZ1b Conversation. Phrase
books. 121
PF3121 Class number
.E27 Book number (Easy)
1994 Publication date
22

Fundamentals of LC Classification F-11

Instructor Manual Appendix F

Schedule P Literature Exercises:

Answers

Session 8

V.S. Pritchett P-PZ40 (1)

[Essays] Complete collected essays. 1991.

PR6031.R7 1991
Collected works in any genre subarranged by
date only

[Short stories] Complete collected stories. 1992.

PR6031.R7 1992
Collected works in any genre subarranged by
date only
24

Fundamentals of LC Classification F-12

Instructor Manual Appendix F

V.S. Pritchett P-PZ40 (2)

The other side of a frontier : a V.S. Pritchett reader. 1984.
PR6031.R7 A6 1984
Selections in any genre subarranged by A6 and date

A man of letters : selected essays. c1985.

PR6031.R7 A6 1985
Selections in any genre subarranged by A6 and date

[Short stories. Selections] Essential stories. 1985.

PR6031.R7 A6 1985b
Selections in any genre subarranged by A6 and date
and work letter
25

V.S. Pritchett P-PZ40 (3)

Blind love, and other stories. 1969.

PR6031.R7 B55 1969
Separate work; note distinction between a
collection, a selection, and a collection of
stories treated as a separate work

A cab at the door : a memoir. 1968.

PR6031.R7 Z46 1968
Autobiography Z46

26

Fundamentals of LC Classification F-13

Instructor Manual Appendix F

V.S. Pritchett P-PZ40 (4)

PR6031.R7 Z59 1987 Baldwin … 1987.

PR6031.R7 Z65 2006 Bloom … 2006.
PR6031.R7 Z78 1992 Stinson … c1992.
PR6031.R7 Z897 2004 Treglown … 2004.

Biography-criticism uses range Z5-

Z999; digits determined by filing order
of main entry; actual range in this
context is Z59x-Z896x
27

Special Types of Material Exercises:

Answers

Session 9

Fundamentals of LC Classification F-14

Instructor Manual Appendix F

Exercise 1 (1)
Channing. All about organic chemistry. 1st
ed.1968.
QD251 .C38 <already in the shelflist>
Advanced textbooks--Through 1970.
No dates were added before 1982.

Channing. All about organic chemistry. 2nd ed.

1975.
QD251.2 .C43 1975
QD251.2 Advanced textbooks--1971-2000.
New class number; book number is re-Cuttered.
Date added for works cataloged after 1982.
29

Exercise 1 (2)
Channing. Basic organic chemistry. 3rd ed. Macmillan,
1984.
QD251.2 .C43 1984
QD251.2 Advanced textbooks--1971-2000
Title change does not affect Cutter

Channing. Essential organic chemistry. 3rd ed. Pearson

Prentice-Hall, 1984.
QD251.2 .C43 1984b
Title change does not affect Cutter
Work letter to distinguish editions published in
the same year; assigned to the 2nd item
cataloged 30

Fundamentals of LC Classification F-15

Instructor Manual Appendix F

Exercise 1 (3)
Channing. Basic organic chemistry. 3rd ed.
Hutchinson, 1984.
QD251.2 .C43 1984c
Work letter assigned for the third manifestation
published in 1984.

Harrington. Essentials of organic chemistry. 4th ed.

2000.
QD251.2 .C43 2000
QD251.2 Advanced textbooks. 1971-2000
Main entry & title have changed but original Cutter
is retained as long as the same class number is
used
31

Exercise 1 (4)
Harrington. Channing’s Essentials of organic chemistry.
5th ed. 2004.

QD251.3 .H37 2004

QD251.3 Advanced textbooks. 2001-
New class number; book number is re-Cuttered

32

Fundamentals of LC Classification F-16

Instructor Manual Appendix F

Exercise 2 (1)
International Conference on AIDS (1990)
RC607.A26 I56 1990

International Conference on AIDS (1991)

RC606.53 .I58 1991
Use the new class number; re-Cutter

International Conference on AIDS (1994)

RC606.53 .I58 1994

Same Cutter used for the later conference; use date

from qualifier even though the publication date is 1995

33

Exercise 2 (2)

International Conference on AIDS (1994)

RC606.53 .I58 1994a
Same call number used for a different set of
conference papers published in the same
year
Work letter is assigned to differentiate; if the
main entry is corporate/conference, the
first work letter begins with “a” rather than
“b”

34

Fundamentals of LC Classification F-17

Instructor Manual Appendix F

Exercise 3 (1)
Hartford studies in literature.
PN2 .H37 OK
PN 2 Literature (General)--Periodicals--American
and English
Studies in literature.
PN2 .S78 should be PN2 .H37
Linear title change (Continues Hartford studies in
literature)
University studies in literature.
PN2 .U56 should be PN2 .H37
Linear title change (Continues Studies in literature)
35

Exercise 3 (2)
Connecticut studies in literature.
PN2 .C66 OK
PN 2 Literature (General)--Periodicals--American
and English

Connecticut literature yearbook.

PN12 .C66 should be PN2 .Cxx
All yearbook numbers are obsolete.
Merger of 2 titles & class number does not change;
re-Cutter for the new title

36

Fundamentals of LC Classification F-18

Instructor Manual Appendix F

Schedule H Exercises:
Answers
Session 10

Exercise 1: Defense conversion … 1995

HC79 Economic history and

conditions--Special
topics, A-Z
D4 Defense and disarmament,
Economic impact of
G74 Green (main entry)
1995 Date of publication
HC79.D4 G74 1995

Fundamentals of LC Classification F-19

Instructor Manual Appendix F

Exercise 1: Economic conversion … 1980

HC110 Economic history and

conditions--United States--
Special topics, A-Z
D4 Defense and disarmament,
Economic impact of
U55 United States (main entry)
1980 Date of publication
HC110.D4 U55 1980

Exercise 1: Economics and the wind … c2005

HC110 Economic history and

conditions--United States--
Special topics, A-Z
D45 Disasters, Economic impact
of
E36 Economic … (main entry)
2005 Date of publication
HC110.D45 E36 2005

Fundamentals of LC Classification F-20

Instructor Manual Appendix F

Exercise 1: Location of manufacturing plants

… 1961
HC110 Economic history and
conditions--United States--
Special topics, A-Z
D5 Distribution of industry.
Industrial location
U55 United States (main entry)
1961 Date of publication
HC110.D5 U55 1961

Exercise 1: Proximity, distance, and diversity

… 2005
HC79 Economic history and
conditions--Special
topics, A-Z
D5 Distribution of industry.
Industrial location
P76 Proximity … (main entry)
2005 Date of publication
HC79.D5 P76 2005

Fundamentals of LC Classification F-21

Instructor Manual Appendix F

Exercise 2: Boletim estatístico do cacau …

HD9200 Cocoa. Chocolate
.A4-.Z By region or country, A-Z (Table H20)
B6 Brazil (Regions and Countries
Table)
.x Periodicals (Table H20)
B73 Brazil … (main entry)
a Work letter needed (this is a
periodical with a corporate main entry)
No date of publication added!
HD9200.B6 B73a

Exercise 2: Cacau informe economico …

HD9200 Cocoa. Chocolate

.A4-.Z By region or country, A-Z
(Table H20)
B6 Brazil (Regions and Countries
Table)
.x Periodicals (Table H20)
C33 Cacau … (main entry)
No date of publication added!
HD9200.B6 C33

Fundamentals of LC Classification F-22

Instructor Manual Appendix F

Exercise 2: Study of cocoa production in Brazil …

[1989]

HD9200 Cocoa. Chocolate

.A4-.Z By region or country, A-Z (Table H20)
B6 Brazil (Regions and Countries
Table)
.x2 General works. History (including
biography, A-Z) (Table H20)
.B62 Brazil, General works
S78 Study … (main entry)
1989 Date of publication

HD9200.B62 S78 1989

Exercise 2: Joaquim Ignácio Tosta Filho … 1986

HD9200 Cocoa. Chocolate
.A4-.Z By region or country, A-Z (Table H20)
B6 Brazil (Regions and Countries
Table)
.x2 General works. History (including
biography, A-Z) (Table H20)
.B62 Brazil, Biography
T67 Tosta (subject of biography)
+4 Garcez (digit for main entry)
1986 Date of publication
HD9200.B62 T674 1986

Fundamentals of LC Classification F-23

Instructor Manual Appendix F

Exercise 2: Bahia cacaueira … 1979

HD9200 Cocoa. Chocolate
.A4-.Z By region or country, A-Z (Table H20)
B6 Brazil (Regions and Countries
Table)
.x3A-Z Local, A-Z (Table H20)
.B63A-Z Brazil, Local, A-Z
B34 Bahia (local subdivision in Brazil)
+4 Garcez (digit for main entry)
1979 Date of publication

HD9200.B63 B344 1979

Exercise 2: Cacau no norte … 1978

HD9200 Cocoa. Chocolate
.A4-.Z By region or country, A-Z (Table H20)
B6 Brazil (Regions and Countries
Table)
.x3A-Z Local, A-Z (Table H20)
.B63A-Z Brazil, Local, A-Z
M38 Mato Grosso (local subdivision in Brazil)
+3 Cacau … (digit for main entry)
1978 Date of publication
HD9200.B63 M383 1978

Fundamentals of LC Classification F-24

Instructor Manual Appendix F

Exercise 2: Making chocolate … 2006

HD9200 Cocoa. Chocolate
.A4-.Z By region or country, A-Z (Table H20)
B6 Brazil (Regions and Countries
Table)
.x4A-Z Firms, etc., A-Z (Table H20)
.B64A-Z Brazil, Firms, etc., A-Z
C66 Cooperativa (the firm)
+7 Santos … (digit for main entry)
2006 Date of publication
HD9200.B64 C667 2006

Schedule N Exercises:
Answers

Session 11

Fundamentals of LC Classification F-25

Instructor Manual Appendix F

Exercise 1: Sea, earth, sky … c1980

N6537 Base number

A53 Anderson
A4 Table N6, Reproductions
(Collections). By date
1980 Publication date

N6537.A53 A4 1980

51

Exercise 1: Fortune’s favorite child …

c2003

N6537 Base number

A53 Anderson
M38 Table N6, .xA8-.xZ, Biography
and criticism (Cutter for
Maurer = M38 (main entry))
2003 Publication date
N6537.A53 M38 2003

52

Fundamentals of LC Classification F-26

Instructor Manual Appendix F

Exercise 1: Andy Warhol, conversation …

1989

N6537 Base number

W37 Warhol
A35 Table N6, .A35, Speeches,
essays, interviews, etc. of the
artist. By date
1989 Publication date
N6537.W37 A35 1989

53

Exercise 1: Andy Warhol, work and play

… c2003

N6537 Base number

W37 Warhol
A4 Table N6, Reproductions
(Collections). By date
2003 Publication date

N6537.W37 A4 2003

54

Fundamentals of LC Classification F-27

Instructor Manual Appendix F

Exercise 1: Global Warhol … c2003

N6537 Base number

W37 Warhol
A4 Table N6, Reproductions
(Collections). By date
2003 Publication date
a Work letter necessary because
of the previous entry (also
published in 2003!)
N6537.W37 A4 2003a
55

Exercise 2: Ottoman architecture in

Albania, 1385-1912 … 1990
NA700 Base number from schedule
+755 Country number for Albania from
Table N5
NA1455 Addition of NA700 and 755
A4 Table N15 applied to span .A4-
.A43 from Table N5 (General work)
K54 Kiel (main entry)
1990 Publication date
NA1455.A4 K54 1990

Fundamentals of LC Classification F-28

Instructor Manual Appendix F

Exercise 2: [Graditeljstvo u Hrvatskoj.

English] … 1994
NA700 Base number from schedule
+755 Country number for Croatia from
Table N5
NA1455 Addition of NA700 and 755
C76 Table N15 applied to span .C76-
.C763 from Table N5 (General work)
M64 Mohorovicić (main entry)
+13 Addition for English translation
1994 Date of publication
NA1455.C76 M6413 1994

Exercise 2: Medine architektura Lietuvoje

… 2002
NA700 Base number from schedule
+755 Country number for Lithuania from
Table N5
NA1455 Addition of NA700 and 755
L57 Table N15 applied to span .L57-
.L573 from Table N5 (General work)
M43 Medine … (main entry)
2002 Date of publication

NA1455.L57 M43 2002

Fundamentals of LC Classification F-29

Instructor Manual Appendix F

Exercise 2: Istorizmas ir modernas Vilniaus

… 2000
NA700 Base number from schedule
+755 Country number for Lithuania from
Table N5
NA1455 Addition of NA700 and 755
L572 Table N15 applied to span .L57-
.L573 from Table N5 (Local, A-Z)
V55 Vilnius
+5 Luksionyte-Tolvaisiene (main entry)
2000 Date of publication
NA1455.L572 V555 2000

Exercise 2: Architektas Karolis Podcasinskis

… 1994

NA700 Base number from schedule

+755 Country number for Lithuania from
Table N5
NA1455 Addition of NA700 and 755
L573 Table N15 applied to span .L57-
.L573 from Table N5 (Special
artists, A-Z)

Fundamentals of LC Classification F-30

Instructor Manual Appendix F

Exercise 2: Architektas Karolis Podcasinskis

… 1994 (cont’d)

P63 Podczaszyński
+3 Table N7: .x3-.x39 (Biography and
criticism)
+5 Levandauskas (main entry)
1994 Date of publication

NA1455.L573 P6335 1994

SACO Exercise: Answers

Session 13

Fundamentals of LC Classification F-31

Instructor Manual Appendix F

SACO exercise: War elephants

UH100.5.E44

Elephants

SACO exercise: War elephants

Kistler, J.M. War elephants, 2006.

UH100.5.B67

[email protected]

64

Fundamentals of LC Classification F-32

Instructor Manual Appendix F

SACO exercise: War elephants

65

SACO exercise: War elephants

66

Fundamentals of LC Classification F-33

Instructor Manual Appendix F

SACO exercise: War elephants

[email protected]

[email protected]

LC Classification proposal UH100.5.E44 submitted

Hello Coop!

I have just submitted an LC Classification proposal for new class

UH100.5.E44.

Thanks!

Your name

SACO exercise: War elephants

Other services
Use of animals in military service
Other, A-Z
UH100.5.E44 (C) Elephants

68

Fundamentals of LC Classification F-34

Instructor Manual Appendix F

SACO exercise: War elephants

Other services
Use of animals in military service
Other, A-Z
UH100.5.E44 Elephants

69

SACO exercise: War elephants

Thank you!

You have successfully contributed a

new number and caption to the LC
Classification schedules!

70

Fundamentals of LC Classification F-35

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
FOR DOUBLE SIDED COPY
Instructor Manual Appendix G

Appendix G: Evaluation Form

Fundamentals of Library of Congress Classification

Your evaluation of this workshop is very important to the future development of this course
and other similar courses. Your honest, candid answers to the following questions will assist
us in providing quality programs.

Please rate the following aspects of today's workshop by checking the box that best reflects your
evaluation:

1. The overall content of the workshop:

5 4 3 2 1___
a. was extremely valuable ___________________________ was of little value
b. provided enough detail ___________________________ was too general
c. was current & relevant ___________________________ was outdated
d. was cohesive & logical ___________________________ was fragmented/difficult to follow
e. was appropriate to my needs ___________________________ was not at all appropriate
f. met its stated objectives ___________________________ did not meet objectives

2. Presenter:

5 4 3 2 1____
a. was knowledgeable __________________________ was unsure of the material
b. had good presentation skills __________________________ had poor presentation skills
c. encouraged participation __________________________ discouraged participation
d. addressed my level of did not consider my level
understanding __________________________
e. answered questions directly __________________________ did not answer questions
f. was prepared __________________________ was not prepared
g. understood the audience __________________________ ignored audience dynamics
dynamics

3. Presenter:

5 4 3 2 1____
a. was knowledgeable __________________________ was unsure of the material
b. had good presentation skills __________________________ had poor presentation skills
c. encouraged participation __________________________ discouraged participation
d. addressed my level of did not consider my level
understanding __________________________
e. answered questions directly __________________________ did not answer questions
f. was prepared __________________________ was not prepared
g. understood the audience __________________________ ignored audience dynamics
dynamics

4. The handouts:

5 4 3 2 1__
a. are excellent _________________________ are poor
b. followed course content _________________________ are disjointed/out of sequence
c. are valuable for future reference _________________________ are of no value

Fundamentals of LC Classification G-1

Instructor Manual Appendix G
5. The PowerPoint slides:

5 4 3 2 1____
a. were clear and easy to read __________________________ were hard to read
b. were well organized __________________________ were poorly organized
c. illustrated concepts clearly __________________________ were confusing
d. covered an appropriate contained too much or not
amount of information __________________________ enough information
e. were visually effective __________________________ were not effective
f. were enhanced by and __________________________ were poorly related to
supported the presenter’s the presenter’s remarks
remarks

Please give the following information about yourself:

6. Your level of knowledge in the subject of this workshop before today: expert 5 4 3 2 1
novice
7. Your level of experience in the subject of this workshop before today: very experienced 5 4 3 2 1
beginner

8. Other comments:

Comments on specific sessions:

THANK YOU!

Fundamentals of LC Classification G-2